m-4272 instruction book - chipkin

Instruction Book

M-4272 Motor BusTransfer System

Digital Motor Bus Transfer System M‑4272

• ProvidesAutomaticandManualtransfersofmotorbussystemsinpowerplantsandindustrialprocessingplants toensureprocesscontinuity

• AutomaticallyselectsFast,In-Phase,ResidualVoltage, andFixedTimemotorbustransfers,basedonvaryingsystemconditions

• Applicableforonewayandbi-directionalManual andAutomatictransfers

• Canbeexpandedtoaccommodatemultiplebreakerconfigurations

• Multiplesetpointprofilesforvariousapplicationrequirements

• Integratedcontrol,supervisoryfunctions,sequence ofevents,andoscillographrecordinginonedevice

• Extensivecommissioningtools,includingringdownanalysis

• OptionalM-3919AGraphicDisplayUnit(GDU) andTouchScreenHumanMachineInterface(HMI) forcommunicatingwithoneortwoM-4272units

• OptionalM-5072RetrofitKitforM-4272Replacementof M-0272/M-0236BAnalogTransferLogicController

SYNCHRONIZING

Integrated Synchronizing System®

–2–

M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System

Standard FeaturesAutomatic Transfer: The digital Motor Bus Transfer System (MBTS) provides the following Automatic Transfer logic and features:

• Transfer initiated by protective relay external to the MBTS

• Automatic Transfer after a loss of the motor bus supply voltage based on theprogrammableundervoltageelement.Thisprovides a selectable backup feature if amanual or protective relay transfer is not initiated.

• FastTransferwithadjustablephaseanglelimit

• In-Phase Transfer at the first phase coincidenceifFastTransferisnotpossible

• ResidualVoltageTransferatanadjustablelowresidualvoltagelimitifFastTransferandIn-PhaseTransferarenotpossible

• FixedTimeTransferafteranadjustabletimedelay

• ProgrammableLoadSheddingwithnotimedelayforFastTransfer

• Programmable load shedding prior toinitiatingIn-PhaseTransfer,ResidualVoltageTransfer,andFixedTimeTransfer

• Adjustablesetpoints fordeltavoltage limitand delta frequency limit

• Verifythenewsource(thesourcetowhichthebusisbeingtransferred)ishealthyandwithinacceptableupperandlowervoltagelimits

Manual Transfer: When a Manual Transfer is initiated the digital MBTS provides the following:

• Sync check functions with adjustableparameters

• Hot Parallel Transfer if enabled (make-before-break)

• Fast Transfer, In-Phase Transfer, and ResidualVoltageTransfer(iftheHotParallelTransferisdisabled)

• ProgrammableLoadSheddingwithnotimedelayforFastTransfer

• Programmable load shedding prior to initiating In-phase Transfer and ResidualVoltageTransfer

• Verifythenewsource(thesourcetowhichthebusisbeingtransferred)ishealthyandwithinacceptableupperandlowervoltagelimits

Circuit Breaker Control: The digital Motor Bus TransferSystemincludesthefollowingCircuitBreakerControl features:

• Control of two circuit breakers with two individual programmable breaker closingtimes

• Three-breakerconfigurationcanbeprovidedbytwoM-4272devices

• Breakerstatussupervision

• Breakerfailuremonitoring

• Fourtripandclosecircuitmonitoringinputs

–3–


Additional Standard Features • SequentialorSimultaneousTransferMode

• BusPhaseUndervoltage(27B)

• Frequency (81) and Rate of Change ofFrequency(81R)forloadshedding

• Instantaneous Phase Overload DetectionSource1and2(50S1)(50S2)

• Breaker Failure (50BF), Source 1 andSource2

• BusVTFuse-LossDetection(60FL)

• AutoTrip

• AutoClose

• Fourdryoutputcontacts(twotripandtwoclose) for Source 1 and Source 2, one lockout/blocking output contact, and 11 programmableoutputcontacts(10Form'a'andoneForm'c')

• SixBreakerStatusinputs(a,b,andserviceposition) for the Source 1 and Source 2breakers, twelve programmable digital inputs

• Allfunctionscanbeenabledordisabled

• Remote/Localcontrolselection

• DeviceON/OFFControlSelection

• M-3931 Human-Machine Interface (HMI)Module

• M-3972StatusModule

• IRIG-Btimesynchronization

• Oscillographicrecording

• TwoRS-232ports(frontandrear)andoneRS-485port(rear)

• M-3872 ISScom® Communications and OscillographicAnalysisSoftware

Optional Features • RJ45EthernetPortUtilizingMODBUSover

TCP/IPProtocolorIEC61850Protocol

• 5Aor1Amodelsavailable

• 60Hzor50Hzmodelsavailable

• M-3919A Graphic Display Unit/Human MachineInterface

• Availableinverticalpanelmount

• M-5072RetrofitKitforM-4272ReplacementofM-0272/M-0236BAnalogTransferLogicController

–4–


* NOTE:The'newsource'isdefinedasthesourcetowhichthebusisbeingtransferred.

TheM-4272DigitalMotorBusTransferSystemprovidesAutomaticandManualTransfers.TheFastTransfer, In-PhaseTransfer,andResidualVoltageTransfermethodsareactivatedat thesame time, ifenabled. If theconditionsfortheFastTransferarenotmet,thentheIn-PhaseTransferortheResidualVoltageTransferwillbeattempted.TheFixedTimeTransferisalsoprovidedifduringatransferoperation,itisnotpossibletomonitorthemotorbusvoltage(duetoBusVTfuseloss,forexample).TheIn-PhaseTransfer,ResidualVoltageTransfer,andFixedTimeTransfermethodscanbeselectivelydisabled.TheAutomaticorManualTransferoperationcanbeblockedbycontrol/statusinputorremoteserialcommunications.SeeFigure2forTypicalApplicationofMotorBusTransferSystemsandFigure3forOpenTransitionTransfermethods.

Automatic TransferAutomaticTransfercanbeinitiatedbyanexternalprotectiontripsignal(86P)oranexternalundervoltagefunction(27)usingcontrol/statusinputtotheMotorBusTransferSystem(MBTS)deviceortriggeredbyasuddenlossofmotorbussupplyvoltageusingtheinternalbusundervoltagerelay(27BFunction).AutomaticTransferallowstransferoperationinbothdirections:fromSource1toSource2,andvice-versa.TheAutomaticTransferprovidesFastTransfer,In-PhaseTransfer,ResidualVoltageTransferandFixedTimeTransfer.TheAutomaticTransferisblockedwhenanylockout/blockingconditionoccurs.TheMBTSwillnotrespondtoanytransfercommandandwillnotsendthetripcommandwhileinthelockout/blockingcondition.

Manual TransferManualtransfercanbeinitiatedbyusingthelocalHuman-MachineInterface(HMI),fromacontrol/statusinputorthroughremoteserialcommunications.TheManualTransferallowstransferoperationineitherdirection:fromSource1toSource2,andviceversa.ManualTransferprovidesHotParallelTransferoracombinationofFastTransfer,In-PhaseTransferandResidualVoltageTransfer.TheManualTransferisblockedwhenanylockout/blockingconditionoccurs.TheMBTSwillnotrespondtoanytransfercommandandwillnotsendthetripcommandwhileinthelockout/blockingcondition.

Transfer ModesTherearetwotransfermodes,SequentialandSimultaneous,intheopentransitiontransferoperation.

Sequential Transfer ModeOnceatransferisinitiated,andiftheSequentialModeisselected,theoldsourcebreakeristrippedwithin10msandclosureofthenewsource*breakerisattemptedonlyuponconfirmationbythebreakerstatuscontactthattheoldsourcebreakerhasopened.Within4msofreceiptofthisconfirmation,allthreemethods,Fast,In-PhaseandResidualVoltageTransferareenabledtosuperviseclosureofthenewsource*breaker,andtheFixedTimeTransferisenabled30cycleslater.Thenewsource*breakeristhenclosedbytheFastTransferMethodifthephaseanglebetweenthemotorbusandthenewsource*iswithinthedeltaphaseanglelimitimmediatelyaftertheoldsourcebreakeropens.

Ifthephaseanglebetweenthemotorbusandthenewsource*isnotwithinthedeltaphaseanglelimit,theoldsourcebreakerisstilltripped.Whenthefourmethodsoftransferareenabled,thenewsource*breakerthencloseseitherasaresultofasubsequentmovementintothedeltaphaseanglelimitwithintheFastTransferTimeWindow,amovementthroughapredictedzerophasecoincidencewithintheIn-PhaseTransferTimeWindow,orbyadropinthemotorbusvoltagebelowtheResidualVoltageTransferlimit,orafterthefixedtimedelayoftheFixedTimeTransfer.Transferiscompletedandthenewsource*breakerisclosedbyanyoftheabovemethodswhosecriteriaisfirstsatisfied.

RefertoFigure4forTimingSequenceofTransferLogicinSequentialTransferMode.

–5–


Simultaneous Transfer Mode

Alternatively,oncea transfer is initiated,and if theSimultaneousMode isselected,within10msof transferinitiate,allthreemethodsoftransfer,Fast,In-PhaseandResidualVoltageTransferareimmediatelyenabledtosuperviseclosureofthenewsource*breakerwithoutwaitingforthebreakerstatuscontactconfirmationthattheoldsourcebreakerhasopened.Atthesameinstant,thecommandsfortheoldsourcebreakertotripandthenewsource*breakertoclosearesentsimultaneouslyifandonlyifthephaseanglebetweenthemotorbusandthenewsource*iswithinthedeltaphaseanglelimitfortheFastTransferMethodimmediatelyupontransferinitiation.HoweveronlytheFixedTimeTransferisenabled30cyclesaftertheoldsourcebreakerhasopened.

Ifthephaseanglebetweenthemotorbusandthenewsource*isnotwithinthedeltaphaseanglelimit,theoldsourcebreakerisstilltripped.Whenthefourmethodsoftransferareenabled,thenewsource*breakerthencloseseitherasaresultofasubsequentmovementintothedeltaphaseanglelimitwithintheFastTransferTimeWindow,amovementthroughapredictedzerophasecoincidencewithintheIn-PhaseTransferTimeWindow,orbyadropinthemotorbusvoltagebelowtheResidualVoltageTransferlimit,orafterthefixedtimedelayoftheFixedTimeTransfer.Transferiscompletedandthenewsource*breakerisclosedbyanyoftheabovemethodswhosecriteriaisfirstsatisfied.

RefertoFigure5forTimingSequenceofTransferLogicinSimultaneousTransferMode.

Bus VT Fuse‑Loss Detection (60FL)ABusVTFuse-Lossconditionisdetectedbycomparingeitherthethree-phasevoltageofthemotorbustothethree-phasevoltageoftheconnectedsource(VT'sinthree-phaseconnection)orsinglephasevoltageofthemotorbustoasinglephasevoltagesoftheconnectedsource(VT'sinsinglephaseconnection):phaseatophasea,phasebtophaseb,andphasectophasec.

Auto TripIfanexternaloperationclosesthesecondbreakerwhileleavingthefirstoneclosed,andiftheAutoTripfeatureisenabled,thereisabreakertripoption:theMBTSwilltripthebreakerthatwasoriginallyclosedorthebreakerthathasjustbeenclosedwithinanadjustabletimedelay(0to50Cyclesinincrementsof0.5Cycle)afterthesecondbreakerisclosed.ThisAutoTripoperatestotransferineitherdirection.Thepurposeistoallowexternalparallel transferbutprohibits inadvertentparalleloperation. Itmustbenotedthat theexternaloperationthatclosedthesecondbreakermustbesupervisedbymeansexternaltothemotorbusttransfersystem.

Auto CloseIfanexternaloperationopensthesecondbreakerwhileleavingthefirstoneopen,andiftheAutoClosefeatureisselected,theMBTSwillclosethebreakerthatwasoriginallyopened.Theoriginallyopenedbreakerwillbeclosedusing theFastTransfer, In-PhaseTransfer,ResidualVoltageTransferorFixedTimeTransfermethoddependinguponthebusvoltagedecayedcondition.ThisAutoCloseoperatestotransferineitherdirection.Thepurposeistopermitatransferwhenthenormally-closedbreakerisaccidentally/inadvertentlytrippedresultingintwoopenbreakers.Thisoperationisverysimilartotheregulartransferprocessexceptitdoesnotsendoutthetripcommand,sincethesecondbreakerisalreadyopened.


–6–


Lockout/Blocking Atransferisblockedwhenanylockout/blockingconditiondescribedbelowisactive:

• VoltageBlocking–Ifpriortoatransfer,thenewsource*voltageexceedstheUpperorLowervoltagelimits,alltransfersareblockedaslongasthevoltageremainsoutsidetheselimits.

• ExternalBlocking –Whenthiscontrolinputcontactisclosed,alltransfersareblocked.

• IncompleteTransferLockout–Blocksanytransferinitiatedbyaprotectiverelayinitiateoranautomaticinitiatedtransferormanualtransferifthelasttransferhasnotbeencompletedwithinthetimedelay.Atimedelaycanbesetfrom50to3000Cycles.TheMBTSremainsinthelockoutconditionuntilmanuallyreset.

• BusVTFuseLossBlocking–TransferisblockediftheBusVTfuselossisdetectedandthecustomerhasselectedtoblocktransferswhenthisoccurs.

• “BothBreakersSameState”Blocking–Ifbothbreakerstatuscontactsareintheopenstate,duetoanexternaloperationthatopensthesecondbreakerwhileleavingthefirstoneopen,andiftheAutoClosefeatureisnotselected,notransfersequenceisinitiated.Furthermore,anysubsequentinitiationofa transfersequencewhile thebreakersare in thisstate is inhibited.Also, ifbothbreakerstatuscontactsareclosedduetoanexternaloperationthatclosesthesecondbreakerwhileleavingthefirstoneclosed,andiftheautotripfeatureisdisabled,notransfersequenceisinitiated.

• TransferinProcessBlocking–Onceatransferisinprocess,anyothertransferinitiateinputswillbeignoreduntiltheoriginaltransferiscomplete.

• BlockingAfterTransfer–Afteratransferhasbeencompleted,anyadditionaltransfersareblockedfor0to8160cycles,asselectedbytheuser.

• Trip/CloseCircuitOpenBlocking–TransferisblockediftheTriporCloseCircuitOpenisdetected.

• 52aand52bPositionDisagreementBlocking–Transferisblockedwhenthe52aand52bstatusinputpositionsdisagree(applicablewhenboth52aand52bstatusinputsareused).

TheOutput8Lockout/BlockingOutputisenergizedwhenanyLockout/BlockingconditionasmentionedaboveisactiveexceptTransferInProcessBlockingandBlockingAfterTransfer.


–7–


†Selectthegreateroftheseaccuracyvalues.Accuracyappliestosinusoidalvoltagewithconstantamplitudeandfrequency.

TRANSFER SETTINGS Setpoint Ranges Increment Accuracy†

Automatic Transfer

Fast Transfer

DeltaPhaseAngleLimit* 0.0to90.0Degrees 0.1Degree 0.5Degree

DeltaVoltageLimit 0to60V 1V 0.5Vor2%

DeltaFrequencyLimit 0.02to2.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.01Hzor5%

TimeWindow** 1to10Cycles 0.5Cycle 1Cycle

Closing Command

TimeDelay*** 0to10Cycles 0.5Cycle 1Cycle

* Accuracy defined at a constant frequency with a delta frequency of zero (0).

** This timer is used to limit the time window during which a Fast Transfer may be initiated.

*** This time delay is only used for Fast Transfer in Simultaneous. The trip and close commands are normally issued at the same time. This time delay allows the flexibility to delay the closing command to accomplish the break-before-make mode of operation (open transition).

In-Phase Transfer


DeltaFrequencyLimit* 0.10to10.00Hz 0.05Hz 0.02Hz(0.1Hz)***

TimeWindow** 10to600Cycles 1Cycle 1Cycleor1%

* The pickup accuracy applies to the 60 Hz model at a range of 57 to 63 Hz, and to the 50 Hz model at a range of 47 to 53 Hz. Beyond these ranges, the accuracy is 0.1 Hz (3-phase); 0.4Hz(single phase).

** This timer is used to limit the time window during which an in-phase transfer may be initiated.

*** Value in parentheses applies to single phase unit.

For In-Phase Transfer, phase angle accuracy at first phase coincidence is 10.0 degrees with up to 10.0 Hz slip frequency.

Residual Voltage Transfer

ResidualVoltageLimit 5to60V 1V 0.5Vor2%

LoadSheddingTimeDelay* 0to100Cycles 1Cycle 1Cycleor1%

Enabling the Load Shedding option allows the user to assign an output contact to shed load.

* The load shedding command is issued when bus voltage drops below residual voltage limit. The close command for the Residual Voltage Transfer is sent after the programmed load shedding time delay.

Fixed Time Transfer

FixedTimeDelay 30to1000Cycles 1Cycle 1Cycleor1%


This method is based on time delay only, and does not use the voltage, phase angle, frequency or current to supervise the closing of the new source breaker. The 'new source' is defined as the source to which the bus is being transferred.

Enabling the Load Shedding option allows the user to assign an output contact to shed load.

* The load shedding command is issued when the Fixed Time delay has timed out. The Close command for the Fixed Time Transfer is sent after the programmed load shedding time delay.

–8–



TRANSFER SETTINGS (cont.) Setpoint Ranges Increment Accuracy†

Manual Transfer

Fast Transfer




TimeWindow** 1to10Cycles 0.5Cycle 1Cycle

Closing Command

TimeDelay*** 0to10Cycles 0.5Cycle 1Cycle


** This timer is used to limit the time window during which a Fast Transfer may be initiated.

*** This time delay is only used for Fast Transfer in Simultaneous mode. The trip and close commands are normally issued at the same time. This time delay allows the flexibility to delay the closing command to accomplish the break-before-make mode of operation (open transition).

In-Phase Transfer


DeltaFrequencyLimit* 0.10to10.00Hz 0.05Hz 0.02Hz(0.1Hz)***

TimeWindow** 10to600Cycles 1Cycle 1Cycleor1%

* The pickup accuracy applies to the 60 Hz model at a range of 57 to 63 Hz, and to the 50 Hz model at a range of 47 to 53 Hz. Beyond these ranges, the accuracy is 0.1 Hz (3-phase); 0.4Hz (single phase).

** This timer is used to limit the time window during which an in-phase transfer may be initiated.

*** Value in parentheses applies to single phase unit.

For In-Phase Transfer, phase angle accuracy at first phase coincidence is 10.0 degrees with up to 10.0 Hz slip frequency.


ResidualVoltageLimit 5to60V 1V 0.5Vor2%


* The load shedding command is issued when bus voltage drops below residual voltage limit. The close command for the Residual Voltage Transfer is sent after the programmed load shedding time delay.

Enabling load shedding option allows the user to assign an output contact to shed load.

–9–




Manual Transfer (cont.)

Hot Parallel Transfer




TimeWindow 1.0to50.0Cycles 0.5Cycle 1Cycle

Tripping Command TimeDelay** 0.0to30.0Cycles 0.5Cycle 1Cycle


** This time delay is only used in the Manual Transfer to implement a Hot Parallel Transfer (make-before-break).

Auto Trip

TripOriginallyClosed Enable/Disable ____ ____ Breaker

TripBreaker Enable/Disable ____ ____ JustClosed

Tripping Command TimeDelay 0.0to50.0Cycles 0.5Cycle 1Cycle

–10–




Common Function Settings

UpperVoltageLimit 5to180V 1V 0.5Vor2% NewSource

LowerVoltageLimit 5to180V 1V 0.5Vor2% NewSource

BreakerClosingTime#1 (Source1Breaker)(1) 0.0to12.0Cycles 0.1Cycle 0.3Cycle

BreakerClosingTime#2 (Source2Breaker)(1) 0.0to12.0Cycles 0.1Cycle 0.3Cycle

BreakerClosingTime Deviation#1(2) 0.0to6.0Cycles 0.1Cycle 0.3Cycle

BreakerClosingTime Deviation#2(2) 0.0to6.0Cycles 0.1Cycle 0.3Cycle(1) This is the time it takes the breaker to close from the issue of a close command to when the breaker status contact closes. The selectable adaptive breaker closing time is also provided.(2) An alarm is activated if the actual Breaker Closing Time exceeds the programmed closing time by this value.

52aand52bPositionDisagreement

PickupTimeDelay(3) 0to30Cycles 1Cycle 1Cycle (Source1Breaker)

DropoutTimeDelay(3) 0to30Cycles 1Cycle 1Cycle (Source1Breaker)

PickupTimeDelay(3) 0to30Cycles 1Cycle 1Cycle (Source2Breaker)

DropoutTimeDelay(3) 0to30Cycles 1Cycle 1Cycle (Source2Breaker)(3) The Time Delays are only applicable when both 52a and 52b Status Inputs of the S1 and S2 breakers are used. The Pickup Time Delay is used to block transfer when the 52a and 52b Status Input positions disagree.

–11–





IncompleteTransfer LockoutTime(4) 50to3000Cycles 1Cycle 1Cycleor1%

LocalManualTransfer InitiateTimeDelay(5) 0to8160Cycles 1Cycle 1Cycleor1%

RemoteManualTransfer InitiateTimeDelay(7) 0to8160Cycles 1Cycle 1Cycleor1%

BlockingAfter Transfer Time(6) 0to8160Cycles 1Cycle 1Cycleor1%

Trip Command PulseLength 15to30Cycles 1Cycle 1Cycle

Close Command PulseLength 15to30Cycles 1Cycle 1Cycle

Trip/CloseCircuit (TCM/CCM) OpenCondition BlockTransfer Disable/Enable(4) This timer is used for situations where the transfer was not completed. Response to a breaker failure is considered a complete transfer, and resets this timer.(5) This time delay is only applicable when the manual transfer is initiated from the local front panel via the HMI or Com1 port.(6) This timer is used to block any additional transfer after a transfer has been completed.(7) This time delay is only applicable when manual transfer is initiated from the Control/Status input, Com2 Port, Com3 Port or Ethernet Port.

–12–


†Selectthegreateroftheseaccuracyvalues.Accuracyappliestosinusoidalvoltagewithconstantamplitudeandfrequency. Valuesinparenthesesapplyto1ACTsecondaryrating.

50BF1

50BF2

27B

FUNCTIONS Setpoint Ranges Increment Accuracy†

27B Bus Phase Undervoltage

Pickup#1,#2,#3,#4 5to120V 1V 0.5Vor2%

InhibitSetting** 5to120V 1V 0.5Vor2%

TimeDelay 1to8160Cycles 1Cycle -1to+3Cyclesor0.5%*

* The pickup and time delay accuracies apply to 60 HZ models at a range of 57 to 63 Hz, and to 50 Hz models at a range of 47 to 53 Hz. Beyond these ranges, the time delay accuracy is 6 Cycles or 0.75% for the bus frequency down to 25 Hz. The time delay accuracy is O 20 Cycles or 1% for the bus frequency at a range of 5 to 25 Hz.

** The Voltage Inhibit setting can be enabled or disabled.

27B #1 is the Bus Phase Undervoltage initiate function that is used for Automatic Transfer from S1 to S2 direction.

27B #2 is the Bus Phase Undervoltage initiate function that is used for Automatic Transfer from S2 to S1 direction.

27B #3 can be used for load shedding.

27B #4 can be used for alarm or trip function.

The 27B functions are applicable only when the bus phase voltage input is applied.

50S1 Instantaneous Phase Overload Detection (Source 1)

Pickup#1,#2 1.0to100.0A 0.1A 0.1Aor3% (0.2to20.0A)* (0.02Aor3%)

TimeDelay 1to8160Cycles 1Cycle 2Cyclesor1%

* Values in parentheses apply to 1A secondary rating. Since this is only a single phase element, the 50S1 Function can only be used for overload detection and not used for overcurrent protection.

50S2 Instantaneous Phase Overload Detection (Source 2)

Pickup#1,#2 1.0to100.0A 0.1A 0.1Aor3% (0.2to20.0A)* (0.02Aor3%)

TimeDelay 1to8160Cycles 1Cycle 2Cyclesor1%

* Values in parentheses apply to 1A secondary rating. Since this is only a single phase element, the 50S2 Function can only be used for overload detection and not used for overcurrent protection.

50BF‑1 Breaker Failure (Source 1)

PickupCurrent 0.10to10.00A 0.01A 0.1Aor2% (0.02to2.00A)* (0.02Aor2%)

TimeDelay 1to30Cycles 1Cycle 1Cycle

50BF-1 can be initiated from designated M-4272 output contacts or programmable inputs.

* Value in parentheses apply to 1A Secondary Rating

50BF‑2 Breaker Failure (Source 2)

PickupCurrent 0.10to10.00A 0.01A 0.1Aor2% (0.02to2.00A)* (0.02Aor2%)


50BF-2 can be initiated from designated M-4272 output contacts or programmable inputs.

* Value in parentheses apply to 1A Secondary Rating

50S1

50S2

–13–


FUNCTIONS (Cont.) Setpoint Ranges Increment Accuracy†

Source 1 Breaker Failure (Using breaker status)


The breaker failure time delay is used to monitor breaker failure when using the breaker status inputs only. The breaker is considered failed when the breaker status has not changed state within this programmable time delay after a trip command is issued. A separate time delay is provided for breaker failure function (50BF) when current is present.

Source 2 Breaker Failure (Using breaker status)


The breaker failure time delay is used to monitor breaker failure when using the breaker status inputs only. The breaker is considered failed when the breaker status has not changed state within this programmable time delay after a trip command is issued. A separate time delay is provided for breaker failure function (50BF) when current is present.

81 Frequency (bus voltage)

Pickup#1,#2 50.00to67.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.02Hz(1.0Hz)** 40.00to57.00Hz*

TimeDelay#1,#2 5to65,500Cycles 1Cycle 3Cyclesor1%

The pickup accuracy applies to 60 Hz models at a range of 57 to 63 Hz, and to 50 Hz models at a range of 47 to 53 Hz. Beyond these ranges, the accuracy is 0.1 Hz (3-phase); 0.4Hz(single phase).

The 81 #1 Function can be used to initiate Load Shedding. The 81 Function is automatically disabled when the bus phase voltage input is less than 5 to 15 V (Positive Sequence) based on the frequency, or less than 5 V (Single Phase).

* This range applies to 50 Hz nominal frequency model.

** Value in parentheses applies to single phase bus voltage frequency.

81R Rate of Change of Frequency (bus voltage)

Pickup#1,#2 0.10to20.00Hz/Sec. 0.01Hz/Sec. 0.05Hz/Sec.or5%

TimeDelay#1,#2 3to8160Cycles 1Cycle +20Cycles

NegativeSequence VoltageInhibit 0to99% 1% 0.5%

IncreasingROCOF Enable/Disable

The 81R #1 Function can be used to initiate Load Shedding. 81R function can only be used when the bus voltage input is three-phase, and for load shedding.

81

81R


–14–


TCM

CCM

ISSL


FUNCTIONS (Cont.) Setpoint Ranges Increment Accuracy†

Bus VT Fuse‑Loss Detection

DeltaPickup* 5to25V 1V .05Vor2%

TimeDelay** 1to8160Cycles 1Cycle 3Cyclesor1%****

BlockingDropOut TimeDelay*** 1to300Cycles 1Cycle 3Cyclesor1%****

* Mismatched voltage of the motor bus in respect to the connected source.

** This time delay is for the programmable alarm output.

*** This is the time it takes to drop out (reset) the block transfer after no Bus VT fuse-loss is detected.

**** The pickup and time delay accuracies apply to 60 HZ models at a range of 57 to 63 Hz, and to 50 Hz models at a range of 47 to 53 Hz. Beyond these ranges, the time delay accuracy is 6 Cycles or 0.75% for the bus frequency down to 25 Hz. The time delay accuracy is O 20 Cycles or 1% for the bus frequency at a range of 5 to 25 Hz.

If the bus VT fuse-loss is detected, the user must either select block transfer or initiate the Fixed Time Transfer.

Bus VT fuse-loss output is initiated from internally generated logic.

Trip and Close Circuit Monitor

Trip Circuit Monitor

TCM-1TimeDelay 1to8160Cycles 1Cycle 1Cycleor1%

TCM-1DropoutTimeDelay 1to8160Cycles 1Cycle 1Cycleor1%

TCM-2TimeDelay 1to8160Cycles 1Cycle 1Cycleor1%

TCM-2DropoutTimeDelay 1to8160Cycles 1Cycle 1Cycleor1%

Close Circuit Monitor

CCM-1TimeDelay 1to8160Cycles 1Cycle 1Cycleor1%

CCM-1DropoutTimeDelay 1to8160Cycles 1Cycle 1Cycleor1%

CCM-2TimeDelay 1to8160Cycles 1Cycle 1Cycleor1%

CCM-2DropoutTimeDelay 1to8160Cycles 1Cycle 1Cycleor1%

The CCM/TCM inputs are provided for monitoring the continuity of the Source 1 and Source 2 trip and close circuits. The inputs can be used for nominal trip/close coil voltages of 16 V dc to 63 V dc or 77 V dc to 325 V dc. Trip and closing circuit monitoring are performed in the active breaker status only (trip circuit supervision when breaker is closed and close circuit supervision when breaker is open.) Both the DC supply and continuity for each of the circuits are monitored.

ISSLogic®

ISSLogicusescontrol/statusinputstatus,systemstatus,functionstatus,outputcontactclose signalstodevelop6programmablelogicschemes.

TimeDelay#1-#6 0to65500Cycles 1Cycle 1Cycleor1%

Dropout/ResetTimeDelay

#1-#6 0to65500Cycles 1Cycle 1Cycleor1%

60FL

–15–


Multiple Setpoint Profiles (Groups)Thesystemsupportsfoursetpointprofiles.Thisfeatureallowsmultiplesetpointprofilestobedefinedforthetypeoftransferinitiated(Automatic,ManualorHotParallel)andthedirectionofthenexttransfer.

MeteringTheDigitalMotorBusTransferSystemprovidesmeteringofvoltageandcurrentoftheSource1andSource2,andVoltageandFrequencyoftheMotorBus.

Metering accuracies are:

Voltage: 0.5Vor0.5%,whicheverisgreater(from57to63Hzfor60Hzmodels;from47to53Hzfor50Hzmodels)

1.0Vor0.75%,whicheverisgreater(below57Hzorbeyond63Hzfor60Hzmodels;below47Hzorbeyond53Hzfor50Hzmodels)

Current: 5Arating,0.1Aor3%,whicheverisgreater 1Arating,0.02Aor3%,whicheverisgreater

Frequency: 0.02Hz(from57to63Hzfor60Hzmodels;from47to53Hzfor50Hzmodels) 0.1Hz(below57Hzorbeyond63Hzfor60Hzmodels;below47Hzorbeyond53Hzfor50

Hzmodels)

PhaseAngle: 0.5degreeor0.5%,whicheverisgreater

Oscillographic RecorderTheoscillographic recorderprovidescomprehensivedata recordingofallmonitoredwaveforms,andstatusinputsstoringupto248cyclesofdata.Thetotalrecordlengthisuser-configurablefrom1to16partitions.Thenumberofsamplespercycleusedtostorethedataisuserselectable.Thenumberofsamplespercyclethatcanbeselectedis16or32(50or60Hz).Thenumberofsamplesselectedeffectsthelengthofthedatathatcanbesavedanditsresolution.Thelowerthenumberofsamples,thelongertherecordlengththatcanbestored(butatalowerresolution).

Theoscillographicrecorderistriggeredbyadesignatedcontrol/statusinput(usuallyaprotectiverelayinitiateinput),anautomaticallyinitiatedsignal,atripoutput,amanualtransfersignalorfromserialcommunications.

Whenuntriggered,therecordercontinuouslystoreswaveformdata,therebykeepingthemostrecentdatainmemory.Whentriggered, therecorderstorespre-triggerdata, thencontinuestostoredata inmemoryfora user-defined, post-trigger delay period. The records may be analyzed using Beckwith Electric ISScom® CommunicationsandOscillographicAnalysisSoftware,andarealsoavailableinCOMTRADEfileformat.

Transfer Event LogA transfer event log is considered complete when one of following occurs:

1. Whenthebreakerfromtheoldsourceopensandthebreakertothenewsource*closes.

2. Whenabreakerfailureoccurs.

3. Whentheincompletetransfertimertimesout.

Dependingontransfer type,uptofour transferswillbestored.When16eventsarestored,anysubsequenteventwillcausetheoldesteventtobelost.EachTransferEventLogparameteristimestampedwiththedateandtimein1msincrements.

Thetriggerandcompleteeventsareusedtodefinethetimeframeduringwhichthetransfereventlogisstoringinformation.Aresetfeatureisprovidedtoclearthislogthroughtheserialcommunications.TheTransferEventLogisavailableforviewingutilizingtheM-3872ISScomCommunicationsSoftware.

*NOTE:The'newsource'isdefinedasthesourcetowhichthebusisbeingtransferred.

–16–


Sequence of Events RecordingInadditiontotheTransferEventLogtheDigitalMotorBusTransferSystemprovidesSequenceofEventsRecording.TheSequenceofEventsRecordingstoreseverychangeintheinputstatus,tripcommands,closecommands,anysignaltoinitiateatransfer,typeoftransfer,changeinanybreakerstatus,andstatusreset.EachoftheseRunningEventsaretimestampedwiththedateandtimein1msincrements.TheRunningEventLogstoresthelast512events,whenaneweventoccurstheoldesteventisremoved.Aresetfeatureisprovidedtoclearthislogthroughtheserialcommunications.TheeventsandtheassociateddataareavailableforviewingutilizingtheM-3872ISScom®CommunicationsSoftware.

CalculationsCurrent and Voltage Values:TheDigitalMotorBusTransferSystemusesdiscreteFourierTransform(DFT)andRMScalculationalgorithmonsampledvoltageandcurrentsignalstoextractfundamentalamplitude,phaseandfrequencyfortheM-4272.

Power Input OptionsNominal110/120/230/240V ac,50/60Hz,ornominal110/125/220/250Vdc.Operatesproperlyfrom85Vacto265V acandfrom80Vdc to312.5Vdc.Withstands315Vdcor300Vacfor1second.Burden46VAat 120Vac/125Vdc.

Nominal24/48Vdc,Operatesproperlyfrom18Vdcto56Vdc.Withstands65Vdcfor1second.Burden100VAat24Vdcand30VAat48Vdc.

Thisunitincludestwopowersupplieswhicharenotredundant.

Sensing InputsNineVoltageInputs–Ratedforanominalvoltageof50Vacto140Vac(userconfigurable)at60Hzor50Hz.Willwithstand240Vcontinuousvoltageand360Vfor10seconds.Voltagetransformerburdenislessthan0.2VAat120V.Sourcevoltagemaybephase-togroundorphase-to-phaseconnected.ForproperoperationofM-4272MBTS,theconnectionsfortheSource1,Source2andBusvoltagesmustmatcheachother.TheunitmayhaveuptothreevoltageinputsforeachoftheSource1,Source2,andBusVoltages.TypicalconnectiondiagramsareillustratedinFigures10through15.

OneSource1CurrentInput–Ratedforacurrent(IR)of5.0Aor1.0A(optional)at60Hzor50Hz.Willwithstand4IRcontinuouscurrentand100IRfor1second.Currenttransformerburdenislessthan0.5VAat5A(5Aoption),or0.3VAat1A(1Aoption).

OneSource2CurrentInput–Ratedforacurrent(IR)of5.0Aor1.0A(optional)at60Hzor50Hz.Willwithstand4IRcontinuouscurrentand100IRfor1second.Currenttransformerburdenislessthan0.5VAat5A(5Aoption),or0.3VAat1A(1Aoption).

Control/Status InputsTo provide proper operation and breaker status LED indication on the front panel, the INPUT1 through INPUT6statusinputsmustbeconnectedtothe52a, 52b,52a/band52SP(serviceposition)breakerstatuscontacts.The control/status inputs, INPUT7 through INPUT18, can be programmed to initiate the transferor block the transfer operation, trigger the oscillographic recorder, or to operate one ormore outputs.The control/statusinputsaredesignedtobeconnectedtodrycontactsandareinternallywettedwitha24Vdcpowersupply.ThefourAuxInputsmustbeconnectedtothetripandclosecircuitmonitoring.Theminimumcurrentvaluetoinitiate/pickupaninputis>25mA.


–17–



Output ContactsOutputcontactsOUTPUT1throughOUTPUT4areavailabletoTripandClosetheSource1andSource2breakersandareclosedforadefinedpulselength(pulselengthcanbeprogrammedfrom15to30Cycles).Thepowersupplyalarmoutputcontact(form'b')andtheself-testalarmoutputcontact(form'c'),andoneoutputcontactforlockoutorblockingstatus(form'c').Theseoutputsarepredefined.

Theelevenprogrammableoutputcontacts(tenform‘a’andoneform‘c’),theLockout/Blockalarmoutputcontact(form'c'),thepowersupplyalarmoutputcontact(form'b')andtheself-testalarmoutputcontact(form‘c’),areallratedasperANSI/IEEEC37.90-1989fortripping.(Make30Afor0.2seconds,carry8A,break6A@120Vac,break0.5A@48Vdc;0.3A@125Vdc;0.2A@250VdcwithL/R=40mSec.)

AnyoftheMBTSfunctionscanbeindividuallyprogrammedtoactivateanyoneormoreoftheprogrammableoutputcontacts(Outputs5to16).Anyoutputcontactcanalsobeselectedaspulsedorlatched.ISSLogiccanalsobeusedtoactivateanoutputcontact.

Breaker Closing Time and Breaker Failure MonitoringTheBreakerClosingTimeMonitoringfeaturemeasuresthebreakerclosingtimeeachtimeatransferoccurs.Ifthistimevariesbymorethanaselectablebreakerclosingtimedeviationoftheprogrammedtime,analarmisactivated.Thebreakerclosingtimeismeasuredfromthetimetheclosecommandissentuntilthebreakerstatusindicatesthatthebreakerisclosed.

TheselectableAdaptiveBreakerClosingTimeisprovided.Ifitisenabled,anewsetpointofthebreakerclosingtimewillbeautomaticallyupdatedtoanaveragevalueof8breakerclosingtime'smeasurements;howeverthesetpointsofthebreakerclosingtimearenotpermittedtowriteandchangeunlessthisfeatureisdisabled.

Thebreakerstatusinputsarealsomonitoredforbreakerfailure.Thebreakerisconsideredfailedwhenthebreakerstatushasnotchangedstatewithinaprogrammabletimeafteratripcommandisissued.WhenSimultaneousTransfermodeisselectedandabreakerfailureoccursonthebreakerthatshouldhavetripped,thebreakerthatwasjustclosedwillbetripped.Thispreventsthenewsource*frombeingcontinuouslyconnectedwiththefailedbreaker,whichcouldhaveafault.

Inadditiontousingthebreakerstatusindeterminingwhenabreakerhasfailed,thecurrentthroughthebreakercanalsobeusedtodetermineifthebreakerhasoperated.Thelossofcurrentafteratripcanbeselectedtoprovideamorepositiveindicationofbreakeroperation.Aninstantaneousovercurrentbreakerfailureelementwithatimedelay(50BF)isprovidedtominimizebreakerfailurecoordinationmargins.

Power up Self‑Test and Continuous On‑Line TestingThesystemperformsselftestverificationswhenpowerisfirstappliedtotheunit.Theseincludeverifyingtheoperationofthemultiplexer,programmablegainamplifier,analogtodigitalconverter,DSPchip,HostprocessorandallRAMchips.Aftertheinitialselftestiscompleteandthesystemisoperatingnormally,continuousselfcheckverificationcontinuestocheckforcorrectoperationofthesystem.Thecontinuousselfcheckverificationtestsareperformedinthebackgroundanddonoteffecttheresponsetimeoftheunittoemergencyconditions.Inadditiontothebackgroundtests,thereareteststhatcanbeperformedinthediagnosticmodeduringperiodicofflinesystemtesting.Theseadditionaltestscanexercisetherelayoutputs,checkfrontpanelLEDoperation,verifyinputstatusoperation,checkpushbuttonoperationandcommunicationoperation.

–18–


Target/Status Indicators and ControlsThe SYS OK LEDrevealspropercyclingofthemicrocomputer;itcanbeprogrammedtoflashortobeilluminatedcontinuously.TheSOURCE 1 BRKR CLOSED and SOURCE 2 BRKR CLOSED red LEDsilluminatewhenthebreakerisclosed(whenthe52acontactisclosed).TheSOURCE 1 BRKR OPEN and SOURCE 2 BRKR OPEN green LEDsilluminatewhenthebreakerisopen(whenthe52acontactisopen).The52contactinputcanbeconfiguredforeither“a”,“b”or"a/b"inputs.ThecorrespondingBRKR status LEDwillilluminatewhenanyoftheconditions,eventsorunitfunctionsactivate.

PressingandreleasingtheSTATUS RESET pushbuttonresets theSTATUS LEDs if the conditions causing theoperationhavebeenremoved.PressingandholdingtheSTATUS RESETpushbuttonwillallowconditions,eventsorfunctionsthatarepickeduptobedisplayed.The PS1 and PS2 LEDswillremainilluminatedaslongaspowerisappliedtotheunitandthepowersupplyisoperatingproperly.TIME SYNCLEDilluminateswhenavalidIRIG-Bsignalisappliedandtimesynchronizationhasbeenestablished.TheTRIP SOURCE 1, CLOSE SOURCE 1, TRIP SOURCE 2 and CLOSE SOURCE 2 status indicators are latched due to the pulsed nature of thesecommands.Toprovide informationaboutwhichoutputswereoperatedduring the last transfer theappropriate TRIP SOURCE 1, CLOSE SOURCE 1, TRIP SOURCE 2 or CLOSE SOURCE 2LEDsintheStatus module arelatcheduntilresetorthenexttransfer.

CommunicationCommunicationports include rearRS-232andRS-485ports,a frontRS-232port,a rear IRIG-Bport,andan Ethernet port (optional). The communications protocol implements serial, byte-oriented, asynchronouscommunication,providingthefollowingfunctionswhenusedwiththeWindows™-compatibleM-3872ISScom® CommunicationsandOscillographicAnalysisSoftware.MODBUSprotocolissupported,providing:

• Interrogationandmodificationofsetpointsandconfiguration

• Time-stampedstatusinformationforthe4mostrecentTransferEventlogs

• Time-stampedstatusinformationforthe512mostrecenteventsintheSequenceofEventslog

• Real-timemeteringofallmeasuredquantities,controlstatusinputs,andoutputs

• DownloadingofrecordedoscillographicdataandSequenceofEventsrecorderdata

• InitiatemanualtransferandSequenceofEventsrecorder

TheM-3872ISScomCommunicationsandOscillographicAnalysisSoftwareenablestheplottingandprintingofM-4272waveform data downloaded from the unit to anyWindows™compatible computer.The ISScomCommunicationsandOscillographAnalysisSoftwarecanalsobeusedtoanalyzetheoperationofthesystem,determine timingof the trip and close commands, breaker timesand to evaluate “bus ringdown” test data.Theevaluation of “bus ringdown” data eliminates the requirement for separate recording equipment duringcommissioning.


–19–



IRIG‑BTheM-4272acceptseithermodulatedordemodulatedIRIG-Btimeclocksynchronizationsignals.TheIRIG-Btimesynchronizationinformationisusedtocorrectthelocalcalendar/clockandprovidegreatersystemwidesynchronizationforstatusandoscillographtimetagging.

HMI ModuleLocalaccesstotheM-4272isprovidedthroughtheM-3931Human-MachineInterface(HMI)Module,allowingforeasy-to-use,menu-drivenaccesstoallfunctionsusinga6-pushbuttonkeyboardanda2-lineby24characteralphanumericdisplay.TheM-3931moduleincludesthefollowingfeatures:

• User-definableaccesscodesprovidingthreelevelsofsecurity

• Real-timemeteringofallmeasuredquantities,controlstatusinputs,andoutputs

• InitiateManualTransfer

• Remote/Localcontrol

• DeviceOn/Offcontrol

Status ModuleAnM-3972StatusModuleprovides24statusand8outputLEDs.AppropriatestatusLEDs illuminatewhenthecorrespondingM-4272conditions,eventorfunctionactivates.ThestatusindicatorscanberesetwiththeSTATUS RESETpushbuttoniftheactivatedconditionshavebeenremoved.TheOUTPUT LEDsindicatethestatusoftheprogrammableoutputcontacts.Thereareanadditional4statusLEDs,8outputLEDsand12inputLEDslocatedonthefrontpanel.

ISSLogic®

ThisfeaturecanbeprogrammedutilizingtheM-3872ISScomCommunicationsSoftware. ISScomtakesthecontrol/statusinputstatus,systemstatusandfunctionstatus,andbyemploying(OR,AND,NORandNAND)booleanlogicandtimers,canactivateanoutput,changeactivesettingprofiles,initiatetransfer,orblocktransfer.

TherearesixISSLogicFunctionspersettingprofile,dependingonthenumberofdifferentMBTSsettingsdefined,theschememayprovideupto24differentlogicschemes.TheISSLogicFunctionDiagramisillustratedinFigure1.

–20–


ISSL

ogic

Fun

ctio

ns

Bloc

king

Inpu

ts

Sele

ctab

le A

nd/O

r

Prog

ram

mab

leIn

puts

and

AU

XIn

put

Bloc

k Vi

aC

omm

unic

atio

nPo

int

Initi

atin

g In

puts

Initi

atin

g Fu

nctio

n

Sele

ctab

le A

nd/O

r

Sele

ctab

le A

nd/O

r/Nor

/Nan

d

Sele

ctab

le A

nd/O

r

Prog

ram

mab

leIn

puts

and

AU

XIn

put

Prog

ram

mab

lefu

nctio

n(s)

(Incl

. ISS

Logi

can

d Sy

stem

Stat

us)

Initi

atin

g O

utpu

ts

Sele

ctab

le A

nd/O

r

Out

puts

Initi

ate

Via

Com

mun

icat

ion

Poin

t

Prog

ram

med

Tim

e D

elay

Prog

ram

med

Out

puts

5-1

6

Log

inSe

quen

ce o

fEv

ents

0-65

,500

cyc

les

(109

1sec

at

60H

z)

Log

Pick

up in

Sequ

ence

of

Even

ts

ISSL

ogic

# N

Activ

ated

This

sec

tion

of IS

SLo

gic

initi

ates

the

Func

tion

Ope

ratio

n

This

sec

tion

of IS

SLo

gic

is u

sed

to B

lock

the

Func

tion

Ope

ratio

n

This

sec

tion

of IS

SLo

gic

used

to a

ctiv

ate

the

desi

red

Out

put

Initi

ate

Tran

sfer

Prog

ram

med

Prof

ileSe

tting

sG

roup

s 1-

4

Bloc

kTr

ansf

er

Sele

ctab

le A

nd/O

r

Figure 1 ISSLogic® Function Diagram

–21–


Tests and StandardsM-4272DigitalMotorBusTransferSystemcomplieswiththefollowingtypetestsandstandards:

Voltage Withstand

Dielectric WithstandIEC60255-5 3,500Vdcfor1minuteappliedtoeachindependentcircuittoearth

3,500Vdcfor1minuteappliedbetweeneachindependentcircuit

1,500Vdcfor1minuteappliedtoIRIG-Bcircuittoearth

1,500Vdcfor1minuteappliedbetweenIRIG-Btoeachindependentcircuit

1,500Vdcfor1minuteappliedbetweenRS-485toeachindependentcircuit

Impulse VoltageIEC60255-5 5,000Vpk,+/-polarityappliedtoeachindependentcircuittoearth

5,000Vpk,+/-polarityappliedbetweeneachindependentcircuit

1.2by50µs,500ohmsimpedance,threesurgesat1every5seconds

IEC60255-5 >100Megaohms

Electrical Environment

Electrostatic Discharge TestEN60255-22-2 Class4(8kV)—pointcontactdischarge

EN60255-22-2 Class4(15kV)–airdischarge

Fast Transient Disturbance TestEN60255-22-4 ClassA(4kV,2.5kHz)

Surge Withstand CapabilityANSI/IEEE 2,500Vpk-pkoscillatoryappliedtoeachindependentcircuittoearth

C37.90.1- 2,500Vpk-pkoscillatoryappliedbetweeneachindependentcircuit

1989 5,000VpkFastTransientappliedtoeachindependentcircuittoearth

5,000VpkFastTransientappliedbetweeneachindependentcircuit

ANSI/IEEE 2,500Vpk-pkoscillatoryappliedtoeachindependentcircuittoearth

C37.90.1- 2,500Vpk-pkoscillatoryappliedbetweeneachindependentcircuit

2002 4,000VpkFastTransientburstappliedtoeachindependentcircuittoearth

4,000VpkFastTransientburstappliedbetweeneachindependentcircuit

NOTE: Thesignalisappliedtothedigitaldatacircuits(RS-232,RS-485,IRIG-B,Ethernetcommunicationportcouplingport)throughcapacitivecouplingclamp.

ANSI/IEEE 80-1000Mhz@35V/m

C37.90.2

–22–


Output ContactsANSI/IEEE Make30Afor0.2seconds,offfor15secondsfor2,000operations,perSection6.7.1,C37.90.0 TrippingOutputPerformanceRequirements

Atmospheric Environment

TemperatureIEC60068-2-1 Cold,–20°CIEC60068-2-2 DryHeat,+70°CIEC60068-2-78 DampHeat,+40°C@93%RH

Mechanical Environment

VibrationIEC60255-21-1 VibrationresponseClass1,0.5g VibrationenduranceClass1,1.0g

IEC60255-21-2 ShockResponseClass1,5.0g ShockWithstandClass1,15.0g BumpResponseClass1,10.0g

CompliancecULus-Listedper508 – IndustrialControlEquipment

–IndustrialControlEquipmentCertifiedforCanadaCAN/CSAC22.2No.14-M91

cULus-ListedComponentper508ATableSA1.1IndustrialControlPanels

EuropeanSafety-EN61010-1:2001,CATII,PollutionDegree2

PhysicalSize: 19.00"widex6.96"highx10.20"deep(48.3cmx17.7cmx25.9cm)

Mounting: The unit is a standard 19", semiflush, 4-unit high, rack-mount panel design, conforming to ANSI/EIARS-310CandDIN41494Part5specifications.Optionalmountingisavailable.

Approximate Weight: 20lbs(9.1kg)

Approximate Shipping Weight: 30lbs(13.6kg)

Recommended Storage ParametersTemperature: 5°Cto40°C

Humidity:Maximumrelativehumidity80%fortemperaturesupto31°C,decreasingto31°Clinearlyto50%relativehumidityat40°C.

Environment:Storageareatobefreeofdust,corrosivegases,flammablematerials,dew,percolatingwater,rainandsolarradiation.

SeeM-4272InstructionBook,AppendixG,LayupandStorageforadditionalinformation.

Patent & WarrantyTheM-4272DigitalMotorBusTransferSystemiscoveredbyU.S.Patent7,468,593.

TheM-4272DigitalMotorBusTransferSystemiscoveredbyafiveyearwarrantyfromdateofshipment.

External ConnectionsM-4272externalconnectionpointsareillustratedinFigure5,ExternalConnections.

Specification subject to change without notice.

–23–


NOTE: CurrentTransformersareusedfortheM-4272's50BFFunction,meteringandoscillography,theyarenotrequiredfortransferoperation.

Figure 2 Typical Applications of Motor Bus Transfer Systems

TWO-BREAKER CONFIGURATION

THREE-BREAKER CONFIGURATION

VT-M VT-SU

VT-B

52M

STATION BUS SYSTEM

STARTUP SOURCE

N.C.

MTWO-BREAKER CONFIGURATION

CT-M

N.O. 52SU

CT-SU

UNIT AUXILIARYTRANSFORMER

STATION SERVICETRANSFORMER

MAIN SOURCE

M

M-4272

IS1 IS2

VS1VS2

VBus

STATION BUS SYSTEM

N.C.52S1

VT-B1

N.C. 52S2

VT-S2

BUS 1 BUS 2

VT-B2

52T

N.O.

BUS-TIE

VT-S1

CT-S1 CT-S2

CT-B1 CT-B2

M-4272 M-4272

M M M M

Source 1 (S1) Source 2 (S2)

VS1VS1

IS1

VS2 VBusIS2

IS1

IS2 VBus VS2

–24–


0

360

Pha

se (D

egre

es)

Time

180 Vol

tage

0 pu

1 puFast

In-Phase

Residual andFixed Time

Figure 3 Open Transition Transfer Methods

–25–


Figure 4 Time Sequence of Transfer Logic in Sequential Transfer Mode

–26–


IN-P

HA

SE

TR

AN

SFE

R T

IME

WIN

DO

W*

EN

AB

LE

IN-P

HA

SE

TR

AN

SFE

R

Figure 5 Time Sequence of Transfer Logic in Simultaneous Transfer Mode

–27–


.QE

.TN

OC

.D

NIDE

TSIL

CU

S

83F4R

2

13

4

BE

CK

WIT

HE

LEC

TR

ICC

O.

INC

.7

27

-54

4-2

32

66

190

118

thAV

EN

O.

LA

RG

O,

FL

33

77

3

OU

TP

UT

S

ININ

ININ

ININ

ININ

ININ

ININ

INP

UT

SR

TN

RS

48

5C

OM

3

IN 6IN 5

IN 4IN 3

IN 2IN 1

INP

UT

SRT

NIN

SE

LF-T

ES

TO

UT

PU

TS

PS1

PS2

F1F2

3A

MP

,25

0V

(3A

B)

F3F4

60

-14

0V

AC

50

/60

Hz

8

78

SO

UR

CE

1

7576

77

41

+

4243

44

-

I S1

4846

4547

4950

7980

8281

8384

8586

5251

5354

5556

5857

6059

61 7

9289

8788

9091

9394

9695

973

AM

P,2

50

V(3

AB

)

168

+6563

6264

6

6667

5 SP

2 -

4 SP

6971

70

3

7273

74

21

5

CLO

SE

S1

9899

18 86

-56 2

5-5

5 266

8- 5-

1 8

IRIG

-B

1413

1211

109

CC

M-2

TCM

-2C

CM

-1TC

M-1

1615

IN RS

232

CO

M 2

-+

+-

+-

-+

87

910

1112

1718

1615

1413

P/S

TRIP

S1

TRIP

S2

CLO

SE

S2

52S

P/

S2

52a/

S2

52b/

S2

52S

P/

S1

52b/ S1

52a/ S1

SO

UR

CE

2

S2

I

SO

UR

CE

1S

OU

RC

E 2

RAT

ED

VO

LTA

GE

(NO

MIN

AL)

RAT

ED

CU

RR

EN

T (N

OM

)1A

5A

CO

M 2

ETH

ER

NE

T

12

34

56

78

910

1112

1314

1516

1718

1920

2122

2324

2526

2728

2930

3132

3334

3536

-+

MO

DE

L: M

-427

2FI

RM

WA

RE

: D-0

135

SE

RIA

L N

O.

60H

z50

Hz

WA

RN

ING

! CO

NTA

CT

WIT

H T

ER

MIN

ALS

MAY

CA

US

E E

LEC

TRIC

SH

OC

KFO

R C

ON

TAC

T R

ATIN

GS

SE

E IN

STR

UC

TIO

NA

L M

AN

UA

L

3738

3940

100

101

102

103

BU

SV A A

BV

VB

CBVV

CACV

V ABAV

V C CA

VV B B

CV

V C CA

VV B B

CV

V ABAV

U.S

. PAT

ENT

7,46

8,59

3

LOC

KO

UT

BLO

CK

ING

!

~~

~

24-4

8

125-

250

Figure 6 External Connections (Horizontal Mount)

1. 8 WARNING: ONLY DRY CONTACTS must be connected to inputs (terminals 45 through 50 with 51 common and terminals 5 through 16 with 1 through 4 common) because these contact inputs are internally wetted with 24 V dc. Application of external voltage on these inputs may result in damage to the units.

2. 8 WARNING: The protective grounding terminal must be connected to an earthed ground any time external connections have been made to the unit.

3. 3CAUTION: Before making connectionsto theTrip/Close Circuit Monitoring input,seeM-4272 InstructionBookSection5.5,Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers, fortheinformationregardingsettingTrip/CloseCircuitMonitoringinputvoltage.Connectinga voltage other than the voltage that the unit isconfiguredtomayresultinmis-operationorpermanentdamagetotheunit.

4. 3CAUTION:ConnectingtheM-4272CloseCoil Monitor (CCM) in parallel with other relay CCMs in the Close Coil Circuit where the anti-pump "Y" relay is not bypassedmay not provide reliable breaker closingoperation.

NOTE: Control/StatusInputsIN-17andIN-18maybeusedtoselectsetpointprofiles.

NOTE: All relays are shown in the de-energized state, and without powerappliedtotherelay.

NOTE: The power supply relay (P/S) isenergizedwhen thepowersupply isfunctioningproperly.

NOTE: Theself-testrelayisenergizedwhentherelayhasperformedallself-testssuccessfully.

NOTE: The Output 8 Lockout Blocking isenergizedwhenanyLockout/Blockingconditionoccurs.SeeLockout/Blockingsectionfordetails.

–28–


60Hz

66

79

BE

CK

WIT

HE

LE

CT

RIC

CO

.IN

C.

72

7-

54

4-

23

26

76

75

77

78

R T N

AVAB

ETHERNETCOM 2

V

GIRI B-

COM 2RS232

1

NI2

3

4

5

89

82

80

81

83

84

85

86

87

88

95

92

90

91

93

94

98

1A 96

5A

97

99

65-185-8 526

100

101

FOR

CO

NTAC

T RATIN

GS SEE IN

STRU

CTIO

NAL M

ANU

AL

WAR

NIN

G! C

ON

TACT W

ITH TER

MIN

ALS MAY C

AUSE ELEC

TRIC

SHO

CK

+C O M 3RS 4 8 5

BBCV

V

-CCAV

S252SP/

V

41

42

43

45

44

46

AABV

V

B

C

BCV

VCA

I N P U T SV

V

47

48

49

50

!

51

LA

RG

O,

FL

33

77

3

619

0118

thA

VE

NO

.

9

6

7

8

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

+

-

18

17

19

15

16

13

14

LOCKOUT 59

AVABV

P/S

BUS

B

C

BCV

VCA

V

V8

52

53

54

55

57

56

58

7

S2I

+

-

6

5

60

61

62

63

64

65

++

20

21

22

23

+ 24

MO

DEL: M

-4272

25

26

27

28

30

29 50Hz

31

F 4

F 3

9

10

11

12

F 2 73

P S 1

+

-

4

P S 2

F 1

68

67

69

70

71

72

P S 174

39

FIRM

WAR

E: D-0135

32

33

34

35

37

SERIAL N

O.

36

38

40

102

103

2 5 0 V ,3 A M P ,

( 3 A B )

S252b/

S252a/S2

52a/

S152SP/

S152b/

52a/S1

52a/

RTNI N

SELF

TEST

OUT- PUTS

CLOSE S2

3 TRIP S2

2 CLOSE S1

1 TRIP S1

P S 2

S1I

OUT- PUTS

CCM-2

-

-

-

TCM-2

CCM-1

TCM-1

IN-PUTS

SOURCE1

BLOCKING

65-185-8 526

SOURCE2

SOURCE2

SOURCE1

RATED

NOM

(

CURRENT

-

60

140V

50/60Hz

RATED

VOLTAGE

NOMINAL

(

18I N

17I N

16I N

15I N

14I N

13I N

12I N

11I N

10I N

9I N

8I N

7I N

6I N

5I N

4I N

3I N

2I N

I N 1I N

ULLISTEDIND.CONT.EQ.83F4

USC

((

2

1

4

3

U.S. PATENT 7,468,593

24-48

125-250

Figure 7 External Connections (Vertical Mount)

1. 8 WARNING: ONLY DRY CONTACTS must be connected to inputs (terminals 45 through 50 with 51 common and terminals 5 through 16 with 1 through 4 common) because these contact inputs are internally wetted with 24 V dc. Application of external voltage on these inputs may result in damage to the units.

2. 8 WARNING: The protective grounding terminal must be connected to an earthed ground any time external connections have been made to the unit.

3. 3CAUTION: Before making connectionsto theTrip/Close Circuit Monitoring input,seeM-4272 InstructionBookSection5.5,Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers, forthe information regarding setting Trip/Close Circuit Monitoring input voltage.Connecting a voltage other than the voltage thattheunit isconfiguredtomayresult in mis-operationorpermanentdamagetotheunit.

4. 3CAUTION:ConnectingtheM-4272CloseCoil Monitor (CCM) in parallel with other relay CCMs in the Close Coil Circuit where the anti-pump "Y" relay is not bypassedmay not provide reliable breaker closingoperation.

NOTE: Control/StatusInputsIN-17andIN-18maybeusedtoselectsetpointprofiles.

NOTE: All relays are shown in the de-energized state, and without powerappliedtotherelay.

NOTE: The power supply relay (P/S) isenergizedwhen thepowersupply isfunctioningproperly.

NOTE: Theself-testrelayisenergizedwhentherelayhasperformedallself-testssuccessfully.

NOTE: The Output 8 Lockout Blocking isenergizedwhenanyLockout/Blockingconditionoccurs.SeeLockout/Blockingsectionfordetails.

–29–


Figure 8 Horizontal Mounting Dimensions

–30–


ENTEREXIT

STATUS

BRKROPEN

C LO S EDB RK R

C LO S EDB RK R

RES ETSTATUS

PS 2

SOURCE1

1

BRKROPEN

SOURCE2

12

14

16

11

13

15

1718

99

OUTPUTS

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

OPEN

B RK R B RK R

STATUS

S 1

OPEN

INPUTS

C O M 1

TCM-1OPEN

TCM-2OPENOPEN

CCM-1OPEN

910

78

P

OUT 7

OUT 8

OUTPUTS

OUT 5

OUT 6

OUT 3

OUT 4

OUT 1

OUT 2

M-4272

TMIntegrated Synchronizing SystemsITRI

HCE

CEL

KC

WTE

BCKB

ELEC

EMa de in U.S.A .TW

CH

IRTI C ..O. NI CC NI.O C

T IM EYS NC

AID G /T IM E

YS NC

AID G /

O KSYSO KSYS

CCM-2

MOTOR BUS TRANSFER

10.2[25.91]

9.97[25.32]

19.00[48.26]

17.50[44.5]

18.31[46.51]

4.00[10.16]

1.48[3.76]

6.96[17.68]

0.35[0.89]

Figure 9 Vertical Mounting Dimensions

–31–


Figure 10 Panel Mount Cutout Dimensions (Horizontal and Vertical)

–32–


M‑3919A Graphic Display Unit/Touch Screen Human Machine Interface • ProvidesaMIMICSingle-LineDiagramoftheMotorBusTransferSysteminTwo-breakerorThree-

breakerBusTransferConfiguration

• 16.2MillionColor1024x768PixelTFTDisplay

• 12.1InchTouchScreenHumanMachineInterface(HMI)

• Includesaseparatepowersupply,nominal120VAC(50/60Hz)or125Vdc(250Vdcoptional)

• RemoteTargetResetCapability

• RemoteManualTransferCapability

Figure 11 Graphic Display Unit/Touch Screen Human Machine Interface

–33–


FeaturesTheM-3919Aincludesthefollowingfeaturesandfunctions:

• Display&TouchScreen

12.1"TFT16.2Millioncolors

Size–9.75"x7.25"[248mmx184mm],12.1"diagonal

Brightness–500cd/m2

ContrastRatio–700:1

Resolution–1024x768pixels

Backlight–LEDupto50,000hourlifespan

TouchScreenType–4-wireAnalogResistive

• Microprocessor–800MHz32-bitCISC(FanlessCPU)

• FlashMemory–256MB

• DRAM–256MB

• Material–AluminumEnclosure

• SerialPorts

TheM-3919Aincludestwoserialports,whichprovidetheconnectionstooneortwoM-4272DigitalMotorBusTransferSystemsusingRS-232(standard)orRS-485(optional)communications.TheRS-485serialportalsoprovidestheabilitytoconnectmultipleM-4272'sinseriestoasingleHMI.TheM-3919Aserialcommunicationportsincludethefollowingcapabilities:

OneRS-485serialport(DE9S)usedforRS-485M-4272communications

OneRS-232serialport(DE9P)usedforRS-232M-4272communications

Baudratesfrom9,600to115,200

Point-to-pointserialcommunicationsforallprotocols

• One10footRS-232YCable,BECOPartNumberB-1527

• CompactSDCardSlot

• USBPorts–1Host2.0Port,1Client2.0Port

• EthernetPort–10/100Base-T(RJ45)usedforOperatorInterfaceTerminal(OIT)(PC)configuration,downloadingprogramtoHMIandPoint-to-PointconnectionandcommunicationsusingMODBUSTCP/IP.

• PWR(yellow)illuminatediconindicatesifpowerisappliedtotheunit

• CPU(green)illuminatediconindicatesiftheunitisoperatingcorrectly

• COM(red)illuminatediconindicatescommunicationsactivityonPLCport

• RESETSwitchtoreinitializetheunitifanoperationalfailureoccurs

–34–


Single–Line Diagram (SLD) Screens

When the MBT SYSTEM PRI Metering menu item is selected from the Selection Menu screen the unit displays either the pre-programmedTwo-Breaker orThree-Breaker configuration of theMBTS Single-Line Diagram(Figures11and12respectfully).TheSingle-LineDiagramsincludeagraphicalrepresentationofeitheraTwoorThree-BreakerconfigurationwiththeappropriatenumberofM-4272connectedunits.Also,remotemanualtransfersandtargetresetcanbeperformedfromtheSingle-LineDiagram.Includedinthegraphicalrepresentationarethefollowingreal-timeparameters:

• Voltage(Three-PhaseorSingle-Phase)

• Current(Source1andSource2)

• Frequency(DeltaAngle,DeltaFrequencyandDeltaVoltage)

• 52-S1Breakerstatus(Open/Closed)

• 52-S2Breakerstatus(Open/Closed)

• ManualTransferReadystatus

• Lockout/Blockstatus

• Remote/Localstatus

• DeviceON/OFFstatus

• 52-S1CircuitBreakerIn-Servicestatus

• 52-S2CircuitBreakerIn-Servicestatus

• TransferComplete

• TransferIncomplete

Figure 12 MBTS Single-Line Diagram Screen (Two-Breaker Configuration)

–35–


Figure 13 MBTS Single-Line Diagram Screen (Three-Breaker Configuration)

Initiating Manual Transfers

TheGDU/HMIincludesthecapabilitytoinitiateManualTransfersfromtheSingle-Linediagram.

SeeM-3919ASpecificationforadditionaldetails.

Optional Features • 250VdcPowerSupply,BECOPartNumber430-00444

• Two-BreakerorThree-Breakerconfiguration

• RS-485Communicationwithone10footRS-485Y-Cable,BECOPartNumberB-1301

• 19"MountingPanel,6uheight,BECOPartNumber441-41530

PhysicalSize: 12.49"widex9.61"highx1.82"deep(31.7cmx24.4cmx4.6cm)

Approximate Weight: 4.6lbs(2.1kg)

WarrantyTheM-3919Aiscoveredbyatwo-yearwarrantyfromdateofshipment.


–36–


M‑5072 Retrofit Kit For M‑4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System • AdaptsM-4272DigitalMotorBusTransferSystemasareplacement forexistinganalogmotorbus

transfer equipment

• Provides direct mechanical and electrical replacement of existing analog transfer logic controller M-0272/M-0236B

• ConnectseasilytotheM-4272'sterminalswithoutanywiringchange

• Thephysicalchangeissimpleandcosteffective

• Enhancesthesecurity,reliabilityandperformanceofyourfacilitywithadditionalfeaturesinthedigitalmotorbustransferequipment

• OptionalM-3919AGraphicDisplayUnit(GDU)andTouchScreenHumanMachineInterface(HMI)forcommunicatingwithoneortwoM-4272units.

M‑5072 Retrofit Kit FeaturesTheM-4272DigitalMotorBusTransferSystemandaM-5072retrofitkitprovidethedirectreplacementoftheM-0272/M-0236BAnalogTransferLogicController.Thephysicalchangeisverysimpleandcosteffective.

TheM-5072retrofitkitconsistsofabracketandwiringharness(Figure14)thatreplicatestheexistingM-0272terminalblocklocations.TheM-5072terminalblocksarelocatedinthesamepositions(Figure15)astheM-0272anditisattachedtotheM-4272.ThewireharnessconnectstheappropriateterminalsbetweentheM-4272andtheM-0272.ThiswillallowaverysimplereplacementoftheexistingM-0272equipment.

SincetheexistinganalogM-0272/M-0236Btakes7uheightwhiletheM-4272takesonly4uheight.Onerackmountblackblankpanelwith1uheightandonerackmountblackblankpanelwith2uheightareprovidedtofilluptheemptyspacesafterthereplacement.

Figure 14 M-5072 Retrofit Kit for Analog Motor Bus Transfer System Replacement

–37–


Figure 15 M-5072 Retrofit Kit Bracket and Wiring Harness

–38–


PhysicalM-5072Size: 8.37"highx17.25"widex3.89"deep(21.26x43.82x9.88)



M-5072 with M-4272Size: 8.37"highx19"widex12.86"deep(21.26x48.26x32.66)



WarrantyTheM-5072iscoveredbyafive-yearwarrantyfromdateofshipment.TheM-3919Aiscoveredbyatwo-yearwarrantyfromdateofshipment.


This Page Left Intentionally Blank

!!"!#!! $!!% &'%($!%)#!) '!" &%(*)+! !++!!! + $!'!%(

DANGER! HIGH VOLTAGE

– This sign warns that the area is connected to a dangerous high voltage, and youmust never touch it.

PERSONNEL SAFETY PRECAUTIONSThe following general rules and other specific warnings throughout the manual must be followed during application,test or repair of this equipment. Failure to do so will violate standards for safety in the design, manufacture, and intendeduse of the product. Qualified personnel should be the only ones who operate and maintain this equipment. BeckwithElectric Co., Inc. assumes no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.

– This sign means that you should refer to the corresponding section of the operation

manual for important information before proceeding.

Always Ground the Equipment

To avoid possible shock hazard, the chassis must be connected to an electrical ground. When servicingequipment in a test area, the Protective Earth Terminal must be attached to a separate ground securelyby use of a tool, since it is not grounded by external connectors.

Do NOT operate in an explosive environmentDo not operate this equipment in the presence of flammable or explosive gases or fumes. To do so wouldrisk a possible fire or explosion.

Keep away from live circuitsOperating personnel must not remove the cover or expose the printed circuit board while power is ap-plied. In no case may components be replaced with power applied. In some instances, dangerous volt-ages may exist even when power is disconnected. To avoid electrical shock, always disconnect power anddischarge circuits before working on the unit.

Exercise care during installation, operation, & maintenance proceduresThe equipment described in this manual contains voltages high enough to cause serious injury or death.Only qualified personnel should install, operate, test, and maintain this equipment. Be sure that all per-sonnel safety procedures are carefully followed. Exercise due care when operating or servicing alone.

Do not modify equipmentDo not perform any unauthorized modifications on this instrument. Return of the unit to a BeckwithElectric repair facility is preferred. If authorized modifications are to be attempted, be sure to followreplacement procedures carefully to assure that safety features are maintained.

PRODUCT CAUTIONSBefore attempting any test, calibration, or maintenance procedure, personnel must be completely familiarwith the particular circuitry of this unit, and have an adequate understanding of field effect devices. If acomponent is found to be defective, always follow replacement procedures carefully to that assure safetyfeatures are maintained. Always replace components with those of equal or better quality as shown in theParts List of the Instruction Book.

Avoid static chargeThis unit contains MOS circuitry, which can be damaged by improper test or rework procedures. Careshould be taken to avoid static charge on work surfaces and service personnel.

Use caution when measuring resistancesAny attempt to measure resistances between points on the printed circuit board, unless otherwise notedin the Instruction Book, is likely to cause damage to the unit.

i

Table of Contents

Chapters Page

Chapter 1 Introduction

1.1 Instruction Book Contents ................................................................ 1–1

1.2 M‑4272 Motor Bus Transfer System ..................................................... 1–2

1.3 Application .......................................................................................1–4

Chapter 2 Operation

2.1 Front Panel Controls and Indicators ................................................ 2–1 Alphanumeric Display ...................................................................... 2–1 Screen Blanking...............................................................................2–1 Arrow Pushbuttons ........................................................................... 2–1 EXIT Pushbutton ..............................................................................2–1 ENTER Pushbutton .......................................................................... 2–2 System OK LED ..............................................................................2–2 Diagnostic/Time Sync LED .............................................................. 2–2 Breaker Status LEDs ....................................................................... 2–2 Power Supply #1 & #2 LED ............................................................. 2–2 M‑3972 Status Module ..................................................................... 2–2 Output and Input Status LEDs ......................................................... 2–2 Trip (TCM) and Close (CCM) Circuit Monitor Status LEDs .............. 2–2 STATUS RESET Pushbutton ............................................................ 2–5 COM Port Security ........................................................................... 2–5 Disabling COM Ports ....................................................................... 2–5

2.2 Manual Operation ............................................................................2–6 Overview of Manual Transfer Methods ............................................. 2–6 Transfer Modes ................................................................................2–6 Sequential Transfer Mode ................................................................ 2–6 Simultaneous Transfer Mode ............................................................ 2–6 Transfer Methods .............................................................................2–7 Fast Transfer ....................................................................................2–7 In‑Phase Transfer ............................................................................. 2–7 Residual Voltage Transfer ................................................................ 2–7 Hot Parallel Transfer......................................................................... 2–7 Initiate Manual Transfer (ISScom) .................................................... 2–8 Initiate Manual Transfer (MBTS Front Panel) ................................... 2–8 Remote/Local Control ...................................................................... 2–9 Remote/Local Control (ISScom) ...................................................... 2–9 Remote/Local Control (MBTS Front Panel) .................................... 2–10 Device ON/OFF ............................................................................. 2–10 Device ON/OFF (ISScom) ............................................................. 2–10 Device ON/OFF (MBTS Front Panel) ............................................. 2–11 System Error Codes and Output Counters .................................... 2–11 Reset/View System Error Codes and Output Counters (ISScom) ... 2–11

TABLE OF CONTENTSM-4272 Motorbus Transfer System

Instruction Book

ii

M-4272 Instruction Book

Chapter 2 Operation (cont'd)

Clear Alarm Counters (MBTS Front Panel) .................................... 2–12 Clear Error Codes (MBTS Front Panel) ......................................... 2–13 Switching The Active Setpoint Profile ............................................ 2–13

2.3 Status Monitoring and Metering ..........................................................2–14 System/Monitor/Primary Metering ......................................................2–14 System/Monitor/Secondary Metering and Status ........................... 2–14 System/Monitor/Phasor Diagram and Sync Scope ........................ 2–15 Monitor Status/Metering ................................................................. 2–17 Transfer Event Log ......................................................................... 2–17 Sequence of Events Recorder ....................................................... 2–17 Oscillograph ................................................................................... 2–17

Chapter 3 ISScom®

3.1 ISScom Functional Description .............................................................3–1 Shortcut Command Buttons ..................................................................3–1 Initiate and Reset Buttons .....................................................................3–1 Remote/Local Button ............................................................................3–1 Device ON/OFF .....................................................................................3–3 File Menu ..............................................................................................3–4 File/New Command ...............................................................................3–4 File/Save and Save As Command ........................................................3–4 File/Open Command .............................................................................3–4 File/Print and Print Setup Command ....................................................3–4 File/Exit Command ................................................................................3–4 Comm Menu..........................................................................................3–4 System Menu ........................................................................................3–6 System/Setup ........................................................................................3–6 System/Setup/Setup System ................................................................3–6 System/Setup/Setpoints ........................................................................3–7 System/Setup/Setpoints/Display All ......................................................3–7 System/Setup/Setpoints/Configure .......................................................3–7 Set Date/Time Command ...................................................................3–11 System/Monitor ...................................................................................3–11 System/Monitor/Primary Metering ......................................................3–12 System/Monitor/Secondary Metering and Status................................3–12 System/Monitor/Phasor Diagram ........................................................3–14 System/Monitor/Sync Scope ...............................................................3–14 System/Monitor/Single Line Diagram ..................................................3–14 System/Transfer Event Log .................................................................3–17 System/Transfer Event Log/Download ................................................3–18 System/Transfer Event Log/View ........................................................3–18 System/Transfer Event Log/Clear Status ............................................3–21 System/Transfer Event Log/Clear History ...........................................3–21 System/Sequence of Events Recorder ...............................................3–22 System/Sequence of Events Recorder/Setup .....................................3–22 System/Sequence of Events Recorder/Download ..............................3–23 System/Sequence of Events Recorder/View ......................................3–23

Chapters - (cont'd) Page

iii

Table of Contents

Chapter 3 ISScom® (cont'd)

System/Sequence of Events/Clear .....................................................3–25 System/Oscillograph ...........................................................................3–25 System/Oscillograph/Setup .................................................................3–27 System/Oscillograph/Retrieve .............................................................3–27 System/Oscillograph/Trigger ...............................................................3–28 System/Oscillograph/Clear ..................................................................3–29 System/Profile .....................................................................................3–29 System/Profile/Switching Method .......................................................3–29 System/Profile/Active Profile ...............................................................3–29 System/Profile/Copy Profile ................................................................3–30 System/Profile/Write File To System ...................................................3–30 System/Profile/Read Data From System ............................................3–30 Tools Menu ..........................................................................................3–31 Tools/System Access Codes ...............................................................3–31 Tools/System Access Codes/Comm Access.......................................3–31 Tools/System Access Codes/User Access..........................................3–31 Tools/Miscellaneous Setup..................................................................3–31 Tools/System Outputs Test ..................................................................3–32 Tools/System Comm Setup .................................................................3–33 Tools/System Ethernet Setup ..............................................................3–33 Tools/System Firmware Update ..........................................................3–33 Tools/Calibrate Unit .............................................................................3–33 Tools/System Error Codes / Counters ............................................ 3–33

3.2 ISSplotTM ...........................................................................................3–34 ISSplot File Menu ................................................................................3–36 ISSplot View Menu ..............................................................................3–36 ISSplot Settings Menu.........................................................................3–36 ISSplot Window Menu/Help Menu ......................................................3–38 Window Menu/Help Menu .............................................................. 3–40

Chapter 4 System Setup and Setpoints

4.1 Unit Setup ........................................................................................4–1 General Unit Setup .......................................................................... 4–1 Comm Access Code .............................................................................4–1 ISScom Access Code Setup .................................................................4–2 HMI Comm Access Code Setup ...........................................................4–2 ISScom User Access Codes Setup ......................................................4–3 HMI User Access Codes Setup ............................................................4–4 User Logo Line ......................................................................................4–5 User Control Number ............................................................................4–5 System OK LED ....................................................................................4–5 ISScom User Logo Line Setup ..............................................................4–5 HMI User Control Number Setup ..........................................................4–6 HMI System OK LED Setup ..................................................................4–7 System Clock ........................................................................................4–8 ISScom Set Date/Time .........................................................................4–8


iv


Chapter 4 System Setup and Setpoints (cont'd)

HMI Set Date and Time .........................................................................4–8 Communication Setup .........................................................................4–10 Serial Ports (RS‑232) ..........................................................................4–10 Serial Ports (RS‑485) ..........................................................................4–10 Direct Connection ...............................................................................4–10 Device Address ...................................................................................4–10 ISScom COM Port Definitions and System's Communication Address .....4–11 HMI COM Enable/Disable, Port Definitions and Device Addresses ....4–13 Ethernet Communication Settings ......................................................4–14 DHCP Protocol ....................................................................................4–14 Ethernet Protocols 4–14 ISScom Ethernet Port Setup with DHCP ............................................4–14 ISScom Ethernet Port Setup without DHCP .......................................4–14 HMI Ethernet Port Setup .....................................................................4–15 HMI Manual Configuration of Ethernet Board .....................................4–16 Installing the Modems .........................................................................4–17 Connecting the PC Modem .................................................................4–17 Initializing the PC Modem ...................................................................4–17 Connecting the Local Modem to the MBTS ........................................4–18 Oscillograph Setup ..............................................................................4–19 Setup Oscillograph Recorder ..............................................................4–19 Sequence Events Recorder Setup ................................................. 4–22

4.2 System Setup ......................................................................................4–23 MBTS Setup System ..................................................................... 4–23

4.3 System Diagrams .......................................................................... 4–28

4.4 System Setpoints ................................................................................4–35 Transfer Settings ............................................................................ 4–36 Common Settings (CS) .................................................................. 4–36 Common Settings/common Function Settings Tab ......................... 4–37 Common Settings/Transfer Mode ................................................... 4–37 Common Settings/Upper‑Lower Voltage Limit New Source ........... 4–38 Common Settings/Breaker Closing Time ....................................... 4–38 Common Settings/S1(S2) Breaker Closing Time Deviation ........... 4–38 Common Settings/S1(S2) Breaker 52a & 52b Position Disagreement ..... 4–38 Common Settings/Incomplete Transfer Lockout Time .................... 4–38 Common Settings/Local Manual Initiate Time Delay ...................... 4–39 Common Settings/Blocking After Transfer Time ............................. 4–39 Common Settings/Trip Command and Close Command Pulse Length .................................................................................. 4–39 Common Function Settings Inputs Tab .......................................... 4–40 Common Settings/Breaker Status Inputs ....................................... 4–40 Common Settings/External Control Inputs Configuration ............... 4–41 Common Settings/Transfer Block #1 (#2, #3) ................................ 4–41 Common Settings/External Status Reset ....................................... 4–41 Common Settings Outputs Tab ...................................................... 4–43


v

Table of Contents


Common Settings/Auto Fast Transfer Ready Outputs .................... 4–43 Common Function Settings/Manual Fast Transfer/Hot Parallel Ready Outputs .................................................................. 4–43 Common Settings/Transfer Ready Outputs .................................... 4–43 Common Settings/Transfer Completed Outputs ............................. 4–44 Common Settings/Fast Transfer Load Shedding Outputs ............... 4–44 Common Settings/In‑Phase Transfer Load Shedding Outputs ................................................................. 4–44 Common Settings/Load Shedding Outputs .................................... 4–45 Automatic Transfer Settings (ATS) ................................................. 4–47 HMI Auto Transfer Enable/Disable ................................................. 4–48 Automatic Transfer Settings/Both S1 & S2 Breakers Open ............ 4–47 Automatic Transfer Settings Setup Tab .......................................... 4–47 Automatic Transfer Settings/Auto Transfer Mode ............................ 4–47 Automatic Transfer Settings/External Control Inputs Configuration ...... 4–48 Auto Transfer Auto Transfer Block .................................................. 4–48 Auto Transfer 86P‑S1 Initiate (S1 to S2) ........................................ 4–49 Auto Transfer 86P‑S2 Initiate (S2 to S1) ........................................ 4–49 Auto Transfer 27‑S1 Initiate (S1 to S2) .......................................... 4–49 Auto Transfer 27‑S2 Initiate (S2 to S1) ......................................... 4–49 Automatic Transfer Initiation ........................................................... 4–47 Automatic Transfer Settings Fast Transfer Tab ............................... 4–50 Auto Fast Transfer/Delta Phase Angle Limit .................................. 4–50 Auto Fast Transfer/Delta Voltage Limit ........................................... 4–50 Auto Fast Transfer/Delta Frequency Limit ...................................... 4–50 Auto Fast Transfer/Time Window .................................................... 4–51 Auto Fast Transfer/Closing Command Time Delay ......................... 4–51 Auto Fast Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection ................................. 4–51 Fast Transfer Tab Save/Cancel....................................................... 4–51 Automatic Transfer Settings/In‑Phase Transfer Tab ........................ 4–52 Auto In‑Phase Transfer/Delta Voltage Limit .................................... 4–52 Auto In‑Phase Transfer/Delta Frequency Limit ............................... 4–52 Auto In‑Phase Transfer/Time Window ............................................ 4–52 Auto In‑Phase Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection .......................... 4–53 Auto In‑Phase Transfer Save/Cancel ............................................. 4–53 Automatic Transfer Settings/Residual Voltage Transfer Tab ............ 4–53 Auto Residual Voltage Transfer/Residual Voltage Limit .................. 4–54 Auto Residual Voltage Transfer/Load Shedding Time Delay........... 4–54 Auto Residual Voltage Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection ............. 4–54 Auto Residual Voltage Transfer Save/Cancel ................................. 4–54 Automatic Transfer Settings/Fixed Time Transfer Tab ..................... 4–54 Auto Fixed Time Transfer/Time Delay ............................................ 4–55 Auto Fixed Time Transfer/Load Shedding Time Delay .................... 4–55 Auto Fixed Time Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection....................... 4–55 Auto Fixed Time Transfer Save/Cancel .......................................... 4–55 Manual Transfer Settings (MTS) .................................................... 4–56 Manual Transfer Settings Setup Tab .............................................. 4–56 Manual Transfer Settings/Manual Transfer Mode ........................... 4–56


vi



Manual Transfer ............................................................................. 4–56 Manual Transfer Settings/External Control Inputs Configuration .... 4–56 Manual Transfer/Manual Transfer Block .......................................... 4–56 Manual Transfer/Manual Transfer Initiate ........................................ 4–58 Manual Transfer Save/Cancel ........................................................ 4–58 Manual Transfer Settings/Fast Transfer Tab.................................... 4–58 Manual Fast Transfer/Delta Phase Angle Limit .............................. 4–58 Manual Fast Transfer/Delta Voltage Limit ....................................... 4–58 Manual Fast Transfer/Delta Frequency Limit .................................. 4–58 Manual Fast Transfer/Time Window ............................................... 4–58 Manual Fast Transfer/Closing Command Time Delay ..................... 4–58 Manual Fast Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection ............................. 4–58 Manual Fast Transfer Save/Cancel................................................. 4–58 Manual Transfer Settings/In‑Phase Transfer Tab ............................ 4–60 Manual In‑Phase Transfer/Delta Voltage Limit ................................ 4–60 Manual In‑Phase Transfer/Delta Frequency Limit ........................... 4–60 Manual In‑Phase Transfer/Time Window ........................................ 4–60 Manual In‑Phase Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection ..................... 4–60 Manual In‑Phase Transfer/Save/Cancel ......................................... 4–60 Manual Transfer Settings/Residual Voltage Transfer Tab ................ 4–62 Manual Residual Voltage Transfer/Residual Voltage Limit .............. 4–62 Manual Residual Voltage Transfer/Load Shedding Time Delay ...... 4–62 Manual Residual Voltage Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection ......... 4–62 Manual Residual Voltage Transfer Save/Cancel ............................. 4–62 Manual Transfer Settings/Hot Parallel Transfer Tab ........................ 4–64 Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Delta Phase Angle Limit ................... 4–64 Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Delta Voltage Limit ........................... 4–64 Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Delta Frequency Limit ...................... 4–64 Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Time Window .................................... 4–64 Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Tripping Command Time Delay ........ 4–64 Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection ................. 4–64 Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Save/Cancel ..................................... 4–64 Auto Trip (AT) ................................................................................. 4–66 Auto Trip/Enable/Disable ................................................................ 4–66 Auto Trip/Breaker Trip Option ......................................................... 4–66 Auto Trip/Tripping Command Time Delay ....................................... 4–66 Auto Trip/Blocking Inputs Selection ................................................ 4–66 Auto Trip Save/Cancel .................................................................... 4–66 Function Settings ........................................................................... 4–68 27B Bus Phase Undervoltage ........................................................ 4–68 27#1 Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2) ............ 4–68 27#2 Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate (S2 to S1) ............ 4–68 27#3 and 27#4 Bus Phase Undervoltage ...................................... 4–68 50 Source 1 Instantaneous Phase Overload Detection ................. 4–70 50 Source 2 Instantaneous Phase Overload Detection ................. 4–71 50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure ................................................ 4–72 50BF #2 Source 2 Breaker Failure ................................................ 4–74


vii

Table of Contents


S1 BF Source 1 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status) ......................... 4–74 S2 BF Source 2 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status) ......................... 4–74 60FL Bus VT Fuse Loss ................................................................ 4–76 81 Bus Voltage Frequency ............................................................. 4–78 81R ROCOF (Bus Voltage) ............................................................ 4–80 CCM (Close Circuit Monitor) .......................................................... 4–82 TCM (Trip Circuit Monitor) ............................................................. 4–86 ISSL (ISSLogic) ............................................................................. 4–89 ISSLogic Settings and Logic Functions ......................................... 4–89 ISSLogic Function Setup ............................................................... 4–91 Change Active Profile (ISSLogic) ................................................... 4–95 DO/RST (Dropout/Reset) Timer Feature ........................................ 4–95 Dropout Delay Timer ...................................................................... 4–95 Reset Delay Timer ......................................................................... 4–95

Chapter 5 Installation

5.1 General Information ......................................................................... 5–1

5.2 Mechanical/Physical Dimensions ..................................................... 5–2

5.3 External Connections ............................................................................5–5 Power Supply ........................................................................................5–5 Grounding Requirements ......................................................................5–5 Unit Isolation .........................................................................................5–5 Insulation Coordination .........................................................................5–5 Torque Requirements ............................................................................5–5 MBTS Outputs ......................................................................................5–5 Replacement Fuses ..............................................................................5–4

5.4 Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers ............................................. 5–15

5.5 ISScom® Communications and Analysis Software Installation ..........5–20 ISScom Installation and Setup ............................................................5–20 Hardware Requirements .....................................................................5–20 Installing ISScom ........................................................................... 5–20

5.6 Activating Initial Local Communications ......................................... 5–20

5.7 Pre‑Commissioning Checkout ........................................................ 5–22

5.8 Initial Setup Procedure ........................................................................5–23 Setup Procedure ............................................................................ 5–23


viii


Chapter 6 Testing

6.1 Power On Self Test ......................................................................... 6–2

6.2 Diagnostic Test Procedures ............................................................. 6–3

Overview ...............................................................................................6–3 Equipment Required .............................................................................6–3 Entering Relay Diagnostic Mode ...........................................................6–3 Output Relay Test (Output Relays 1–16 and 17) ...................................6–4 Input Test (Control/Status) Inputs 1‑18 .................................................6–5 Input Test (Trip Coil, Close Coil) Inputs 19‑22 .......................................6–6 Front Panel Status LED Test .................................................................6–7 Module LED Test ...................................................................................6–8 Button Test .......................................................................................6–8 Display Test ...........................................................................................6–9 COM1/COM2 Loopback Test ..............................................................6–10 COM3 Test (2‑wire) .............................................................................6–11 Clock ON/OFF .....................................................................................6–12 Sys OK LED Flash/Illuminated ...................................................... 6–12

6.3 Metering Tests .....................................................................................6–13 Equipment Required ...........................................................................6–13 Metering Test Setup ............................................................................6–13 Voltage Current Verification .................................................................6–14 Torque Requirements ..................................................................... 6–14

6.4 Auto Calibration ............................................................................. 6–14

Appendices

Appendix A: Configuration Record Forms ........................................A–1

Appendix B: Communications ..........................................................B–1

Appendix C: Self‑Test Error Codes ................................................. C–1

Appendix D: Transfer Event Log Samples ....................................... D–1

Appendix E: Sequence of Events Sample Printout ..........................E–1

Appendix F: Transfer Logic Time Sequence .....................................F–1

Appendix G: Layup and Storage ..................................................... G–1

Appendix H: Index .......................................................................... H–1

Appendix I: Declaration of Conformity .............................................. I–1


ix

Table of Contents

Chapter 1

1‑1 M‑3972 Status Module ..................................................................... 1–3

1‑2 M‑3931 Human‑Machine Interface (HMI) Module ............................ 1–4

1‑3 Typical Two Breaker Configuration ................................................... 1–5

1‑4 Unit‑Connected Generator Motor Bus transfer One‑line .................. 1–5

1‑5 Industrial Processing Plant Bus transfer One‑line ........................... 1–6

1‑6 Coastdown of High Inertia Load On a Large Synchronous Motor ... 1–7

1‑7 Coastdown of Low Inertia Load On a Large Induction Motor .......... 1–7

1‑8 V/Hz Resultant Between ES and EM ................................................ 1–8

1‑9 Order of Possible Open Transition MBTS ...................................... 1–10

Chapter 2

2‑1 M‑4272 Front Panel ......................................................................... 2–3

2‑2 Screen Message Menu Flow ........................................................... 2–3

2‑3 Main Menu Flow .............................................................................. 2–4

2‑4 Initiate Manual Transfer Confirmation Screen .................................. 2–8

2‑5 Initiate Manual Transfer Command Sent Confirmation Screen ......... 2–8

2‑6 Remote/Local Mode Dialog Screen ................................................. 2–9

2‑7 Device On/Off Dialog Box .............................................................. 2–10

2‑8 System Error Codes and Output Counters Dialog Screen ............. 2–12

2‑9 Profile Method Dialog Screen ........................................................ 2–14

2‑10 Select Active Profile Dialog Screen ............................................... 2–14

2‑11 Primary Metering Screen ............................................................... 2–15

2‑12 Secondary Metering and Status Screen ........................................ 2–16

Chapter 3

3‑1 ISScom Program Icon ...................................................................... 3–1

3‑2 ISScom Main Menu Structure .......................................................... 3–2

3‑3 Remote/Local Mode Dialog Screen ................................................. 3–1

3‑4 Device On/Off Dialog Box ................................................................ 3–3

3‑5 ISScom Main Screen ....................................................................... 3–3

3‑6 New System Dialog Screen ............................................................. 3–4

3‑7 ISScom Serial Communication Dialog Screen ................................. 3–5

3‑8 ISScom TCP/IP Ethernet Communication Dialog Screen ................ 3–5

3‑9 ISScom Modem Expanded Communication Dialog Screen ............. 3–5

Figures Page

x


Chapter 3 (cont'd)

3‑10 Setup System Dialog Screen ........................................................... 3–6

3‑11 MBTS Setpoints Dialog Screen ....................................................... 3–8

3‑12 Typical Setpoint Dialog Screen ........................................................ 3–8

3‑13 All Setpoints Table Dialog Screen (Partial) ...................................... 3–9

3‑14 Configure Dialog Screen (Partial) .................................................. 3–10

3‑15 Date/Time Dialog Screen ............................................................... 3–11

3‑16 Primary Metering Screen ............................................................... 3–12

3‑17 Secondary Metering and Status Screen ........................................ 3–13

3‑18 Phasor Diagram ............................................................................. 3–15

3‑19 Sync Scope Screen ....................................................................... 3–15

3‑20 Single Line Diagram (Primary Metering) or (Secondary Metering) Screen .................................................... 3–16

3‑21 Transfer Event Log Record Download Screen ............................... 3–18

3‑22 Transfer Event Log Viewer ............................................................. 3–18

3‑23 Transfer Event Log File Summary Screen ..................................... 3–19

3‑24 Transfer Event Log File Summary and Details Screen .................. 3–19

3‑25 System Status and Transfer Start Signal Status Screen ................ 3–20

3‑26 Transfer Event Log Pickup I/Os Status Screen .............................. 3–21

3‑27 Clear Transfer Event Log Status Command Confirmation Screen ... 3–21

3‑28 Transfer Event Log Status Cleared Confirmation Screen ............... 3–21

3‑29 Transfer Event Log Clear History Command Confirmation Screen 3–21

3‑30 Transfer Event Log History Cleared Confirmation Screen.............. 3–21

3‑31 Sequence Of Events Setup............................................................ 3–22

3‑32 Sequence of Events Recorder Download Screen .......................... 3–23

3‑33 Sequence of Events Viewer ........................................................... 3–23

3‑34 Sequence of Events Summary Screen .......................................... 3–23

3‑35 Sequence of Events File Summary and Details Screen ................ 3–24

3‑36 Sequence of Events Pickup I/Os Status Screen ............................ 3–24

3‑37 Sequence of Events Dropout I/Os Status Screen .......................... 3–25

3‑38 Sequence of Events System Status and Transfer Start Signal Status Screen ........................................ 3–26

3‑39 Clear Sequence of Events Record Command Confirmation Screen .. 3–25

3‑40 Sequence of Events Record Cleared Confirmation Screen ........... 3–25

Figures - (cont'd) Page

xi

Table of Contents

Chapter 3 (cont'd)

3‑41 Setup Oscillograph Recorder ......................................................... 3–27

3‑42 Retrieve Oscillograph Record Screen ............................................ 3–28

3‑43 Oscillograph Manual Trigger Command Confirmation Screen ........ 3–28

3‑44 Trigger Oscillograph Recorder Command Sent Screen ................. 3–29

3‑45 Clear Oscillograph Records Command Confirmation Screen ........ 3–29

3‑46 Oscillograph Records Cleared Screen ........................................... 3–29

3‑47 Profile Switching Method Dialog Screen ........................................ 3–29

3‑48 Select Active Profile Dialog Screen ............................................... 3–30

3‑49 Copy Profile Dialog Screen ............................................................ 3–30

3‑50 ISScom File Written to MBTS Confirmation ................................... 3–30

3‑51 ISScom Data Reading Successful Confirmation Screen ................ 3–30

3‑52 Communication Access Code Reset Dialog Screen ...................... 3–31

3‑53 User Access Codes Reset Dialog Screen ..................................... 3–31

3‑54 Miscellaneous Dialog Screen ......................................................... 3–32

3‑55 System Outputs Test Dialog Screen .............................................. 3–32

3‑56 System Communication Setup Dialog Screen ............................... 3–32

3‑57 Ethernet Settings ........................................................................... 3–33

3‑58 System Error Codes / Output Counters Dialog Screen .................. 3–33

3‑59 ISSplot Main Screen ...................................................................... 3–34

3‑60 ISSplot Menu Structure and Submenu Callouts ............................. 3–35

3‑61 Select Waveforms Dialog Screen ................................................... 3–36

3‑62 Change Colors Dialog Screen ....................................................... 3–36

3‑63 Example of ISSplot Oscillographic Data ........................................ 3–37

3‑64 Change Scale Dialog Screen ......................................................... 3–38

3‑65 ISSplot Toolbar .............................................................................. 3–39

3‑66 ISSplot Screen with Callouts ......................................................... 3–39

3‑67 About ISScom Dialog Box ............................................................. 3–40

Chapter 4

4‑1 Communication Access Code Reset Dialog Screen ........................ 4–2

4‑2 Communication Access Code Sent Confirmation Screen ................ 4–2

4‑3 User Access Codes Reset Dialog Screen ....................................... 4–3

4‑4 New User Access Code Sent Confirmation Screen ......................... 4–3


xii


Chapter 4 (cont'd)

4‑5 Miscellaneous Dialog Screen ........................................................... 4–5

4‑6 Set Date/Time Dialog Screen .......................................................... 4–8

4‑7 System Communication Setup Dialog Screen ............................... 4–11

4‑8 Multiple Systems Addressing Using Communications‑Line Splitter.... 4–12

4‑9 COM Port Settings Warning Screen .............................................. 4–12

4‑10 COM Port Setting Verification Screen ............................................ 4–13

4‑11 COM Port Settings Sent Confirmation Screen ............................... 4–13

4‑12 Ethernet Setup Screen .................................................................. 4–14

4‑13 Communications Dialog Screen ..................................................... 4–18

4‑14 Expanded Communication Dialog Screen .................................... 4–19

4‑15 Terminal Window............................................................................ 4–19

4‑16 Setup Oscillograph Recorder ......................................................... 4–21

4‑17 Oscillograph Setup Sent Confirmation Screen ............................... 4–21

4‑18 Sequence of Events Setup ............................................................ 4–22

4‑19 Sequence of Events Send Changes to Unit Confirmation Screen ... 4–22

4‑20 Setup System Dialog Screen ......................................................... 4–24

4‑21 S1/S2 VT Configuration Selection Screen ..................................... 4–24

4‑22 S1/S2 CT Configuration Selection Screen ..................................... 4–26

4‑23 Bus VT Configuration Selection Screen ......................................... 4–26

4‑24 Latched Outputs Selection Screen ................................................ 4–27

4‑25 Pulsed Outputs Selection Screen .................................................. 4–27

4‑26 Input Active States Selection Screen ............................................. 4–27

4‑27 Three‑Phase Wye‑Wye VT Three‑Line Connection Diagram ......... 4–28

4‑28 Three‑Phase Wye‑Primary/Wye Secondary, One Phase Grounded VT Three‑Line Connection Diagram .............................. 4–29

4‑29 Three‑Phase Open Delta VT Three‑Line Connection Diagram ...... 4–30

4‑30 Single‑Phase, Phase Ground VT Three‑Line Connection Diagram .. 4–31

4‑31 Single‑Phase, Phase‑Phase VT Three‑Line Connection Diagram ... 4–32

4‑32 Single‑Phase Source Side, Phase‑Ground, Three‑Phase Bus Side, Wye‑Wye Three‑Line Connection Diagram .................................... 4–33

4‑33 Single‑Phase Source Side, Phase‑Phase, Three‑Phase Bus Side Open Delta Three‑Line Connection Diagram ................................. 4–34

4‑34 System Setpoints Dialog Screen ................................................... 4–36


xiii

Table of Contents

Chapter 4 (cont'd)

4‑35 Common Function Settings Dialog Screen .................................... 4–37

4‑36 Common Function Settings Inputs Dialog Screen ......................... 4–40

4‑37 Transfer Block #1 Input Dialog Screen ........................................... 4–41

4‑38 External Status Input Selection Dialog Screen .............................. 4–41

4‑39 Common Function Settings Outputs Dialog Screen ....................... 4–42

4‑40 Auto Fast Transfer Ready Output Selection Dialog Screen ............ 4–42

4‑41 Manual Fast Transfer/Hot Parallel Ready Output Selection Dialog Screen ................................................................................ 4–42

4‑42 Transfer Ready Output Selection Dialog Screen ............................ 4–43

4‑43 Transfer Completed Output Selection Dialog Screen ..................... 4–45

4‑44 Fast Transfer Load Shedding Output Selection Dialog Screen ...... 4–45

4‑45 In‑Phase Transfer Load Shedding Output Selection Dialog Screen ................................................................ 4–46

4‑46 Incomplete Transfer Outputs Selection Dialog Screen ................... 4–46

4‑47 Load Shedding Output Selection Dialog Screen ............................ 4–46

4‑48 Automatic Transfer Settings Dialog Screen .................................... 4–48

4‑49 Automatic Transfer Block Input Settings Dialog Screen ................. 4–48

4‑50 Automatic Transfer Settings Fast Transfer Tab Dialog Screen ........ 4–50

4‑51 Fast Transfer Blocking Inputs Selection Dialog Screen .................. 4–51

4‑52 Automatic Transfer Settings In‑Phase Transfer Tab Dialog Screen .. 4–52

4‑53 Automatic Transfer Settings Residual Voltage Transfer Tab Dialog Screen ......................................................................... 4–53

4‑54 Automatic Transfer Settings Fixed Time Transfer Tab Dialog Screen ......................................................................... 4–55

4‑55 Manual Transfer Settings Dialog Screen ........................................ 4–57

4‑56 Manual Transfer Block Input Settings Dialog Screen ..................... 4–57

4‑57 Manual Transfer Initiate Input Settings Dialog Screen ................... 4–58

4‑58 Manual Transfer Settings Fast Transfer Tab Dialog Screen ............ 4–59

4‑59 Manual Fast Transfer Blocking Inputs Selection Dialog Screen ..... 4–59

4‑60 Manual Transfer Settings In‑Phase Transfer Tab Dialog Screen ..... 4–61

4‑61 In‑Phase Transfer Blocking Inputs Selection Dialog Screen .......... 4–61

4‑62 Manual Transfer Settings Residual Voltage Transfer Tab Dialog Screen ......................................................................... 4–63


xiv


Chapter 4 (cont'd)

4‑63 Residual Voltage Transfer Blocking Inputs Selection Dialog Screen ... 4–63

4‑64 Manual Transfer Settings Hot Parallel Transfer Tab Dialog Screen .. 4–65

4‑65 Hot Parallel Blocking Inputs Selection Dialog Screen ................... 4–65

4‑66 Automatic Trip Settings Dialog Screen ........................................... 4–67

4‑67 Main‑Tie‑Main Application Example ............................................... 4–67

4‑68 Function Settings Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2) Dialog Screen ................................................... 4–69

4‑69 27B#1 Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate Inputs/Outputs Selection Dialog Screen ........................................ 4–69

4‑70 Source 1 Instantaneous Phase Overload Detection Dialog Screen ... 4–70

4‑71 Source 1 Instantaneous Phase Overload Detection I/O Selection Dialog Screen ................................................................ 4–70

4‑72 Source 2 Instantaneous Phase Overload Detection Dialog Screen ... 4–71

4‑73 Source 2 Instantaneous Phase Overload Detection I/O Selection Dialog Screen ................................................................ 4–71

4‑74 50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure Dialog Screen ......................... 4–72

4‑75 Breaker Failure Logic Diagram ...................................................... 4–72

4‑76 50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure I/O Selection Dialog Screen ... 4–73

4‑77 50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure Initiate Inputs/Initiate Outputs Selection Dialog Screen ................................................... 4–73

4‑78 50BF #2 Source 2 Breaker Failure Dialog Screen ......................... 4–74

4‑79 S1 BF Source 1 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status) Dialog Screen .. 4–75

4‑80 S1 BF Source 1 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status) I/O Selection Dialog Screen........................................................... 4–75

4‑81 S2 BF Source 2 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status) Dialog Screen.. 4–75

4‑82 60FL Bus VT Fuse Loss Dialog Screen ......................................... 4–76

4‑83 60FL Bus VT Fuse‑Loss Function Inputs/Outputs Selection Dialog Screen ................................................................ 4–77

4‑84 81 #1(2) Bus Voltage Frequency Function Dialog Screen.............. 4–79

4‑85 81 #1(2) Bus Voltage Frequency Function Inputs/Outputs Selection Dialog Screen ................................................................ 4–79

4‑86 81R #1(2) ROCOF (Bus Voltage) Function Dialog Screen............. 4–81

4‑87 81R #1(2) ROCOF (Bus Voltage) Inputs/Outputs Selection Dialog Screen ................................................................ 4–81

4‑88 Recommended Close Circuit Monitoring Input Configuration......... 4–83


xv

Table of Contents

Chapter 4 (cont'd)

4‑89 Close Circuit Monitoring Input Configuration with Anti‑Pump Relay Not Bypassed ..................................................... 4–84

4‑90 CCM (Close Circuit Monitor) Function Dialog Screen .................... 4–85

4‑91 CCM (Close Circuit Monitor) Inputs/Outputs Selection Dialog Screen ................................................................................ 4–85

4‑92 Trip Circuit Monitoring Input ........................................................... 4–86

4‑93 TCM (Trip Circuit Monitor) Function Dialog Screen ....................... 4–87

4‑94 TCM (Trip Circuit Monitor) Inputs/Outputs Selection Dialog Screen ... 4–89

4‑95 ISSLogic Function Dialog Screen .................................................. 4–90

4‑96 Selection Screen for Initiating Outputs .......................................... 4–91

4‑97 Selection Screen for Initiating Functions Timeout .......................... 4–91

4‑98 Selection Screen for Initiating Function Pickup .............................. 4–91

4‑99 Selection Screen for Initiating System Status ................................ 4–92

4‑100 Selection Screen for Initiating Inputs ............................................. 4–93

4‑101 Selection Screen for Blocking Inputs ............................................. 4–93

4‑102 Selection Screen for Block System Status ..................................... 4–94

4‑103 Dropout Delay Timer Logic Diagram .............................................. 4–95

4‑104 Reset Delay Timer Logic Diagram ................................................. 4–95

4‑105 ISSLogic Function Diagram ........................................................... 4–96

Chapter 5 5‑1 Horizontal Unit Mechanical/Physical Dimensions............................. 5–2

5‑2 Panel Mount Cutout Dimensions (Horizontal and Vertical) .............. 5–3

5‑3 Vertical Unit Mechanical/Physical Dimensions ................................. 5–4

5‑4 Power Supply Connection ................................................................ 5–5

5‑5 Horizontal Unit External Connections .............................................. 5–6

5‑6 Vertical Unit External Connections .................................................. 5–7

5‑7 Three‑Phase Wye‑Wye VT Three‑Line Connection Diagram ........... 5–8

5‑8 Three‑Phase Wye‑Primary/Wye Secondary, One Phase Grounded VT Three Line Connection Diagram ................................ 5–9

5‑9 Three‑Phase Open Delta VT Three‑Line Connection Diagram ...... 5–10

5‑10 Single‑Phase, Phase‑Ground VT Three‑Line Connection Diagram ... 5–11

5‑11 Single‑Phase, Phase‑Phase VT Three‑Line Connection Diagram ... 5–12


xvi


Chapter 5 (cont'd) 5‑12 Single‑Phase, Source Side, Phase‑Ground, Three‑Phase Bus Side, Wye‑Wye Three‑Line Connection Diagram .................................... 5–13

5‑13 Single‑Phase, Source Side, Phase‑Phase, Three Phase Bus Side, Open Three‑Line Connection Diagram .......................................... 5–14

5‑14 M‑4272 Bottom Circuit Board (B‑0970) .......................................... 5–18

5‑15 M‑4272 B‑0957 Top Circuit Board .................................................. 5–19

5‑16 ISScom Program Icon .................................................................... 5–20

Chapter 6 6‑1 Power Supply Connection ................................................................ 6–2

6‑2 MBTS Trip Coil‑Close Coil Input Voltage Rating .............................. 6–7

6‑3 Status LED Panel ............................................................................ 6–8

6‑4 Status Module ..................................................................................6–8

6‑5 M‑3931 Human‑Machine Interface Module ...................................... 6–9

6‑6 COM1/COM2 Loopback Plug ......................................................... 6–10

6‑7 RS‑485 2‑Wire Testing ................................................................... 6–11

6‑8 Metering Voltage Input Configuration ............................................. 6–15

6‑9 Metering Current Input Configuration ............................................. 6–15

Appendix A A‑1 System Communication Setup ............................................................. A–2

A‑2 Setup System ....................................................................................... A–3

A‑3 System Setpoints Transfer Settings (page 1 of 7) ................................ A–4

A‑4 System Setpoints Function Settings (page 1 of 18) .......................A–11

Appendix B B‑1 Null Modem Cable: M‑0423 .............................................................B–2

B‑2 RS‑232 Fiber Optic Network ............................................................B–3

B‑3 RS‑485 Network ..............................................................................B–4

B‑4 COM2 Pinout for Demodulated TTL Level Signal ............................B–4

Appendix D D‑1 Transfer Event Log Summary Printout ............................................ D–2

D‑2 Transfer Event Log Detail Printout .................................................. D–4


xvii

Table of Contents


Appendix E E‑1 Sequence of Events Recorder Summary Printout ...........................E–2

E‑2 Sequence of Events Recorder Detail Printout .................................E–4

Appendix F F‑1 Time Sequence of Transfer Logic in Sequential Transfer Mode .......F–2

F‑2 Time Sequence of Transfer Logic in Simultaneous Transfer Mode .....F–3

Tables Page

Chapter 1 1‑1 M‑4272 Transfer Functions .............................................................. 1–2

1‑2 M‑4272 Device Functions ................................................................ 1–2

Chapter 2 2‑1 Breaker Status LED Input Configurations ........................................ 2–2

Chapter 3 3‑1 ISSplot Shortcut Keys .................................................................... 3–38

Chapter 4 4‑1 Dead‑Sync Time ............................................................................ 4–11

4‑2 Recorder Partitions ........................................................................ 4–20

4‑3 Input Activated Profile .................................................................... 4–26

Chapter 5 5‑1 Jumpers ......................................................................................... 5–15

5‑2 Dip Switch SW‑1 ............................................................................ 5–16

5‑3 Trip Circuit Monitor 1 Input Voltage Select Jumper Configuration ... 5–16

5‑4 Close Circuit Monitor 1 Input Voltage Select Jumper Configuration ... 5–17

5‑5 Trip Circuit Monitor 2 Input Voltage Select Jumper Configuration .. 5–17

5‑6 Close Circuit Monitor 2 Input Voltage Select Jumper Configuration ... 5–17

Chapter 6 6‑1 Output Contacts ...............................................................................6–4

6‑2 Input Contacts .................................................................................6–6

6‑3 Trip Coil and Close Coil Input Contacts ........................................... 6–6

xviii


800-4272-IB-07MC6 03/13©2006 Beckwith Electric Co. All Rights Reserved.Printed in U.S.A. (9.21.01)

Tables (Cont'd) Page

Appendix A A‑1 Relay Configuration Table ..............................................................A–29

Appendix B B‑1 Communication Port Signals .......................................................... B‑2

Appendix C C‑1 Self‑Test Error Codes ...........................................................................C–1

C‑2 ISScom® Error Messages ....................................................................C–3

Introduction – 1

1–1

1.1 Instruction Book Contents

This instruction book includes six Chapters and nine Appendices.

Chapter 1: IntroductionChapter One summarizes the devices’ capabilities, introduces the instruction book contents and describes the application of an MBTS.

Chapter 2: OperationChapter Two provides the necessary instructions regarding manual operation of the MBTS. Manual operation of the MBTS is accomplished by utilizing either the unit’s front panel controls and indicators, which include the M‑3931 Human Machine Interface (HMI) and M‑3972 Status Module or through the M‑3872 ISScom® Communications and Oscillographic Analysis Software.

Chapter 3: ISScomChapter 3 provides a description of each element of the M‑3872 ISScom Communications and Oscillographic Analysis Software. The ISScom menu structure and commands are described in detail for each feature and function.

Chapter 4: System Setup and SetpointsChapter Four is designed for the person(s) responsible for the direct setting and configuration of the system. It describes the procedures for entering all required data into the MBTS. Included in this chapter are functional and connection diagrams for a typical application for the system; and describes the configuration process for the unit (choosing active functions), output contact

1 Introduction

1.1 Instruction Book Contents ....................................................... 1–1

1.2 M‑4272 Motor Bus Transfer System (MBTS) ........................... 1–2

1.3 Application .............................................................................. 1–5

assignment and input blocking designation. It also illustrates the definition of system quantities and equipment characteristics required by the MBTS, and describes the individual function settings.

Chapter 5: InstallationThe person or group responsible for the installation of the MTBS will find herein all mechanical information required for physical installation, equipment ratings, and all external connections in this chapter. For reference, the Three‑Line Connection Diagram is repeated from Chapter 4, System Setup and Setpoints. Further, a commissioning checkout procedure is outlined to check the external CT and VT connections. Additional tests which may be desirable at the time of installation are described in Chapter 6, Testing.

Chapter 6: TestingThis chapter provides step‑by‑step test procedures for each function, as well as diagnostic mode and auto‑calibration procedures.

Appendix A: Configuration Record FormsThis Appendix supplies a set of forms to record and document the settings required for the proper operation of the MBTS.

Appendix B: CommunicationsThis Appendix describes communication port signals and various topologies and equipment required for remote communication.

Appendix C: Self‑Test Error CodesThis Appendix lists all the error codes and their definitions.

M‑4272 Instruction Book

1–2

Appendix D: Transfer Event Log Sample PrintoutThis Appendix provides a sample Transfer Event Log printout.

Appendix E: Sequence of Events Sample PrintoutThis Appendix provides a sample Sequence of Events printout.

Appendix F: Transfer Logic Time SequenceThis Appendix includes the Transfer Logic Time Sequence for each transfer.

Appendix G: Layup and StorageThis Appendix includes the recommended storage parameters, periodic surveillance activities and layup configuration for the M‑4272 Motor Bus Transfer System.

Appendix H: IndexThis Appendix includes the Index for the M‑4272 Instruction Book.

Appendix I: Declaration of ConformityThis Appendix includes the Declaration of Conformity in accordance to ISO/IEC 17050‑1:2004.

1.2 M‑4272 Motor Bus Transfer System

The M‑4272 Motor Bus Transfer System (MBTS) is a microprocessor‑based unit that uses digital signal processing technology to provide automatic and manual transfer modes.

The available internal functions of the system are listed in Table 1‑1. The nomenclature follows the standards of ANSI/IEEE Std. C37.2, Standard Electric Power Systems Device Function Numbers where applicable. The available MBTS Transfer Functions are listed in Table 1‑2.

Mode Transfer FunctionAUTO MANUAL

X X Fast TransferX X In-Phase TransferX X Residual Voltage TransferX Fixed Time Transfer

X Hot ParallelTable 1‑1 M‑4272 Transfer Functions

The control/status inputs can be programmed to block and/or to trigger the oscillograph recorder. Any of the functions or the control/status inputs can be individually programmed to activate any one or more of the programmable outputs, each with a contact.

NOTE: See Section 1.3, Application for Transfer Function descriptions.

The M‑3931 Human Machine Interface (HMI) Module allows the user to access the following features and functions from the M‑4272 front panel using a menu‑driven, 2 line by 24 character alphanumeric display:

Settings

• EnableandDisableManualTransfer • EnableandDisableAutoTransfer • SetMBTStoeitherLocalorRemote • EnterCommsettings • SetAccessCodes • SetUserControlNumber • SetdisplayUserLines1and2 • SetDate/Time

Introduction – 1

1–3

Functions

• InitiateaManualTransfer • ClearAlarmCounter • EnterDiagnosticMode • ClearErrorCodes

Status

• Metering of various quantities, includingvoltage, current, frequency and phase‑angle

• I/OStatus • AlarmCounter • MBTSUnitLastPowerUpDateandTime • MBTSUnitFirmwareVersionandSerialNum‑

ber • ErrorCodes • Checksums

Function Description27 Phase Undervoltage50 Instantaneous Phase Overload

50BF Breaker Failure

SBF Source Breaker Failure Using Breaker Status

60FL VT Fuse-Loss Detection81 Frequency

81R Rate of Change of FrequencyISSL ISSlogicCCM Closed Circuit MonitoringTCM Trip Curcuit Monitoring

Table 1‑2 M‑4272 Device Functions

The MBTS stores time‑tagged transfer information for the four most recent transfers. The M‑3972 Status Module LEDs are used to provide a detailed visual indication of function operation for the most recent event.

The MBTS retains up to 248 cycles of oscillograph waveform data. This data can be downloaded and analyzed using the M‑3872 ISScom® Communications and Oscillograph Analysis Software.

The unit is powered from two wide input range switch mode power supplies.

The MBTS includes self‑test, auto calibration, and diagnosticcapabilities,inadditiontoIRIG-Btime-sync capability for accurate time‑tagging of events.

Communication PortsThere are three physical communication ports provided on the M-4272. If the optional RJ45Ethernet port is purchased, then the MBTS shares COM2.

• COM1,locatedonthesystemfrontpanel,isastandard9-pinRS-232DTE-config‑ured port. COM1 is used to locally set and interrogate the MBTS using a portable computer.

• COM2,locatedontherearoftheMBTS,isastandard9-pinRS-232DTE-configuredport.WhentheoptionalRJ45EthernetPortis enabled, the COM2 port is disabled for communications. However, the Demodu‑lated IRIG-B may still be used throughthe COM2 Port when Ethernet is enabled. When COM2 Port is enabled the Ethernet Port is not available.

TheRJ45Ethernetportusesa10Base-TtypeconnectionthatacceptsanRJ45connector using CAT5 twisted pair cable. TheEthernetportsupportsMODBUSoverTCP/IP. The IP address can be obtained automatically when using the DHCP pro‑tocol if enabled, or a static IP address can be manually entered, using the HMI.

• COM3,locatedontherearterminalblockoftheMBTS,isa2-wireRS-485commu‑nications port.

NOTE: COM1, COM2 and COM3 can be disabled for security purposes from the Commu‑nications HMI menu. A Level 2 Access Code is required.

The system may be remotely set and interrogated utilizing either a hard-wired RS-232 serialconnection or modem (COM2 when activated as RS-232,orCOM3),orwhenpurchased,theethernetconnection(RJ45activated).


1–4

M‑3933/M‑0423 Serial Communication CablesThe M-3933 cable is a 10-foot RS-232 cable foruse between the MBTS rear panel (COM2) port and a modem. This cable includes a DB25 (25‑pin) connector (modem) and a DB9 (9‑pin) at the MBTS end.

TheM-0423cableisa10-footnull-modemRS-232cable for direct connection between a PC and the MBTS front panel COM1 port, or the rear COM2 port. This cable includes a DB9 (9‑pin) connector at each end.

M‑3931 Human‑Machine Interface (HMI) ModuleThe HMI module provides the means to interrogate the MBTS and to input a limited number of settings, access data, etc. directly from the front of the MBTS. Its operation is described in detail in Section 2.1, Front Panel Controls and Indications.

BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO.M-4272

EXIT ENTER

Figure 1‑2 M‑3931 Human‑Machine Interface (HMI) Module

M‑3872 ISScom Communications and Oscillograph Analysis SoftwareISScom is shipped with every MBTS. This software runs on a PC‑compatible computer operating under Microsoft Windows® 98 or later. When properly connected using either a direct serial connection, modem or ethernet network connection, ISScom can provide the following functions:

• Setpointinterrogationandmodification

• Bus,Source1andSource2statusreal-time monitoring

• Recordedoscillographdatadownloading

• DisplayOscillographData

• InitiateTransfer

See Chapter 3, ISScom for a detailed description of all ISScom features.

M‑3972 Status ModuleThe status module (Figure 1‑1), includes 24 individually labelled STATUS LEDs to indicate operation of the functions on the front panel. Eight individually labelled OUTPUT LEDs will be lit as long as the corresponding output contact is picked up.

27B BUS UNDERVOLTAGE

TRANS READY

FAST TRANS OP

IN-PHASE TRANS OP

RESIDUAL VOLTAGE TRANS OP

FIXED-TIME TRANS OP

PARAL TRANS/AUTO TRIP OP

50/50BF-1/SRC 1 BRKR FAIL

50/50BF-2/SRC 2 BRKR FAIL

81/81R BUS FREQ/ROCOF

TRIP SOURCE 1 BRKR

CLOSE SOURCE 1 BRKR

DELTA PHASE ANGLE OK

DELTA VOLTAGE OK

DELTA FREQUENCY OK

FAST/PARAL TRANS READY

S1/S2 BRKR-RACKED OUT BLOCK

NEW SOURCE VOLT BLOCK

BUS VT LOSS BLOCK

TRIP/CLOSE CKT OPEN BLOCK

INCOMP TRANS BLOCK

ALARM OUTPUT BLOCK

TRIP SOURCE 2 BRKR

CLOSE SOURCE 2 BRKR

STATUS

OUTPUTSOUT 1

OUT 2

OUT 3

OUT 4

OUT 5

OUT 6 OUT 8

OUT 7

Figure 1‑1 M‑3972 Status Module

Introduction – 1

1–5

1.3 Application

Typically most power plant and industrial plants have motors that must remain operational in the event of a loss of the power source. There are many reasons to initiate a transfer:

• Forfaultclearingonthepresentsource

• Interruptionofpresentsource

• Planneddeliberatetransfertoanon-sitesource during periods of storms or for rate savings

• Maintenance

• Normalplantstartup/shutdown

• Auxiliarysystemtransfer.

To address this requirement, facilities employ two power sources to supply these auxiliary systems. In a power plant these two power sources are normally the station service transformer and the auxiliary startup transformer which is usually also connected to the utility. In a processing plant there are two independent power sources which power separate portions of the plant.

The purpose of a Motor Bus Transfer System (MBTS) is to quickly and safely transfer the bus motor load from one source to another source to maintain power plant or process plant continuity. Motor bus transfer systems are used to perform the transfer of large motors or aggregates of smaller and larger motors. A typical configuration is shown in Figure 1‑3.

The M‑4272 MBTS monitors the Source 1 voltage, the Motor Bus voltage and the Source 2 voltage. The M‑4272 also controls the Source 1 and Source 2 breakers. In a normal transfer a protective MBTS recognizes an abnormal condition and operates an 86 lockout MBTS which will trip the Source 1 breaker and also initiates a transfer. The M‑4272 MBTS will issue a trip command to the Source 1 breaker and then it will issue a close command to the Source 2 breaker. This will transfer the Motor Bus load from the troubled Source 1 to Source 2, keeping the motors on the bus running and the process continuing to operate. Figure 1‑4 illustrates a conventional unit‑connected generator one‑line diagram. This application uses the unit auxiliary transformer as one source and the startup transformer as the second source.


1–6

VT-M VT-SU

VT-B

52M

STATION BUS SYSTEM

STARTUP SOURCE

N.C.

MTWO-BREAKER CONFIGURATION

CT-M

N.O. 52SU

CT-SU



MAIN SOURCE

M

M-4272

IS1 IS2

VS1VS2

VBus

NOTE: Current transformers are used for the M‑4272 50BF function , they are not required for transfer operation.

Figure 1‑3 Typical Two Breaker Configuration

52S1

AUXILIARY MOTOR BUS

52S2

GENERATOR

TRANSMISSION SYSTEM



GENERATOR STEP-UPTRANSFORMER

STARTUP SOURCEBREAKER

M M M

Figure 1‑4 Unit‑Connected Generator Motor Bus transfer One‑line

Introduction – 1

1–7

Figure 1‑5 illustrates a typical industrial plant one‑line diagram. This application has two independent sources, with each half of the processing plant operated by each source. There is normally an open tie breaker between the two motor buses. In this application two M‑4272 MBTS are used. Each system controls a source breaker and the tie breaker. Whichever source fails has its breaker tripped and the tie breaker is closed, this transfers the motor bus load to the remaining source which now supplies power to the entire plant.

In general, the voltage characteristic of a motor bus during a transfer is governed by the motor loads operating at the time of transfer. The majority of auxiliary system motors are induction motors with few synchronous motors used in isolated cases. The types of motors in use will, to a great degree, determine the voltage characteristics of the auxiliary system buses. When the bus is disconnected from the source, the motors will maintain a voltage due to the energy stored in the motor fields. The intital magnitude of the voltage depends on the integrity of the power source prior to being disconnected.

AthreephasefaultintheUnitAuxiliaryGeneratorStep‑up transformer or on the high voltage bus near the plant may completely deenergize the motor fields and the resultant voltage will be minimal. However, for all other cases a significant voltage will be induced on the motor bus. The induced voltage will have a dynamic amplitude and phase charateristic that will depend on the inertia of the motor loads and the field energy stored in the motors.

The charactersistics for synchronous and induction motors are shown in Figures 1‑6 and 1‑7 respectively. Figure 1‑6 represents a 6000 hp I.D. fan motor operating at 25% load proior to transfer. This is an example of a characteristic for a large motor driving a high inertia load. The voltage magnitude requires 42 cycles to drop 50% of it’s initial value and the angle takes more than 60 cycles to complete a 360 degree rotation. The 960 hp boiler circulating pump motor used for Figure 1‑7 data shows a dramatic variation in characteristics. The voltage magnitude drops to 50% within 10 cycles and the phase completes a 360 degree rotation in less than eight cycles.

STATION BUS SYSTEM

N.C.52S1

VT-B1

N.C. 52S2

VT-S2

BUS 1 BUS 2

VT-B2

52T

N.O.

BUS-TIE

VT-S1

CT-S1 CT-S2

CT-B1 CT-B2

M-4272 M-4272

M M M M


VS1VS1

IS1

VS2 VBusIS2

IS1

IS2 VBus VS2

NOTE: Current transformers are used for the M‑4272 50BF function , they are not required for transfer operation.

Figure 1‑5 Industrial Processing Plant Bus transfer One‑line


1–8

ReferringtoFigures1-6and1-7,afewgeneralizationscan be made regarding the inertia of motor loads, motor size, and the mix of synchronous and induction motors.

• Inertia —Thehigher the inertiaof theaggregate motor loads on the motor bus, the more slowly the motor bus frequency will decay during the disconnected coast‑down period. That has a direct impact on how fast the phase angle changes. Low inertia loads will cause the phase angle to change quickly, as the frequency of the motor bus decays quickly, and the slip frequency between the motor bus and the new source quickly increases.

• MotorSize —Thelargerthemotorsize,the longer the time the voltage will take to decay on an induction motor.

• MixofSynchronousandInductionMo‑tors —Voltagewilltendtodecaymuchmore rapidly on a motor bus with all induction motors. On a motor bus with a mix of synchronous and induction mo‑tors, the synchronous motors will attempt to hold up the voltage during the transfer interval.

• Loading —Thehighertheloadonthemotors, the faster the motor bus fre‑quency will decay.

These parameters are key to analyzing the motor bus transfer issue and developing schemes to accomplish transfers that promote process continuity while causing no damage to the motors or the loads.

An important value to decide the viability of MBT is the resultant volts per hertz (V/Hz) across the breaker. The resultant V/Hz is derived from the V/Hz vectors of the motor bus and the new source at the instant just prior to connection and must not exceed 1.33 V/Hz [1]. Pursuant to phase angle and voltage, and their effect on resultant V/Hz, some generalizations can be made:

• Phase Angle — As the phase angleincreases between the two sources, as‑suming the two source voltages are the same, the V/Hz will increase.

• Voltage — As the voltage differencebetween the two sources increases, assuming the phase angle between the sources remains the same, the V/Hz will increase.

00 10 20 30 40 50 60

20

40

60

80

100 0

-72

-144

-216

-288

-360

Vol

tage

Mag

nitu

de (%

)

Pha

se (D

egre

es)

Time (Cycles)

960 HP Boiler Circulating Pump(Operating at Full Load)

Phase (not shown for T>20)

Voltage

Figure 1‑7 Coastdown of Low Inertia Load On a Large Induction Motor

00 10 20 30 40 50 60

20

40

60

80

100 0

-72

-144

-216

-288

-360

Vol

tage

Mag

nitu

de (%

)

Pha

se (D

egre

es)

Time (Cycles)

6000 HP I.D. Fan(Operating at 25% Load Prior to Transfer)

Phase

VoltageMagnitude

Figure 1‑6 Coastdown of High Inertia Load On a Large Synchronous Motor

Introduction – 1

1–9

Hot Parallel, Fast, In‑Phase, Residual and Fixed Time Transfer MethodsMBTs can be categorized as closed or open transition [2]. The closed transition involves brief paralleling of the sources. The closed transition transfer is commonly referred to as a hot parallel transfer. Open transition transfers do not parallel the sources, and include fast, in‑phase, residual and fixed time. The fast transfer can be subcategorized as simultaneous or sequential. All other transfers are sequential.

Hot Parallel TransferIn a hot parallel transfer, the new source is connected to the motor bus before the old source is tripped. The intent is to transfer sources without interruption. The phase angle, delta voltage and delta frequency from the motor bus and the new source are evaluated prior to the transfer to assure that the motor bus and the new source are in synchronism. This method has gained wide acceptance for routine source transfers because transients on the motor bus are eliminated.

There may be instances where the two sources may not be derived from the same primary source and a large standing phase angle may be present between them, precluding a hot parallel transfer. Assuming the two sources’ phase angle relationship is acceptable, with the two sources paralleled, currents flowing into and through the bus may violate the interrupt rating for the circuit breakers and the short term withstand ratings of the source transformers. A fault occurring either on the bus or on one of the sources during the time the sources are paralleled can overstress the components of the bus system. The probability of this happening may be viewed as small; however, the consequences of such a fault occurring during the source paralleled operating interval should be thoroughly understood before the hot parallel transfer system is used.

The resultant V/Hz issue is exacerbated when the phase angle difference increases and the voltage difference increases as shown in Figure 1‑8. The following relationship in equation 1 defines this condition:

θcos222MSMSR EEEEE −+=

[1]

where ES System equivalent V/Hz

EM Motor residual V/Hz (on system base)

ERResultantvectorialV/Hz

θ Phase angle between the motor bus and new source at the instant prior to connection

ES = 1 pu @ 0 degrees

ER = 1.33 pu

EM = 0.81 pu @

-95 degrees θ

Figure 1‑8 V/Hz Resultant Between ES and EM


1–10

Fast Simultaneous TransferIn a fast simultaneous transfer, a trip command is issued to the present source breaker and a close command is issued to the new source breaker at the same instant. The phase angle, delta voltage and delta frequency from the motor bus and the new source are evaluated prior to the transfer to assure that the motor bus and the new source are in synchronism. This is the fastest transfer type that does not deliberately parallel the sources. Due to breaker operating time variations and control voltage variations, brief unintentional paralleling of the sources may occur.

The M‑4272 includes settings that allow delaying the close command to avoid any paralelling of the source.

Close commands used in the fast simultaneous transfers make certain assumptions about the phase angle and slip frequency between the decelerating motors and the new source:

• Thetransferisaffectedbeforethephaseangle between the new source and the motor bus increases to an undesirable value.

• Afaultoccursonthepresentsource,whichmay affect the phase angle at the instant the transfer sequence starts.

• Therewill be little change in the phaseangle between the motor bus and new source once the present source has been disconnected.

• Any preconceived notions about thedeceleration characteristics of the motor bus have not changed. Key characteristics would be changes in the combined inertia of the motor loads and changes in the mix of synchronous and induction motors.

When Fast Simultaneous Transfer is selected, a breaker failure function is required in the event the breaker does not trip. The M‑4272 includes two Breaker Failure methods (see Section 4.4, System Setpoints).

Fast Sequential TransferIn a fast sequential transfer, the present source is tripped, and as soon as the present source breaker has started to open (typically indicated by an “early b” contact), a close command is issued to the new source breaker. The phase angle, delta voltage and delta frequency from the motor bus and the new source are evaluated prior to the transfer to

assure that the motor bus and the new source are in synchronism. This is the second fastest transfer type that does not deliberately parallel the sources.

A close command used in the fast sequential transfers can be dynamically blocked, just after the present source is disconnected, if any of the following occur:

• A fault occurs on the present or newsource, which may affect the phase angle at the instant the transfer sequence starts.

• Thereisalargechangeinthephaseanglebetween the motor bus and new source once the present source has been discon‑nected [2].

• Anypreconceivednotionsaboutthede‑celeration characteristics of the motor bus have changed in that the deceleration has increased, therefore causing the phase angle to change rapidly. This would occur from a decrease in the inertia of the motor loads.

There is a type of sequential transfer that may be applied if a fast transfer cannot be made, but before a residual or fixed time transfer. It is called an in‑phase transfer and offers an additional opportunity to transfer while the motors are still spinning and the likelihood of process interruption is minimized.

In‑Phase TransferAn in-phase transfer is defined as connecting a motor bus and the new source that have a slip frequency between them at the first (zero degrees) phase coincidence (the motor bus is coasting down). It is essentially a specialized type of automatic synchronizing under high slip frequency (typically from 0.5 to 10 hertz), and a rapidly decelerating motor bus frequency (rapidly growing slip frequency). This requires the use of very fast measurement and output command techniques. As the slip frequency is changing rapidly due to the deceleration of the motor bus, calculation of the rate of change of frequency may be required in addition to examination of the instantaneous slip frequency when making the new source closing command decision [3].

Introduction – 1

1–11

Residual Voltage TransferIn a residual voltage transfer, the motor bus is connected to the new source after the voltage on the coasting motor bus falls to less than 0.33 pu. In this manner, no matter what the phase angle, the resultant V/Hz will not exceed 1.33 V/Hz. This is the third type of transfer type that does not parallel the sources. This type of transfer, however, typically is not fast enough to maintain process continuity, as certain motor loads that cause rapid stalling may necessitate a restart of the motors on the bus.

Fixed Time TransferIn a fixed time transfer, the motor bus is connected to the new source after a time delay that would reflect that the voltage on the coasting motor bus has fallen to less than 0.33 pu. In this manner, no matter what the phase angle, the resultant V/Hz will not exceed 1.33 V/Hz. This is the fourth type of transfer type that does not parallel the sources. This type transfer, however, will not be able maintain process continuity, as certain motor loads that cause rapid stalling may necessitate a restart of the motors on the bus.

These open transition transfers would be attempted in the order they are presented, as shown in Figure 1‑9. The first possible transfer would be the fast transfer which would be made if the phase angle between the motor bus and the new source is met. If that transfer was not made, an in‑phase, residual or

fixed time transfer would be initiated. Obviously, the fast transfer offers the greatest chance of process continuity, as the interruption period to the motors is short. The in‑phase transfer provides one more opportunity to transfer with a good possibilty to keep process continuity. By the time a residual or fixed time transfer is initiated, the motors may have stopped against low inertia loads, such as positive displacement pumps or conveyors, and a process interruption may occur. In addition, if many motors must be started to restart the process, load shedding and staggered starting of the motors may have to be undertaken so as not to overload the capacity of the new source and cause unacceptable voltage sags during the restarting procedure.

References [1] ANSI C50.41‑2000, American Nation

Standard for Polyphase Induction Motors for Power generating Stations.

[2] A.P.GabbaandD.S.Hill,“MakeAutomaticPower Source Transfers a Success for Your Plants,” IEEE Transactions on Indus-try Applications, Vol. 37, No. 2, Mar/Apr 2001.

[3] W.G.Hartmann,“AutomaticSynchronizingforGenerationandTieLines,”18th Annual GeorgiaTechProtectiveMBTSingConfer‑ence,Atlanta,GA,May1999.

0

360

Pha

se (D

egre

es)

Time

180 Vol

tage

0 pu

1 puFast

In-Phase

Residual andFixed Time

Figure 1‑9 Order of Possible Open Transition Transfer MBTS


1–12


Operation – 2

2–1

2Operation

2.1 Front Panel Controls and Indicators ......................................... 2–1

2.2 Manual Operation ....................................................................... 2–6

2.3 Status Monitoring and Metering .............................................. 2–14

Screen BlankingThe display will automatically blank if there are noevents in the Transfer Event Log after exiting fromthe Main Menu, or from any screen after five (5)minutes of unattended operation. To wake up thedisplay, the user must press any key except EXIT.

If there are Transfer Events in the Transfer EventLog, they must be cleared (RESET pushbutton)before the screen will Auto Blank. See TransferEvent Log/Clear Status in Section 3.1, ISScomFunctional Description.

Arrow PushbuttonsThe left and right arrow pushbuttons are used tochoose among the displayed menu selections. Whenentering values, the left and right arrow pushbuttonsare used to select the digit (by moving the cursor) ofthe displayed setpoint that will be increased ordecreased by the use of the up and downpushbuttons.

The up and down arrow pushbuttons increase ordecrease input values or change between upper andlower case inputs. If the up or down pushbutton ispressed and held when adjusting numerical values,the speed of increment or decrement is increased.

EXIT PushbuttonThe EXIT pushbutton is used to exit from a displayedscreen and move up the menu tree. Any changedsetpoint in the displayed screen will not be saved ifthe selection is aborted using the EXIT pushbutton.

This chapter contains information that describes theoperation of the Motor Bus Transfer System (MBTS).M-4272 operation includes the following:

• Front Panel Controls and Indicators

• Initiate Transfer

• Remote/Local Control

• Auto Transfer Enable/Disable

• Manual Transfer Enable/Disable

• Status Monitoring/Metering

• Reset Error Codes

• Reset Alarm Counters

• Device On/Off

2.1 Front Panel Controls andIndicators

This section describes the operation of the M-4272as a function of the M-3931 Human Machine InterfaceModule (HMI) and the M-3972 Status module.

The MBTS can be interrogated locally with the HMIpanel. An integral part of the design is the layout andfunction of the front panel indicators and controls,illustrated in Figure 2-1.

Alphanumeric DisplayTo assist the operator in operating and interrogatingthe MBTS locally, the HMI displays menus whichguide the operator to the desired function or statusvalue. These menus consist of two lines. The bottomline lists lower case abbreviations of each menuselection with the chosen menu selection shown inuppercase. The top menu line provides a descriptionof the chosen menu selection.


2–2

ENTER PushbuttonThe ENTER pushbutton is used to choose ahighlighted menu selection, to replace a setting orother programmable value with the currently displayedvalue, or to move down within the menu tree.

System OK LEDThe Green SYSTEM OK LED is controlled by theunit's microprocessor. A flashing SYSTEM OK LEDindicates proper program cycling. The LED can alsobe programmed to be continuously illuminated toindicate proper program cycling.

Diagnostic/Time Sync LEDThe Green DIAG/TIME SYNC LED will illuminate toindicate that the IRIG-B time signal is received andthe internal clock is synchronized with the IRIG-Btime signal. IRIG-B time information is used toaccurately tag target and oscillograph events.

The LED will flash when a self-test error is detected.The LED will flash the Error Code number; forexample, for Error Code 32, the LED will flash 3times, followed by a short pause, and then flash 2times, followed by a long pause, then repeat LEDflash sequence. The Error Code number is alsodisplayed on the M-3931 HMI screen.

Breaker Status LEDsThe Red SOURCE 1 BRKR CLOSED, SOURCE 2BRKR CLOSED LEDs and the Green SOURCE 1BRKR OPEN, SOURCE 2 BRKR OPEN LEDs willilluminate when the selected breaker status input isclosed. Table 2-1 presents the available inputconfigurations for the Breaker Status LEDs.

SOURCE 1 BREAKER STATUS LEDs

S1 52a Closed(Input 1)

S1 52b Open(Input 2)

RED (CLOSED)

S1 52a and S1 52b(Inputs 1 and 2)

GREEN (OPEN)

S1 52a Open(Input 1)

S1 52b Closed(Input 2)


SOURCE 2 BREAKER STATUS LEDs

S2 52a Closed(Input 4)

S2 52b Open(Input 5)


GREEN (OPEN)

S2 52a Open(Input 4)

S2 52b Closed(Input 5)


RED (CLOSED)

Table 2-1 Breaker Status LED InputConfigurations

Power Supply #1 & #2 LEDThe Green PS LED indicator will remain illuminatedfor the appropriate power supply whenever power isapplied to the unit and the power supply is operatingcorrectly. The two power supplies are not redundantand the unit requires both supplies to operate forcorrect unit functioning.

M-3972 Status ModuleThe Status module includes 24 Status LEDs, and 8Output Status LEDs. The 24 Status LEDs arepreassigned to provide the status of specific functionsand features. The Status LEDs provide the followingindication:

• When a function is in a "Picked Up"(exceeded the setpoint value) condition,the assigned Status Indicator will illuminatewhen the "Status Reset" pushbutton isdepressed and held.

• When a function is in a "Picked Up"(exceeded the setpoint value) condition,and the Time Delay timer has timed outthe assigned Status Indicator will illuminateas well as any assigned Output LEDs.

• Transfer Conditions

When a condition exists that causes the operation ofOutputs 1 through 8, the assigned STATUS LED onthe M-3872 Status Module will illuminate. StatusModule LEDs will remain illuminated until the conditioncausing the trip is cleared, and the operator pressesthe "STATUS RESET" pushbutton.

Output and Input Status LEDsWhen a condition exists that causes the operation ofOutputs 9 through 16 or Inputs 7 through 18 theassigned Status LED on the M-4272 Front Panelwill illuminate. The Status LEDs will remainilluminated until the condition causing the operationis cleared, and the operator presses the "STATUSRESET" pushbutton.

Trip (TCM) and Close (CCM) Circuit MonitorStatus LEDsThe Trip and Close Circuit Monitor LEDs provide thestatus of the Trip and Close circuits. If a Trip orClose circuit is open (cannot perform either trip orclose function) the corresponding LED will beilluminated until the open circuit is corrected.

Operation – 2

2–3

Self Tests

LED Test

Model Number

CT Rating

Frequency Rating

Software Version

Serial Number

System Date and Time

User Logo

POWER ON SELFTESTSXXXXXXX

POWER ON SELFTESTSPASS

Beckwith Electric Co.M-4272

Beckwith Electric Co.D-0135V01.00.31 601b

Beckwith Electric Co.SERIAL NUMBER 137

Beckwith Electric Co.03-JAN-2006 15:24:32

Beckwith Electric Co.Substation Name

Beckwith Electric Co.CT RATING 5A

Beckwith Electric Co.FREQ RATING 60Hz

Power On Self-Testand Status Screens

Power-On Beckwith Electric Co.Substation Name

Default Message ScreensAUTO FAST TRANSFERPICKUP ELEMENTS

AUTO FAST TRANSFERA27 #1 AUTO PH UNDERVOLT

AUTO FAST TRANSFEROPERATE ELEMENTS

AUTO FAST TRANSFER02-NOV-2005 15:28:38:539

AUTO FAST TRANSFEROUTPUTS

AUTO FAST TRANSFER04 01

Transfer EventScreens

5-minuteaccesslockout

after3 tries

ENTER ACCESS CODE

Access Screens (optional)

ACCESS DENIED!

LEVEL 1 ACCESSGRANTED!

INIT TRANSFERINIT rmte_lcal

Main Menu Flow

INIT MANUAL TRANSFER?yes NO

auto_xfer man-xfer stat comm setup

Figure 2-2 Screen Message Menu Flow

Figure 2-1 M-4272 Horizontal Front Panel

!"#$#

%&'

%&

( )*&+

,! !#

#! !,

%#

%,

-

&%-(

,.,/,,$- - 0

-,1,/ ,2,#,3 ,"1

-%-%

,2,.,",#,,,30

,

*

*

- #

- ,

-%

,$

!

"

#

$


2–4

Figure 2-3 Main Menu Flow

DEVICE ON/OFFON_OFF exit

EXIT LOCAL MODEon_off EXIT

INIT TRANSFER INIT rmte_lcal

REMOTE/LOCAL CONTROL init RMTE_LCAL

AUTO TRANSFER AUTO_XFER man_xfer

MANUAL TRANSFER auto_xfer MAN_XFER

STATUS STAT comm setup

• Voltage Status• Current Status• Frequency Status• Phase Angle Status• In/Out Status• Alarm Counter• Time of Last Power up• Error Codes• Checksums

COMMUNICATION stat COMM setup

• Com1 Setup• Com2 Setup• Com3 Setup• Communication Address• Comm Access Code• Ethernet Setup• Ethernet IP Address

SETUP UNIT stat comm SETUP

• Software Version• Serial Number• Alter Access Codes• User Control Number• User Logo Line 1• User Logo Line 2• Clear Alarm Counter• Date & Time• Clear Error Codes• Eth Firmware Version• Diagnostic Mode

DIAGNOSITC MODE

• Output Test (Relay)• Input Test (Status)• Status Led Test• Module Led Test• Button Test• Display Test• Com1 Loopback Test• Com2 Loopback Test• Com3 Echo Test 2 Wire• Clock Test• Flash Sys Ok Led• Auto Calibration• Factory Use Only

Operation – 2

2–5

STATUS RESET PushbuttonPressing and holding the STATUS RESETpushbutton performs four functions:

• Resets all Status LEDs if the conditioncausing the condition is no longer present.

• Displays the present pickup status of allfunctions available on the status module.This is a valuable diagnostic tool whichmay be used during commissioning andtesting.

• Resets Latched Outputs

• Resets HMI display of last transfer

COM Port SecurityCOM1, COM2 and COM3 may be disabled for securitypurposes from the unit HMI. A Level 2 Access Codeis required.

Disabling COM Ports1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.

2. If Level Access is active, the following isdisplayed:

ENTER ACCESS CODE0

a. Input the required Access Code, thenpress ENTER.

b. If the proper Access Code has beenentered, the HMI will return:

LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)Access Granted!


c. Go to step 4.

3. If Level Access is not active, then thefollowing is displayed:


4. Press the Right arrow pushbutton untilthe following is displayed:

Communicationstat COMM setup

5. Press ENTER, the following will bedisplayed:

COM1 SETUPCOM1 com2 com3 com_adr

6. Press ENTER and the following isdisplayed:

PORT ACCESSenable DISABLE

7. Press the Left or Right Arrow pushbuttonas necessary to enable or disable theCOM port.

8. Press ENTER and the following isdisplayed:

COM1 BAUD RATEbaud_4800 BAUD_9600

9. Repeat Steps 5 through 8 as necessaryfor additional COM Ports.


2–6

2.2 Manual Operation

Overview of Manual Transfer Methodsand Transfer ModesA Manual transfer can be initiated utilizing either:

• The Human Machine Interface (HMI)

• Through Local Serial Connections

• A Control/Status Input

• Through remote serial communications

The Manual Transfer allows transfer operation ineither direction, from Source 1 to Source 2 or fromSource 2 to Source 1.

Manual Transfer provides Hot Parallel Transfer orFast Transfer, In-Phase Transfer and ResidualVoltage Transfer. The Manual Transfer is blockedwhen any lockout/blocking condition occurs. TheMBTS will not respond to any transfer command andwill not send the trip command while in the lockout/blocking condition.

Transfer ModesThere are two transfer modes, Sequential andSimultaneous, in the open transition transferoperation.

Sequential Transfer ModeWhen a transfer is initiated with Sequential Modeselected, the old source breaker is tripped within 10ms and closure of the new source breaker is attemptedonly upon confirmation by the breaker status contactthat the old source breaker has opened. Within 4 msof receipt of this confirmation, all three transfermethods, Fast, In-Phase and Residual VoltageTransfer are enabled to supervise closure of the newsource breaker. The Fixed Time Transfer is enabled30 cycles later. The new source breaker is thenclosed by the Fast Transfer Method if the phaseangle between the motor bus and the new source iswithin the delta phase angle limit immediately afterthe old source breaker opens.

If the phase angle between the motor bus and thenew source is not within the delta phase angle limit,the old source breaker is still tripped. When the fourmethods of transfer are enabled, the new sourcebreaker then closes either as a result of a subsequentmovement into the delta phase angle limit within theFast Transfer Time Window, a movement through apredicted zero phase coincidence within the In-PhaseTransfer Time Window, or by a drop in the motor busvoltage below the Residual Voltage Transfer limit, or

after the fixed time delay of the Fixed Time Transfer.Transfer is completed and the new source breaker isclosed by any of the previously listed methodswhose criteria is first satisfied.

Refer to Appendix F, Transfer Logic Time Sequencefor Timing Sequence of Transfer Logic in SequentialTransfer Mode.

Simultaneous Transfer ModeWhen a transfer is initiated with Simultaneous Modeselected, within 10 ms of transfer initiate, all threemethods of transfer, Fast, In-Phase and ResidualVoltage Transfer are immediately enabled tosupervise closure of the new source breaker withoutwaiting for the breaker status contact confirmationthat the old source breaker has opened. At the sameinstant, the commands for the old source breaker totrip and the new source breaker to close are sentsimultaneously if the phase angle between the motorbus and the new source is within the delta phaseangle limit for the Fast Transfer Method immediatelyupon transfer initiation. However only the Fixed TimeTransfer is enabled 30 cycles after the old sourcebreaker has opened.

If the phase angle between the motor bus and thenew source is not within the delta phase angle limit,the old source breaker is still tripped. Since the fourmethods of transfer are enabled, the new sourcebreaker then closes either as a result of a subsequentmovement into the delta phase angle limit within theFast Transfer Time Window, a movement through apredicted zero phase coincidence within the In-PhaseTransfer Time Window, or by a drop in the motor busvoltage below the Residual Voltage Transfer limit, orafter the fixed time delay of the Fixed Time Transfer.The new source breaker is closed by any of theabove methods whose criteria is first satisfied andthe transfer is completed.

Refer to Appendix F, Transfer Logic Time Sequence,for Timing Sequence of Transfer Logic, inSimultaneous Transfer Mode.

Transfer MethodsThe type of transfer that occurs when a ManualTransfer is initiated is determined by the ManualTransfer settings. Whenever the Hot Parallel Transferis enabled the Manual Fast, In-phase and ResidualVoltage Transfers are disabled. Only when the HotParallel Transfer is disabled can the Manual Fast,In-phase and Residual Voltage Transfers be enabled.

Operation – 2

2–7

Fast TransferThe conditions that are necessary to execute a FastTransfer are:

• No lockout/blocking conditions exist.

• The phase angle between the motor busand the new source is within the limitsetting.

• The delta voltage between the motor busand the new source is within the limitsetting. (If this setting is enabled)

• The delta frequency between the motorbus and the new source is within the limitsetting. (If this setting is enabled)

• The transfer must be completed within theFast Transfer time window of 1 to 10 cycles.

In-Phase TransferThe conditions that are necessary to execute anIn-Phase Transfer are:


• The conditions for Fast Transfer have notbeen met. (If this setting is enabled)


• The delta frequency between the motorbus and the new source is within the limitsetting.

• The phase angle between the motor busand the new source is changing and mustenter the first phase coincidence (first zerodegree crossing) within the In-PhaseTransfer time window (adjustable from 10to 600 cycles).

The In-Phase Transfer feature includestwo programmable advanced breakerclosing times for Source 1 and Source 2breakers to coordinate the closing at thefirst phase coincidence. Programmablebreaker closing time is from 0 to 12 cycles.

Residual Voltage TransferThe conditions that are necessary to execute aResidual Voltage Transfer are:


• The conditions for a Fast Transfer havenot been met. (If this setting is enabled)

• The conditions for In-Phase transfer havenot been met. (If this setting is enabled)

• The motor bus voltage decreases to lessthan the Residual Voltage Transfer limitsetting (adjustable from 5 to 60 V) withinthe incomplete transfer lockout time limitsetting (50 to 3000 cycles).

Hot Parallel TransferWhen the transfer operation is from Source 1 toSource 2, the close command to the Source 2circuit breaker is issued first. Then after receipt ofthe breaker status contact confirmation that theSource 2 circuit breaker has closed and the trippingcommand time delay (0 to 30 cycles), the tripcommand to the Source 1 breaker is issued.

When the transfer operation is from Source 2 toSource 1, the close command to the Source 1circuit breaker is issued first. Then after receipt ofthe breaker status contact confirmation that theSource 1 circuit breaker has closed and the trippingcommand time delay (0 to 30 cycles), the tripcommand to the Source 2 breaker is issued.

In hot parallel transfer, it is necessary to confirmthat the circuit breaker has been closed after a closecommand is issued to that circuit breaker. This willprevent the motor bus voltage from becoming deadif the circuit breaker fails to close and the otherbreaker is tripped. This failure of the breaker toclose could be caused by electrical or mechanicalproblems.

In hot parallel transfer, when the Source 1 BreakerFailure (S1BF or 50BF#1) and Source 2 BreakerFailure (S2BF or 50BF#2) functions are enabled, anauto-decoupling feature is activated to trip the breakerthat was closed by the transfer if the breakerrequested to open has not opened within thepredefined paralleling time.

The conditions that are necessary to execute a HotParallel Transfer are:


• The phase angle between the motor busand the new source is within the limitsetting.


• The delta frequency between the motorbus and the new source is within the limitsetting. (If this setting is enabled)

• The Hot Parallel Transfer must becompleted within the time window of 1 to50 cycles.


2–8

Initiate Manual Transfer (ISScom®)To initiate a Manual Transfer of the Motor Busutilizing ISScom perform the following:

NOTE: Communication must be established withthe target MBTS for this procedure.

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu barselect Monitor. ISScom will display theSecondary Metering and Status screen(Figure 3-17).

2. Verify that the MBTS is in Remote byobserving the Remote Mode/Local Modestatus indicator (System Status).

3. Verify that the Transfer Ready (SystemStatus) indicator is Green.

4. If the Transfer Ready (System Status)indicator is not Green, then clear thecondition(s) blocking the transfer.

5. From the ISScom Main Screen menuselect Initiate. ISScom will display theInitiate Manual Transfer Confirmationscreen (Figure 2-4).

Figure 2-4 Initiate Manual TransferConfirmation Screen

6. Select YES, ISScom will display theInitiate Manual Transfer Command Sentconfirmation screen (Figure 2-5).

Figure 2-5 Initiate Manual Transfer CommandSent Confirmation Screen

The MBTS will start the Manual Transferbased on the system parameters presentand MBTS settings.

7. If the Manual Transfer cannot becompleted the Incomplete TransferBlocked indicator will be illuminated(System Status).

The MBTS is blocked from issuingoperation commands.

8. If the MBTS completes the ManualTransfer successfully, then the followingwill be indicated in the System Statussection of the Secondary Metering andStatus screen:

• Transfer Completed• What type of transfer was completed• Close S1(S2) Breaker Command• Trip S2(S1) Breaker Command• S1(S2) Breaker Closed• S2(S1) Breaker Opened• Source 1(S2) (New Source)

9. Select the RESET button from theISScom comand bar or locally press andrelease the Status Reset pushbutton toreset the status indicators.

Initiate Manual Transfer (MBTS Front Panel)To initiate a Manual Transfer of the Motor Bus fromthe MBTS Front Panel perform the following:

1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.


ENTER ACCESS CODE0





c. Go to Step 4.



Operation – 2

2–9

MANUAL FAST TRANSFER04 01

MANUAL FAST TRANSFER--PICKUP ELEMENTS--

MANUAL FAST TRANSFER--OPERATE ELEMENTS--

12. Press and release the Status Resetpushbutton to reset the status indicators.

Remote/Local ControlThe Remote/Local selection feature provides controlof the MBTS from Local mode (COM1 or HMI) andremote mode (COM2, RS485, Ethernet or externalinput). Remote/Local feature is configured from Localmode (COM1 or HMI) only.

When Local mode is selected manually, initiatedtransfers or settings changes through the COM1 orHMI are allowed. Any Remote manually initiatedtransfers or settings changes of the MBTS is blocked.

When Remote mode is selected manually, initiated transfersor settings changes through the COM1, HMI, COM2,RS485, Ethernet or external input is allowed.

Remote/Local Control (ISScom)To switch Control Method utilizing ISScom® performthe following:


1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu barselect Remote/Local. ISScom will displaythe Remote/Local Mode dialog screen(Figure 2-6).

Figure 2-6 Remote/Local Mode Dialog Screen

2. Select the desired control mode, thenselect Save.

3. Verify that the MBTS is in the desiredmode by observing the Remote Mode/Local Mode status indicator on theSecondary Metering and Status screen(System Status).

4. Verify that the Transfer Ready (StatusModule) indicator is Green.

5. If the Transfer Ready (Status Module)indicator is not Green, then clear thecondition(s) blocking the transfer.

6. Verify the HMI display indicates thefollowing:



INIT MANUAL TRANSFER?yes NO

8. Press the Left arrow pushbutton once toselect YES.

9. Initiate a Manual transfer by pressingENTER. The following will be displayed:


10. If the Manual Transfer cannot becompleted, then INCOMP TRANSBLOCK will be illuminated on the StatusModule.

The MBTS is blocked from performinganother transfer until reset.

11. If the MBTS completes the ManualTransfer successfully, then the followingwill be indicated:

Status Module

• What type of transfer was completed• Close S1(S2) Breaker• Trip S2(S1) Breaker

Front Panel LEDs

• S2(S1) Breaker Closed LED• S1(S2) Breaker Opened LED

HMI will display (scroll) the followingscreens:

MANUAL FAST TRANSFER08-NOV-2005 10:11:49.948

MANUAL FAST TRANSFER--OUTPUTS--


2–10

Remote/Local Control (MBTS Front Panel)To switch Control Method from the MBTS FrontPanel perform the following:



ENTER ACCESS CODE0





c. Go to Step 4.




REMOTE/LOCAL CONTORLinit RMTE_LCAL


CONTROL METHODLOCAL remote

6. Press the Left or Right arrow pushbuttonas necessary to select the desiredControl Mode (upper case).

7. Press ENTER. The following will bedisplayed:

REMOTE/LOCAL CONTROLinit RMTE_LCAL

8. The MBTS is now in the selected ControlMethod. Press EXIT as necessary toreturn to the Main Menu.

Device ON/OFFThe Device ON/OFF feature allows the operator toplace the MBTS in a lockout condition. When"Device OFF" is selected, no auto or manualtransfers can be executed either through Localmode or Remote mode and all output relays aredeactivated. The "Device ON" selection returnsthe MBTS back to normal operation.

When selecting Device ON/OFF feature throughLocal mode (COM1 or HMI) the MBTS Local modemust be selected. Any Remote attempt is blocked.

When selecting Device ON/OFF feature throughRemote mode (COM2, RS485 or Ethernet), the MBTSRemote mode must be selected. Any Local attemptis blocked.

Upon saving the "Device OFF" selection, the Self-Testrelay contact terminals 55 & 56 close, the front panelSystem OK and Transfer Ready Status LED indicatorsextinguish. All output relays are deactivated.

Upon saving the "Device ON" selection, the Self-Test relay contact terminals 55 & 56 open, frontpanel System OK and Transfer Ready Status LEDindicators illuminate for normal operation. All outputrelays return to activated states.

Device ON/OFF (ISScom)To switch the MBTS ON or OFF utilizing ISScomperform the following:


1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu barselect Device ON/OFF. ISScom willdisplay the Device On/OFF dialog screen(Figure 2-7).

Figure 2-7 Device On/Off Dialog Box

2. Select either Device ON or Device OFF,then select Save.

3. Verify that the MBTS is in the desiredmode by observing the Device On/OffMode status indicator on the SecondaryMetering and Status screen (SystemStatus).

Operation – 2

2–11

Device ON/OFF (MBTS Front Panel)To switch the MBTS On or OFF from the FrontPanel perform the following:



ENTER ACCESS CODE0





c. Go to Step 4.






DEVICE MODEON off

6. Press the Left or Right arrow pushbuttonas necessary to select the desired DeviceMode (upper case).

7. Press ENTER. The following will bedisplayed:


8. The MBTS is now in the selected DeviceMode. Press EXIT as necessary to returnto the Main Menu.

System Error Codes and Output CountersThe System Error Codes and Output Counters featureprovides the user with the ability to view and clearsystem Error Codes, Processor Resets, AlarmCounters, Power Loss Counter and Output Counters.Also, Checksums can be viewed for Calibration andSetpoints.

Reset/View System Error Codes and OutputCounters (ISScom®)To view and/or Reset System Error Codes andOutput Counters utilizing ISScomTM perform thefollowing:


1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu barselect Tools/System Error Codes/Counters. ISScom will display theSystem Error Codes and Output Countersdialog screen (Figure 2-8).

2. Select the desired System Error Code,Processor Reset, Alarm Counter, PowerLoss Counter to be reset, then selectOK. ISScom will return to the Main Menu.


2–12

Clear Alarm Counters (MBTS Front Panel)To reset Alarm Counters from the Front Panel performthe following:



ENTER ACCESS CODE0





c. Go to Step 4.




SETUP UNITstat comm SETUP


SOFTWARE VERSIONVERS sn access number


CLEAR ALARM COUNTERlogo1 logo2 ALARM


CLEAR ALARM COUNTERPRESS ENTER KEY TO CLEAR


CLEAR ALARM COUNTER-ALARM COUNTER CLEARED-

9. Press EXIT as necessary to return to theMain Menu.

Figure 2-8 System Error Codes and Output Counters Dialog Screen

Operation – 2

2–13

Clear Error Codes (MBTS Front Panel)To clear Error Codes from the Front Panel performthe following:



ENTER ACCESS CODE0





c. Go to Step 4.




SETUP UNITstat comm SETUP




CLEAR ERROR CODEStime ERROR eth diag


CLEAR ERROR CODESPRESS ENTER KEY TO CLEAR


CLEAR ERROR CODES-ERROR CODES CLEARED-

All Error codes have been cleared.

9. Press EXIT as necessary to return to theMain Menu.

Switching The Active Setpoint ProfileThe Active Profile may be chosen manually or bycontact input. When the profile switching method isset to "Manual", ISScom® remote communicationsor one of the ISSLogic elements will select theactive profile. See Chapter 3, ISScom for additionalinformation.

To manually select the Active Setpoint Profileproceed as follows:

1. Open the M-3872 ISScomCommunications and Analysis software.

2. Establish communications with the targetM-4272.

3. Select System/Profile/Switching Methodand verify that the Switching ProfileMethod is selected to "Manual" (Figure2-9). Select OK.


2–14

Figure 2-9 Profile Method Dialog Screen

4. Select System/Profile/Active Profile.ISScom will display the "Select ActiveProfile" dialog screen (Figure 2-10).

Figure 2-10 Select Active ProfileDialog Screen

NOTE: During profile switching, relay operationis disabled for approximately 1 second.

CAUTION: Switching the active profile when theMBTS is on-line may cause unexpected operation ifthe wrong profile is selected.

5. Select the desired Profile, then selectOK. ISScom will return to the main screen

2.3 Status Monitoring andMetering

ISScom

System/Monitor/Primary MeteringThe Primary Metering screen (Figure 2-11) includesthe Source 1 and Source 2, Primary Voltage, PrimaryCurrent, Bus Primary Voltage, Bus Frequency,Positive and Negative Sequence.

System/Monitor/Secondary Metering and StatusThe Secondary Metering and Status screen (Figure2-12) includes the Source 1 and Source 2, SecondaryVoltage, Secondary Current and Bus Frequency.

The Secondary Metering section also displays BusNew Source information that includes Delta PhaseAngle, Delta Frequency, Delta Voltage and the NewSource identity (Source 1 or Source 2). The SecondaryMetering and Status screen also includes theindividual sections for Input/Output Status, FunctionStatus, Oscillograph Triggered Status, Transfer EventLog Stored Status, Sequence of Event Stored Statusand System Status information.

The Voltages portion of the metering screen displaysthe Phase Voltages for the three voltage inputs to theMBTS. It also displays the Bus Positive Sequence(V

PS) and Bus Negative Sequence (V

NS) when three

phase voltages are applied. When Single-phase isselected for S1, S2 and Bus the screen will displayvalues for the Single-phase. The currents portion ofthe metering screen displays the single phase currentsflowing through the Source 1 and Source 2 breakers.The current is used for the Breaker Failure (50BF)feature only. The displayed Frequency is the frequencyof the bus. The Bus-New Source portion displays thedifference in phase angle, frequency and voltage acrossthe open breaker between the Bus and the New Source.The Source that is presently defined as the NewSource is also displayed. The remainder of the screenpresents the Input/Output, Function, OscillographTrigger and System status.

Operation – 2

2–15

Path: System / Setup / Monitor / Primary Metering

Figure 2-11 Primary Metering Screen

CAUTION: Do not use the Delta Phase Angle OK,Delta Voltage OK or Delta Frequency OK statusindicators of the ISScom® software to determinewhen to manually initiate a transfer. There issufficient delay in the communications between theMBTS and the ISScom such that these indicationsdo not provide “live” information.

Always use the status indicators of the MBTS frontpanel. These indicators use the manual transfersettings to determine when a parameter is OK.

CAUTION: Do not use the Manual Initiate ofISScom when Delta Phase Angle and Delta Voltageare constantly changing. Use the Manual Initiate ofthe MBTS Front Panel.

The Function Status window displays the status ofvarious functions, with “T” representing the functionwhich has timed out, and “P” representing the functionwhich has picked up and is timing.

System/Monitor/Phasor Diagram and SyncScope CAUTION: Do not use the Delta Phase Angle,Delta Voltage, Delta Frequency or Sync Scope Pointerof the ISScom Sync Scope screen to determinewhen to manually initiate a transfer. There issufficient delay in the communications between theMBTS and the ISScom such that these indicationsdo not provide “live” information.

CAUTION: Do not use the Manual Initiate ofISScom when Delta Phase Angle and Delta Voltageare constantly changing. Use the Manual Initiate ofthe MBTS Front Panel.

The Phasor Diagram (Figure 3-18) provides selectedreference Phase Angle to Phase Angle data fromother sources. The Phasor Diagram also includes aFreeze capability to freeze the data displayed on thePhasor Diagram.

The Sync Scope screen (Figure 3-19) provides theDelta Frequency relationship between the Bus andthe New Source, illustrated in a Fast or Slow directionbased on Delta Frequency.


2–16

Path: System / Setup / Monitor / Secondary Metering and Status

Figure 2-12 Secondary Metering and Status Screen

Operation – 2

2–17

MBTS Front Panel

Monitor Status/MeteringThe HMI menu categories for monitored values are:

• Voltage Status — S1, S2 and Bus phasevoltages, Bus positive sequence voltage,Bus negative sequence voltage, deltavoltage (referenced to new source)

• Current Status — S1 and S2 phasecurrents (A–B–C/a-b-c)

• Frequency Status — Bus Frequency,Delta Frequency and Rate of Change ofFrequency (referenced to new source)

• Phase Angle Status

• I/O Status — Status of input and outputcontacts

• Alarm Counter

• Time of Last Power up

• Error Codes

• Checksums — setpoints, calibration, ROM

To access the STATUS menu and begin monitoring,proceed as follows:

1. Press the ENTER, the following will bedisplayed:



STATUSSTAT comm setup

3. Press the ENTER, the following will bedisplayed:

VOLTAGE STATUSVOLT curr freq phang

4. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbuttonuntil the desired parameter is selected(upper case), then press ENTER. TheMBTS will display the selected parameter.

5. Press the ENTER pushbutton to movedown within the STATUS menu to thedesired category. To exit a specificcategory and continue to the next menucategory, press the EXIT pushbutton.

Transfer Event LogThe initiating event that starts the Transfer EventLog is the “Start” signal for any transfer. A TransferEvent Log is considered complete when one offollowing occurs:

• When the breaker from the Old Sourcetrips and the breaker to the New Sourcecloses.

• When a breaker failure occurs.

• When the incomplete transfer timer times out.

The trigger and complete events are used to definethe time frame during which the transfer event log isstoring information. One transfer can have up to 4records. After 16 records have been stored, any newrecord will cause the oldest existing record to belost. Each Transfer Event Log parameter is timestamped with the date and time in 1 ms increments.

A reset feature is provided to clear this log throughthe serial communications. See Chapter 3, ISScom®,subsection System/Transfer Event Log for TransferEvent Log Download, View, Clear Status and ClearHistory selections.

Sequence of Events RecorderThe Sequence of Events Recorder stores every changein the input status, trip commands, close commands,any signal to initiate a transfer, type of transfer, changein any breaker status, and status reset.

Each of these Running Events are time stamped withthe date and time in 1 ms increments. The RunningEvent Log stores the last 512 events, when a newevent occurs the oldest event is removed.

A reset feature is provided to clear this log throughthe serial communications. See Chapter 3, ISScom,subsection System/Sequence of Events forSequence of Events Recorder Download, View andClear selections.

OscillographThe Oscillographic Recorder provides comprehensivedata recording of all monitored waveforms, and statusinputs storing up to 248 cycles of data.

The Oscillographic Recorder is triggered by adesignated control/status input (usually a MBTSinitiate input), an automatically initiated signal, a tripoutput, a manual transfer signal or from serialcommunications. The Oscillograph Recorder settingsare not considered to be part of the Setpoint Profile.Recorder settings are common to all profiles.

See Chapter 3, ISScom®, subsection System/Oscillograph for Oscillograph Recorder Retrieve,Trigger and Clear selections.


2–18


3–1

ISScom – 3

3 ISScom®

3.1 ISScom Functional Description ............................................... 3–1

3.2 ISSplotTM ................................................................................ 3–34

This chapter is designed for the person or group responsible for the operation and setup of the MBTS. The M‑3872 ISScom Communications and Oscillographic Analysis Software is required to successfully communicate system settings and operational commands to the MBTS as well as access the extensive monitoring and status reporting features. Figure 3‑2, represents the ISScom Main Screen menu structure. This chapter provides a general description of each ISScom menu selection and command in the same order as they are displayed in the software program. Those ISScom features and functions that are covered in other sections of this Instruction Book will be noted and referenced.

3.1 ISScom Functional Description

The ISScom installation and establishing initial local communications are covered in Section 5.5, ISScom Communications and Oscillographic Analysis Software Installation, and Section 5.6, Activating Initial Local Communications.

Selecting the ISScom Program from the Becoware Folder or selecting the ISScom Program Icon (Figure 3‑1) from the Desktop will open the program and display the ISScom Main Screen (Figure 3‑5).

Figure 3-1 ISScom Program Icon

Shortcut Command ButtonsWhen the ISScom software opens, there are also 8 shortcut command buttons for the most common operations performed by ISScom. The three buttons, Monitor, Setup System and System Setpoints are also found under the System drop down menu.

Initiate and Reset ButtonsThe Initiate and Reset buttons are used to control the MBTS. The Initiate button is used to initiate a Manual Transfer and the Reset Button Resets the Output Status of Latched Outputs, Timed Out Function Statuses that are Latched, the System Status and Latched Lockout indicators (if the condition is no longer present).

Remote/Local ButtonThe Remote/Local button opens a dialog screen (Figure 3‑3), that provides a selection between Remote and Local control of the MBTS. If Local is selected only locally initiated transfers will be performed, then Remote Control (manual initiate transfer) of the MBTS is blocked. Local mode also blocks remote setpoint changes. Remote Control is defined as those manual transfers that initiate through any serial port (except for the RS‑232 port on the front panel) and any externally connected manual initiate command through inputs; blocking inputs are still allowed.

Figure 3-3 Remote/Local Mode Dialog Screen


3–2

Figure 3-2 ISScom® Main Menu Structure

3–3

ISScom – 3

Figure 3-5 ISScom® Main Screen

Local is defined as originating from the HMI of the MBTS or the RS‑232 port COM1 on the front panel. This setting prevents a transfer from being initiated remotely when personnel are on‑site “Locally” operating the MBTS. Remote communications is still possible and all the status information can still be read, only manual transfer initiate control and settings changes are blocked. When in Local control the state of this selection cannot be changed remotely, this means someone cannot remotely change back to Remote Control. However, the Remote/Local selection can always be changed locally, personnel on‑site have priority. If Remote Control is selected, then manual transfers can be initiated either remotely or locally. This applies to manually initiated transfers. The Automatic Transfer can still be initiated by internal undervoltage initiate, ISSlogic®, 86P‑S1 Initiate, 86P‑S2 Initiate, 27‑S1 or 27‑S2 initiates. The Automatic Transfer operates independently from Remote/Local control.

Device ON/OFFThe Device ON/OFF button opens a dialog screen (Figure 3‑4), that provides a selection between “Device ON” and “Device OFF”. If “Device OFF” is selected, then the MBTS is placed in a lockout condition and no transfers can be executed either remotely, locally, automatically or manually. Monitoring of all status conditions with ISScom is still possible, either locally (HMI or COM1) or remotely in “Device OFF” state. The “Device ON” selection allows normal operation.

Figure 3-4 Device On/Off Dialog Box


3–4

File/Save and Save As CommandThe Save and Save As... commands allow saving a file or renaming a file, respectively.

File/Open CommandThe open command allows opening a previously created data file. With an opened data file, use the System... Setup... menu items to access the setpoint windows.

If communication can be established with a MBTS, it is always preferred to use the Read Data From System command in the System menu to update the PC’s data file with the MBTS data. This file now contains the proper system type information, eliminating the need to set the information manually.

File/Print and Print Setup CommandThe Print and Printer Setup commands allow user to select printer options and print out setpoint data from the open data file or directly from the MBTS, if an MBTS is communicating with the PC.

File/Exit CommandThe Exit command quits the ISScom program.

Comm MenuThe Communication dialog screens allow selection of the ISScom communication parameters to coordinate with the MBTS. Selecting “Serial COM Port” displays the PC Comm Port Settings section (Figure 3‑7). Selecting “TCP/IP” displays the PC TCP/IP Settings section (Figure 3‑8) for Ethernet communication. Selecting “Modem” displays an expanded Communication Dialog screen (Figure 3‑9), to establish contact with remote locations. The expanded Communication Dialog screen also includes a “Bring up terminal window after dialing” option. When selected ISScom will open a terminal window to allow modem commands to be sent to the target modem. When communicating by way of a fiber optic loop network, echo cancelling is available by checking the Echo Cancel box. This command masks the sender’s returned echo.

If the modem was not used to establish communication (direct connection), select Open COM to start. If the MBTS has a default communication access code of 9999, a message window will be displayed showing Access Level #3 was granted. Otherwise, another dialog screen will be displayed to prompt the user to enter the access code in order to establish communication. Close COM discontinues communication.

File Menu

The File menu enables the user to create a new data file, open a previously created data file, close, save, save as, print preview, print and printer setup. The ISScom® program can also be exited through the File menu.

File/New CommandWhen not connected to the MBTS, using the New command, a new file is established with the New System dialog screen (Figure 3‑6). Selecting Save allows the new data file to be named by using the Save or Save As... commands.

NOTE: By choosing the NEW command, unit and setpoint configuration values are based on factory settings specified for the pro‑filed MBTS.

Path: File menu / New command

Figure 3-6 New System Dialog Screen

COMMAND BUTTONS

SAVE Saves the currently displayed information.

Cancel Returns to the ISScom main screen; any changes to the displayed information are lost.

3–5

ISScom – 3

Figure 3-9 ISScom Modem Expanded Communication Dialog Screen

Figure 3-8 ISScom TCP/IP Ethernet Communication Dialog Screen

Figure 3-7 ISScom® Serial Communication Dialog Screen


3–6

System Menu

The System menu provides access to the screens used to set, monitor, or interrogate the MBTS. Six submenus are provided: Setup, Monitor, Transfer Event Log , Sequence of Event Recorder, Oscillograph and Profile as well as two commands, Write File to System, and Read Data From System.

System/SetupThe Setup submenu includes the Setup System, Setpoints, and Set Date/Time selections.

System/Setup/Setup SystemThe Setup System selection displays the Setup System dialog screen (Figure 3‑10) allowing the user to input the pertinent information regarding the system on which the MBTS is applied (see Section 4.2, System Setup, for detailed information regarding the specific elements of the Setup System dialog screen).

NOTE: Checking the inputs for the Active Input Open parameter designates the “oper‑ated” state established by an opening rather than a closing external contact.

COMMAND BUTTONS

Save When connected to a MBTS, sends the currently displayed information to the unit. Otherwise, saves the currently displayed information to file and returns to the ISS‑com Main screen.

Cancel Returns to the ISScom® Main screen; any changes to the displayed information are lost.

Figure 3-10 Setup System Dialog Screen

3–7

ISScom – 3

DISPLAY ALL JUMP COMMAND BUTTONS

This screen includes Jump Command Buttons, that take the user to the corresponding MBTS dialog screen or Setup System dialog screen. Exiting any of these dialog screens will return the user to the All Setpoints Table dialog screen.

System/Setup/Setpoints/ConfigureSelecting the Configure button displays the Configure dialog screen (Figure 3‑14), which contains a chart of programmed input and output contacts, in order to allow scrolling through all MBTS output and blocking input configurations.

Both dialog screens (All Setpoint Table and Configure), feature Jump Command Buttons which allow the user to jump from a scrolling dialog screen to an individual MBTS function dialog screen and return to the scrolling dialog screen. All available parameters can be reviewed or changed when jumping to a MBTS configuration dialog screen from either scrolling dialog screen.

CONFIGURE JUMP COMMAND BUTTONS

This screen includes Jump Command Buttons, that take the user to the corresponding MBTS dialog screen or Setup System dialog screen. Exiting any of these dialog screens will return the user to the Configure dialog screen.

System/Setup/SetpointsThe Setpoints menu selection displays the M‑4272 System Setpoints dialog screen (Figure 3‑11) from which the individual Transfer Setting and Function Setting dialog screens can be accessed. Selecting a Transfer Setting or Function Setting button will display the corresponding function dialog screen (See Figure 3‑12 as an example).

COMMAND BUTTONS

Display All Opens the All Setpoints Table dialog screen for the specified range of functions.

Configure Opens the Configure dialog screen.

Exit Exits the screen and returns to the ISScom® main screen.

COMMAND BUTTONS

Save When connected to a MBTS, sends the currently displayed information to the unit. Otherwise, saves the currently displayed information and returns to the System Setpoints screen or All Setpoints Table.

Cancel Returns to the System Setpoints screen or All Setpoints Table; any changes to the displayed information are lost.

FEATURE AND FUNCTION SELECTION BUTTONS

The individual Feature and Function selection buttons are described in the applicable sections.

System/Setup/Setpoints/Display AllSelecting the Display All button displays the All Setpoints Table dialog screen (Figure 3‑13). This dialog screen contains the settings for each MBTS function within a single window to allow scrolling through all MBTS setpoint and configuration values.

Both dialog screens (All Setpoint Table and Configure), feature Jump Command Buttons which allow the user to jump from a scrolling dialog screen to an individual MBTS function dialog screen and return to the scrolling dialog screen. All available parameters can be reviewed or changed when jumping to an MBTS configuration dialog screen from either scrolling dialog screen.


3–8

Figure 3-11 MBTS Setpoints Dialog Screen

Path: System / Setup / system Setpoints / ATS command button OR ATS jump hotspot within All Setpoints Table

Figure 3-12 Typical Setpoint Dialog Screen

3–9

ISScom – 3

Path: System menu / Setup submenu / Setpoints screen/ Display All button

Figure 3-13 All Setpoints Table Dialog Screen (Partial)


3–10

Path: System / Setup submenu / Setpoints screen / Configure button

Figure 3-14 Configure Dialog Screen (Partial)

3–11

ISScom – 3

Set Date/Time CommandThe Set Date/Time command (Figure 3-15) allows the system date and time to be set manually by entering the desired time and date or set to the displayed PC time. The system clock can also be stopped or restarted. This dialog screen also displays an LED mimic to identify when the Time Sync is in use (preventing date/time from being changed by user).

The time field in the dialog box is not updated continuously. The time at which the dialog box was opened is the time that is displayed and remains as such. This is true whether the MBTS is synchronized with the IRIGB signal or not.

There is a green Time Sync LED mimic in this dialog box (the LED is displayed as different shading on a monochrome monitor). When this LED is green, the MBTS is synchronized with the IRIG-B signal and the Time field is grayed out, indicating that this field can’t be changed. But the Date field can be changed (by editing and selecting Save).

When the LED is not blue, the MBTS is not time-synchronized and therefore, both the Date and Time fields can be changed.

Path: System/ Setup / Set Date/Time

Figure 3-15 Date/Time Dialog Screen

SET DATE AND TIME COMMAND BUTTONS

Relay Time When selected displays the current date and time at the instant that “Relay Time” is selected.

PC Time When selected initiates the writing of the PC time and date to the relay.

Start/Stop This toggles between start/stop, theReal Time MBTS clock. ‘Stop’ pauses, ‘Start’ resumes. Clock

Save Saves Time and Date settings to the MBTS when applicable.

Cancel Returns to the ISScom main window. Any changes to the displayed information is lost.

System/MonitorThe Monitor submenu provides the user with access to the present status of the MBTS measured and calculated values, other real-time parameters and conditions. The Monitor submenu provides four commands:

• PrimaryMetering

• Secondary Metering/Function/SystemStatus

• Phasor Diagram

• SyncScope

NOTE: Displayed parameters in monitor/status screens will vary depending on unit configuration.


3–12

Path: System / Monitor / Primary Metering

Figure 3-16 Primary Metering Screen

System/Monitor/Primary MeteringThe Primary Metering screen (Figure 3‑16) allows the user to review the Source 1 and Source 2, Primary Voltage, Primary Current, Bus Primary Voltage, Bus Frequency, Positive and Negative Sequence.

System/Monitor/Secondary Metering and StatusThe Secondary Metering and Status screen (Figure 3‑17) allows the user to review the Source 1 and Source 2, Secondary Voltage, Secondary Current Bus Frequency and Bus Voltage.

The Secondary Metering section also displays Bus‑New Source information that includes Delta Phase Angle, Delta Frequency, Delta Voltage and the New Source identity (Source 1 or Source 2). The Secondary Metering and Status screen also includes the individual sections for Input/Output Status, Function Status, Oscillograph Trigger Status and System Status information.

The Voltages portion of the metering screen displays the Phase Voltages for the three voltage inputs to the MBTS. It also displays the Bus Positive Sequence (VPS) and Bus Negative Sequence (VNS) when three phase voltages are applied. S1V, S2V, and Bus V for the selected single phase will be displayed. The currents portion of the Secondary Metering and Status screen displays the single phase currents flowing through the Source 1 and Source 2 breakers. The current is used for the Breaker Failure (50BF) feature only. The displayed Frequency is the frequency of the bus. The Bus‑New Source portion displays the difference in phase angle, frequency and voltage across the open breaker between the Bus and the New Source. The Source that is presently defined as the New Source is also displayed. The remainder of the screen presents the Input/Output, Function, Oscillograph Trigger and System status.

3–13

ISScom – 3

Path: System / Monitor / Secondary Metering and Status

Figure 3-17 Secondary Metering and Status Screen

CAUTION: Do not use the Delta Phase Angle OK, Delta Voltage OK or Delta Frequency OK status indicators of the ISScom® software to determine when to manually initiate a transfer. There is sufficient delay in the communications between the MBTS and the ISScom such that these indications do not provide “live” information. Always use the status indicators of the MBTS front panel. These indicators use the manual transfer settings to determine when a parameter is OK. If manual transfer is disabled a warning message “Manual Transfer Blocked” will be displayed and no transfer will occur.

The Function Status window displays the status of various functions, with “T” representing the function which has timed out, and “P” representing the function which has picked up and is timing.


3–14

System/Monitor/Phasor DiagramThe Phasor Diagram (Figure 3‑18) provides the user with the ability to evaluate a source reference Phase Angle to Phase Angle data from other sources. The Phasor Diagram also includes a menu that is accessed by executing a right mouse click which allows the user to select/deselect sources to be displayed and Freeze capability to freeze the data displayed on the Phasor Diagram.

System/Monitor/Sync ScopeThe Sync Scope screen (Figure 3‑19) provides the user with the ability to observe the Delta Frequency relationship between the Bus and the New Source, illustrated in a Fast or Slow direction based on Delta Frequency.

CAUTION: Do not use the Delta Phase Angle, Delta Voltage, Delta Frequency or Sync Scope Pointer of the ISScom® Sync Scope screen to determine when to manually initiate a transfer. There is sufficient delay in the communications between the MBTS and the ISScom such that these indications do not provide “live” information.

System/Monitor/Single Line DiagramThe Single Line Diagram screen (Figure 3‑20) is a mimic display that allows the user to observe the Source 1 (S1) and Source 2 (S2)’s Secondary Voltage, Current and Bus Secondary Voltage. All of these metering values can be selected to be primary or secondary values.

The screen displays the Phase Voltages for the three voltage inputs to the M‑4272 MBT System. The voltages of S1, S2 and Bus for the selected single phase will be displayed. The screen displays the single phase currents flowing through the Source 1 and Source 2 breakers. The current is used for the Breaker Failure (50BF) feature only. If the S1/S2 CT Configuration is set to “No” (S1 & S2 CT not connected to the rear terminals) (Figure 4‑22), then the Single Line Diagram will not display current values.

The Single Line Diagram screen also displays Delta Phase Angle, Delta Frequency and Delta Voltage between the motor bus and the new source (the new source is defined as the source to which the bus is being transferred).

In addition the screen displays the status of Source 1 and Source 2 breakers. The CB‑S1 and CB‑S2 indicators display RED color when the Source 1 breaker (CB‑S1) or Source 2 breaker is in the closed position. The CB‑S1 and CB‑S2 indicators display GREEN color when the Source 1 breaker (CB‑S1) or Source 2 breaker (CB‑S2) is in the open position.

In the M‑4272 MBT System portion of the screen the 52‑S1 In‑Service and 52‑S2 In‑Service indicators display GREEN color when the Source 1 or Source 2 breakers are in the service position; the 52‑S1 In‑Service and 52‑S2 In‑Service indicators will not be illuminated when the Source 1 or Source 2 breakers are not in service or in test position.

The M‑4272 MBT System portion of the screen also displays the Manual Transfer Ready status, Lockout/Blocking status, the Remote/Local control status and the Device ON/Device OFF status.

The Manual Transfer Ready indicator displays GREEN color when the Manual Fast Transfer Ready or Manual Hot Parallel Transfer Ready condition is met.

The Manual Transfer Ready indicator is not illuminated when the Manual Fast Transfer Ready or Manual Hot Parallel Transfer Ready condition is not met.

The Lockout/Blocking indicator displays RED color when the Lockout/Blocking condition occurs. The Lockout/Blocking indicator is not illuminated when no Lockout/Blocking condition occurs.

The Remote indicator displays GREEN color and Local indicator is not illuminated when the Remote/Local control is selected to the Remote position.

The Remote indicator is not illuminated and Local indicator displays GREEN color when the Remote/Local control is selected to Local position.

The Device ON indicator displays GREEN color and Device OFF indicator is not illuminated when the Device On/Off control is selected to Device On position.

The Device ON indicator is not illuminated and Device OFF indicator displays RED color when the Device On/Off control is selected to Device Off position.

3–15

ISScom – 3

Path: System / Monitor / Phasor Diagram

Figure 3-18 Phasor Diagram

Path: System / Monitor / Sync Scope

Figure 3-19 Sync Scope Screen


3–16

NOTES:

1. If the S1/S2 CT Configuration is set to “No” (S1 & S2 not connected to the rear terminals) (Figure 4‑22), then the Single Line Diagram will not display current values.

2. The user may select either the primary or secondary values on the Single Line Diagram.

Path: System / Monitor / Single Line Diagram

Figure 3-20 Single Line Diagram (Primary Metering) or (Secondary Metering) Screen

3–17

ISScom – 3

System/Transfer Event LogThe Transfer Event Log feature captures the following parameters:

• Startsignal.Thesignalsthattriggeratrans‑fer are an external protective relay initiate, external undervoltage relay initiate, internal automatic bus undervoltage relay initiate, and manual initiate (either local, remote or through serial communications).

• Source1voltageandcurrentattimeoftrip(or close)

• Source 2 voltage and current at time ofclose (or trip)

• Busvoltageattimeofclose(ortrip)

• DeltaVoltagebetweenbusandnewsourceat time of close command (or trip com‑mand)

• DeltaVoltagebetweenbusandnewsourceat the time of actual breaker close (or breaker open)

• Busfrequency,attimeofclose(ortrip)

• Busrateofchangeoffrequencyattimeofclose (or trip)

• Resultant Volts/Hertz at time of actualbreaker close

• Element(s)TimedOut,forexample:27B,81, 81R, 50BF, TCM and CCM Functions

• Element(s) pickedup, for example: 27B,81, 81R, 50BF, TCM and CCM Functions

• Input/outputcontactstatuschanges

• Tripandclosecommands

• Deltaphaseanglebetweenbusandnewsource at time of close command (or trip command)

• Deltaphaseanglebetweenbusandnewsource at time of actual breaker close (or breaker open)

• Delta frequency between bus and newsource at time of close command (or trip command)

• Delta frequency between bus and newsource at time of actual breaker close (or breaker open)

• Breakerclosingtime(thetimeperiodfromwhen the close command is issued to when the new source’s breaker status contact closes

• BreakerOpeningTime

• Opentransitiontime(thetimeperiodfromwhen the old source breaker status contact opens to when the new source breaker status contact closes)

• ClosetransitiontimeinHotParallelTransferonly (the time period from when the new source breaker status contact closes to when the old source breaker status contact opens)

• Transfer completed: Fast, In-Phase, Re‑sidual Voltage, Fixed Time or Hot Parallel

A transfer can have up to four records. After 16 records have been stored, any new record will cause the oldest existing record to be lost. Each Transfer Event Log parameter is time stamped with the date and time in 1 ms increments.

The initiating event that starts the Transfer Event Log is the “Start” signal for any transfer. A Transfer Event Log is considered complete when one of following occurs:

• WhenthebreakerfromtheOldSourcetripsand the breaker to the New Source closes.

• Whenabreakerfailureoccurs.

• Whentheincompletetransfertimertimesout.

The trigger and complete events are used to define the time frame during which the transfer event log is storing information. The Secondary Metering and Status Screen (Figure 3‑17) will display a status when a complete Transfer Event Log has been stored. A reset feature is provided to clear this log through the serial communications. The Transfer Event Log is available for viewing utilizing the M‑3872 ISScom® Communications and Oscillograph Analysis Software.

The Transfer Event Log menu selection opens a submenu that includes the Download, View, Clear Status and Clear History selections.


3–18

2. Select Open. ISScom will display the Open screen with a default “.log” file extension.

3. Select the location of the “.log” files, then select the file to be viewed.

System/Transfer Event Log/DownloadTo download available Transfer Event Logs perform the following:

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select System/Transfer Event Log/Download. ISScom® will display the Transfer Event Log Record Download screen (Figure 3‑21) and indicate the number of Transfer Events available for download.

2. Select Download. The Transfer Event Log Record Download screen will display a bar indicating the status of the download. When the download is complete the Save As screen will be displayed with a default “.log” file extension.

3. Select the destination folder and name the file, then select Save to save the Transfer Event Log Record or Cancel.

System/Transfer Event Log/ViewTo view available Transfer Event Log Records perform the following:

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select System/Transfer Event Log/View. ISScom will display the Transfer Event Log Viewer screen (Figure 3‑22).

Figure 3-21 Transfer Event Log Record Download Screen

Figure 3-22 Transfer Event Log Viewer

4. Select Open. ISScom will Open the target file in the Transfer Event Log Viewer Summary screen (Figure 3‑23).

5. Select Details. ISScom will expand the Transfer Event Log Viewer screen to include the Details section (Figure 3‑24) which includes additional Transfer Event information.

6. To print the Transfer Event Log Summary information select Print Summary. ISScom will print the Summary information to the default printer connected to the computer. See Appendix D, Transfer Event Log Printout Sample.

7. To print the Transfer Event Log Detail information select Print Detail. ISScom will print both the Summary and Detail information to the default printer connected to the computer. See Appendix D, Transfer Event Log Printout Sample.

8. To view the System Status and Transfer Start Signal information select System Status and Transfer Start Signal. ISScom will display the System Status and Transfer Start Signal Status screen (Figure 3‑25).

3–19

ISScom – 3

Figure 3-24 Transfer Event Log File Summary and Details Screen

Figure 3-23 Transfer Event Log File Summary Screen


3–20

Figure 3-25 System Status and Transfer Start Signal Status Screen

3–21

ISScom – 3

9. To view the Transfer Event Log Pickup Input and Output information, select Pickup I/Os. ISScom® will display the Pickup I/Os Status screen (Figure 3‑26).

Figure 3-26 Transfer Event Log Pickup I/Os Status Screen

System/Transfer Event Log/Clear StatusThe Clear Status feature resets the Transfer Event Log status.

To Clear the Transfer Event Log Status perform the following:

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select System/Transfer Event Log/Clear Status. ISScom will display the Clear Transfer Event Log Status confirmation screen (Figure 3‑27).

Figure 3-27 Clear Transfer Event Log Status Command Confirmation Screen

2. Select YES, ISScom will respond with the Clear Transfer Event Log Status Cleared confirmation Screen (Figure 3‑28).

Figure 3-28 Transfer Event Log Status Cleared Confirmation Screen

3. Select OK, ISScom will return to the ISScom Main Screen (Figure 3‑5).

System/Transfer Event Log/Clear HistoryThe Clear History feature clears all Transfer Event Logs stored on the MBTS.

To Clear the Transfer Event Log perform the following:

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select System/Transfer Event Log/Clear History. ISScom will display the Clear Sequence of Events Records confirmation screen (Figure 3‑29).

Figure 3-29 Transfer Event Log Clear History Command Confirmation Screen

2. Select YES, ISScom will respond with the Transfer Event Log Clear History confirmation Screen (Figure 3‑30).

Figure 3-30 Transfer Event Log History Cleared Confirmation Screen



3–22

System/Sequence of Events RecorderThe Sequence of Events Recorder stores every change in the input status, trip commands, close commands, any signal to initiate a transfer, type of transfer, change in any breaker status, and status reset. Each of these Running Events are time stamped with the date and time in 1 ms increments. The Running Event Log stores the last 512 events, when a new event occurs the oldest event is removed. The Secondary Metering and Status Screen (Figure 3‑17) will display a status when a Sequence of Events recorded event has been stored. A reset feature is provided to clear this log through the serial communications. The events and the associated data are available for viewing utilizing the M‑3872 ISScom® Communications and Oscillographic Analysis Software.

The Sequence of Events Recorder submenu allows the user to Setup the events that trigger the Sequence of Events Recorder, Download events from the MBTS, View the parameters captured at the time of the event and Clear the event recorder.

System/Sequence of EventsRecorder/SetupThe Setup menu item displays the Sequence of Events Setup screen (Figure 3‑31). See Section 4.1, Unit Setup for detailed setup instructions.

Protective function Pickup, Time Out, Dropout and/or Output/Input Pickup or Dropout are selected to trigger the Sequence of Events Recorder. Selecting Save transmits the Sequence of Event settings to the MBTS. When not connected to the MBTS the Send selection saves the Sequence of Event settings to the open file.

Path: System / Sequence of Events Recorder / Setup

Figure 3-31 Sequence Of Events Setup

3–23

ISScom – 3

System/Sequence of Events Recorder/DownloadThe Download selection downloads the events from the currently connected MBTS (events must be retrieved from the MBTS and stored in a file in order to view them).

To download available Sequence of Events perform the following:

1. From the ISScom® Main Screen menu select System/Sequence of Events Recorder/Download. ISScom will display the Sequence of Events Recorder Download screen (Figure 3‑32) and indicate the number of Sequence of Events Recorder Events available for download.

Figure 3-32 Sequence of Events Recorder Download Screen

2. Select Download, The Sequence of Events Recorder Download screen will display a bar indicating the status of the download. When the download is complete the Save As screen will be displayed with a default “.evt” file extension.

3. Select the destination folder and name the file, then select Save to save the Sequence of Events Record or Cancel.

System/Sequence of Events Recorder/ViewThe Sequence of Events viewer screen includes the commands Open, Close, Print Summary, and Print Detail. Open opens a saved sequence of events file. Close closes the print file. Print Summary prints an event summary, and Print Detail prints the detailed event report. Clear deletes event history from the control.

To view available Sequence of Events Records perform the following:

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select System/Sequence of Events/View. ISScom will display the Sequence of Events Viewer screen (Figure 3‑33).

Figure 3-33 Sequence of Events Viewer

2. Select Open. ISScom will display the Open screen with a default “.evt” file extension.

3. Select the location of the “.evt” files, then select the file to be viewed.

4. Select Open. ISScom will Open the target file in the Sequence of Events Viewer Summary screen (Figure 3‑34).

Figure 3-34 Sequence of Events Summary Screen


3–24

5. Select Details. ISScom® will expand the Sequence of Events Viewer screen to include the Details section (Figure 3‑35) which includes additional Sequence of Events information.

6. To print the Sequence of Events Summary information select Print Summary. ISScom will print the Summary information to the default printer connected to the computer. See Appendix E, Sequence of Events Printout Sample.

7. To print the Sequence of Events Detail information select Print Detail. ISScom will print both the Summary and Detail information to the default printer connected to the computer. See Appendix E, Sequence of Events Printout Sample.

8. To view the Sequence of Events Pickup Input and Output information select Pickup I/Os. ISScom will display the Pickup I/Os Status screen (Figure 3‑36).

Figure 3-36 Sequence of Events Pickup I/Os Status Screen

Figure 3-35 Sequence of Events File Summary and Details Screen

3–25

ISScom – 3

2. Select YES, ISScom will respond with the Sequence of Events Records Cleared confirmation Screen (Figure 3‑40).

Figure 3-40 Sequence of Events Record Cleared Confirmation Screen


System/OscillographThe oscillographic recorder provides comprehensive data recording of all monitored waveforms, and status inputs storing up to 248 cycles of data. The total record length is user‑configurable from 1 to 16 partitions. The number of samples per cycle used to store the data is user selectable. The number of samples per cycle that can be selected is 16 or 32 (50 or 60 Hz). The number of samples selected effects the length of the data that can be saved and its resolution. The lower the number of samples, the longer the record length that can be stored (but at a lower resolution).

The oscillographic recorder is triggered by a designated control/status input (usually a MBTS initiate input), a trip output or from serial communications.

When untriggered, the recorder continuously stores waveform data, thereby keeping the most recent data in memory. When triggered, the recorder stores pre‑trigger data, then continues to store data in memory for a user‑defined, post‑trigger delay period. The records may be analyzed using ISScom, and are also available in COMTRADE file format.

9. To view the Sequence of Events Dropout Input and Output information select Dropout I/Os. ISScom® will display the Dropout I/Os Status screen (Figure 3‑37).

Figure 3-37 Sequence of Events Dropout I/Os Status Screen

10. To view the System Status and Transfer Start Signal information select System Status and Transfer Start Signal. ISScom will display the System Status and Transfer Start Signal Status screen (Figure 3‑38).

System/Sequence of Events/ClearThe Clear feature clears all Sequence of Events Records stored on the MBTS.

To Clear all Sequence of Events Records perform the following:

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select System/Sequence of Events/Clear. ISScom will display the Clear Sequence of Events Records confirmation screen (Figure 3‑39).

Figure 3-39 Clear Sequence of Events Record Command Confirmation Screen


3–26

Figure 3-38 Sequence of Events System Status and Transfer Start Signal Status Screen

3–27

ISScom – 3

The following parameters are captured by the Oscillographic Recorder:

• MBTS start (initiate) signal. It can bemanual transfer initiate, protective relay initiate, or bus phase undervoltage initiate.

• Source 1 and Source 2 breaker status(Closed or Open)

• TripandclosecommandstotheSource1breaker

• TripandclosecommandstotheSource2breaker

• Source1voltagewaveforms,single-phaseor three‑phase

• Source2voltagewaveforms,single-phaseor three‑phase

• Source1currentwaveforms,single-phaseif available

• Source2currentwaveforms,single-phaseif available

• Bus voltage waveforms, single-phase orthree‑phase

• DeltaPhaseAngle

• Deltafrequency

• TripCircuitMonitor(TCM)orCloseCircuitMonitor (CCM) open signal.

• Inputs1—18

• Outputs1—16

The Oscillograph submenu includes the Setup, Retrieve, Trigger and Clear selections. The Oscillograph recorder settings are not considered to be part of the Setpoint Profile. Recorder settings are common to all profiles.

System/Oscillograph/SetupThe Setup selection displays the Oscillograph Setup screen (Figure 3‑41) which allows the user to set the number of records and triggering designations to be made. See Section 4.1, Unit Setup for detailed setup instructions.

System/Oscillograph/RetrieveThe Retrieve feature allows the user select the Oscillograph records to be retrieved (downloaded) and to determine the save location on the PC.

Path: System / Oscillograph / Setup

Figure 3-41 Setup Oscillograph Recorder


3–28

To Retrieve Oscillograph recorders perform the following:

1. From the ISScom® Main Screen menu select System/Oscillograph/Retrieve. ISScom will display the Retrieve Oscillograph Records screen (Figure 3‑42).

2. Select the Oscillograph record to be Retrieved (downloaded).

3. Select the destination folder (Browse) and name the file, then select Save, the path for the file will be displayed in the “File Name Destination” window.

4. Select Retrieve, The screen will display a bar indicating the status of the Retrieval. When the download is complete ISScom will display a Oscillograph Record Retrieval complete message.

System/Oscillograph/TriggerThe Trigger selection allows the user to manually trigger the Oscillograph. This can be confirmed by observing the Secondary Metering and Status screen (Figure 3‑17).

To manually Trigger the Oscillograph Recorder perform the following:

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select System/Oscillograph/Trigger. ISScom will display the Oscillograph Manual Trigger confirmation screen (Figure 3‑43).

Figure 3-43 Oscillograph Manual Trigger Command Confirmation Screen

2. Select YES, ISScom will respond with the Trigger Oscillograph Recorder Command Sent Screen (Figure 3‑44).

Path: System / Oscillograph / Retrieve

Figure 3-42 Retrieve Oscillograph Record Screen

3–29

ISScom – 3

Figure 3-44 Trigger Oscillograph Recorder Command Sent Screen

3. Select OK, ISScom® will return to the ISScom Main Screen (Figure 3‑5)

System/Oscillograph/ClearThe Clear feature clears all Oscillograph Records stored on the MBTS.

To Clear all Oscillograph Recorder records perform the following:

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu select System/Oscillograph/Clear. ISScom will display the Clear Oscillograph Record confirmation screen (Figure 3‑45).

Figure 3-45 Clear Oscillograph Records Command Confirmation Screen

2. Select YES, ISScom will respond with the Trigger Oscillograph Recorder Command Sent Screen (Figure 3‑46)

Figure 3-46 Oscillograph Records Cleared Screen

3. Select OK, ISScom will return to the ISScom Main Screen (Figure 3‑5)

System/ProfileThe system supports four setpoint profiles. This feature allows multiple setpoint profiles to be defined for the type of transfer initiated (Automatic, Manual or Hot Parallel) and the direction of the next transfer. The Profile submenu provides three selections: Switching Method, Active Profile, and Copy Profile.

System/Profile/Switching Method CAUTION: During Profile Switching, relay operation is disabled for approximately 1 second.

The Profile Switching Method feature (Figure 3‑47) allows the user to select either Manual or Input contact. When the Switching Profile Method is set to Manual, ISScom, remote communications or one of the ISSlogic® elements will select the Active Profile.

When the Switching Method is set to Input Contact, the profile is selected by the input contacts IN17 and IN18. When Input Contact is selected, only the input contacts can switch the system’s profile, and none of the Manual methods will switch the profile. See Table 4‑3 for input contact profile switching logic.

Figure 3-47 Profile Switching Method Dialog Screen

System/Profile/Active ProfileActive Profile (Figure 3‑48) allows user to designate active profile. The user can select between four profiles. If a profile is not saved into a profile the profile will contain factory default settings.

CAUTION: Switching the active profile when the MBTS is on‑line may cause unexpected operation if the wrong profile is selected.


3–30

2. Browse to the location of the file to be written to the MBTS, then select the target file.

3. Select OPEN, ISScom will write the file contents to the target MBTS. When the file has been successfully written to the MBTS ISScom will display a File Written Confirmation (Figure 3‑50)

4. Select OK, ISScom will return the ISScom Main Screen Figure 3‑5.

System/Read Data From SystemThe Read Data From System command is used to read the data contained in the MBTS settings and configuration to the ISScom program running on the PC.

To perform a Read Data From System command proceed as follows:

1. From the ISScom Main Screen select System/Read Data From System. ISScom will read the data from the target MBTS and when complete display a confirmation screen (Figure 3‑51).

Figure 3-51 ISScom Data Reading Successful Confirmation Screen

2. Select OK, ISScom will return the ISScom Main Screen Figure 3‑5.

Figure 3-48 Select Active Profile Dialog Screen

System/Profile/Copy ProfileThe Copy Profile (Figure 3‑49) feature copies the active profile to one of four profiles (user should allow approximately 2 minutes for copying.)

Figure 3-49 Copy Profile Dialog Screen

System/Write File To SystemThe Write File To System command is used to write a saved data file to the MBTS.

To perform a Write File To System command perform the following:

1. From the ISScom Main Screen select System/Write File To System. ISScom® will display an OPEN dialog screen with the default file extension of “.dat”.

Figure 3-50 ISScom File Written to MBTS Confirmation

3–31

ISScom – 3

The MBTS includes three levels of access codes. Depending on their assigned code, users have varying levels of access to the installed functions.

1. Level 1 Access = Read setpoints, monitor status, view status history.

2. Level 2 Access = All of level 1 privileges, plus read & change setpoints, target history, set time clock.

3. Level 3 Access = All of level 2 privileges, plus access to all configuration functions and settings.

Each access code is a user‑defined one‑to four‑digit number. Access codes can only be altered by a level 3 user.

If the level 3 access code is set to 9999, the access code feature is disabled. When access codes are disabled, the access screens are bypassed, and all users have full access to all the MBTS menus. The device is shipped from the factory with the access code feature disabled.

Figure 3-53 User Access Codes Reset Dialog Screen

Tools/Miscellaneous SetupThe Miscellaneous Setup menu selection displays the Miscellaneous Setup screen (Figure 3‑54) which provides the user with the ability to edit/input the User Logo lines of the HMI display, enter/edit the User Control Number and set the operating mode of the System OK LED. See Section 4.1, Unit Setup for detailed setup instructions.

User Logo LineThe user logo is a programmable, two‑line by 24‑character string, which can be used to identify the MBTS, and which is displayed locally during power up after Self Test completion. This information is also available in ISScom.

Tools Menu

The Tools menu provides the user with access to ISScom® MBTS support features and Functions.

Tools/System Access CodesThe System Access Codes menu item includes the Comm Access and User Access code submenus.

Tools/System Access Codes/Comm AccessThe Comm Access selection displays the Communication Access Code Reset screen (Figure 3‑52) which allows the user to reset the MBTS Comm Access Code. See Section 4.1, Unit Setup for detailed setup instructions.

If additional link security is desired, a communication access code can be programmed. Like the user access codes, if the communication access code is set to 9999 (default), communication security is disabled.

Figure 3-52 Communication Access Code Reset Dialog Screen

Tools/System Access Codes/User AccessThe User Access selection displays the User Access Codes Reset screen (Figure 3‑53) which allows the user to reset the MBTS User Access Codes. See Section 4.1, Unit Setup for detailed setup instructions.


3–32

User Control NumberThe User Control Number is a user‑defined value which can be used for inventory or identification. The unit does not use this value, but it can be accessed through the HMI or the communications interface, and can be read remotely.

System OK LEDThe green SYSTEM OK LED is controlled by the unit’s microprocessor. A flashing SYSTEM OK LED indicates proper program cycling. The LED can also be programmed to be continuously illuminated.

Figure 3-54 Miscellaneous Dialog Screen

Tools/System Outputs TestThe System Outputs Test menu selection displays the System Outputs Test screen (Figure 3‑55) which provides the user with the ability to test each ouput relay. See Section 6, Testing for detailed testing instructions.

Figure 3-55 System Outputs Test Dialog Screen

Figure 3-56 System Communication Setup Dialog Screen

3–33

ISScom – 3

Figure 3-58 System Error Codes / Output Counters Dialog Screen

Figure 3-57 Ethernet Settings

Tools/System Comm Setup

The System Comm Setup menu selection displays the System Communication Setup screen (Figure 3‑56) which provides the user with the ability to set the System’s COM Port communication parameters. Also, when selected ISScom® will display a message identifying which COM Port is currently being used. See Section 4.1, Unit Setup for detailed communication setup instructions.

Tools/System Ethernet Setup

The System Ethernet Setup menu selection displays the Ethernet Setup screen (Figure 3‑57) which provides the user with the ability to set the System’s Ethernet Port communication parameters. See Section 4.1, Unit Setup for detailed communication setup instructions.

Tools/System Firmware UpdateThe System Firmware Update selection allows the user to update MBTS firmware version in the field.

Detailed step by step instructions will be provided by Beckwith Electric regarding Field Firmware Updates.

Tools/Calibrate UnitThe Calibrate Unit menu selection provides the user with instructions to recalibrate Nominal Voltage, Current and Frequency. See Section 6, Testing for detailed MBTS calibration instructions.

Tools/System Error Codes / CountersThe System Error Codes / Counters menu selection displays the System Error Codes / Output Counters screen (Figure 3‑58) which provides the user with the ability to view and clear system Error Codes, Processor Resets, Alarm Counters, Power Loss Counter and Output Counters. Also, Checksums can be viewed for Calibration and Setpoints. See Section 2.2, Manual Operation for detailed instructions.


3–34

Figure 3-59 ISSplot Main Screen

3.2 ISSplot

ISSplot allows the user to plot and print waveform data downloaded from Beckwith Electric MBTSs. The ISSplot feature is also capable of plotting and printing waveform data files that are in COMTRADE format.

When the ISSplot menu item is selected, ISSplot is launched in an independent WindowsTM Window. The ISSplot Main Screen and menu bar is displayed (Figure 3‑59). The ISSplot Menu Structure and Submenu Callouts are illustrated in Figure 3‑60.

3–35

ISScom – 3

Figure 3-60 ISSplot® Menu Structure and Submenu Callouts


3–36

ISSplot File MenuThe ISSplot File menu allows the user to open an oscillograph file previously downloaded by ISScom®. ISScom supports COMTRADE format data files (file extension *.cfg). The File menu also permits the user to preview and print selected oscillographs. Exit closes the ISSplot program.

ISSplot View Menu

The View menu allows the user to select Toolbar and Status Bar for display.

ISSplot Settings Menu

The Settings menu allows the selection of the new source (1 or 2) for Delta Angle, waveforms to be displayed, the formatting of display colors, and the ability to change the waveform scaling.

ISSplot Select New Source for Delta AngleAllows the user to select Source 1 or Source 2.

ISSplot Select WaveformsAllows the selection of voltages, currents, inputs, and outputs to be plotted or printed.

Figure 3-61 Select Waveforms Dialog Screen

ISSplot Change ColorsAllows the user to change waveform colors for customized plotting.

Figure 3-62 Change Colors Dialog Screen

3–37

ISScom – 3

NOTE: Cursor bars may be dragged to any location by positioning the cursor arrow on a bar and dragging the mouse. Double click the left key to position one cursor bar and Shift‑Double Click or left mouse down and click the right key to position the other cursor bar at the current cursor arrow time position.

Figure 3-63 Example of ISSplot Oscillographic Data


3–38

ISSplot® Change ScaleAllows the individual designation of a magnitude scale for voltage and current traces.

ISSplot DefaultSets all similar waveforms to the same scale (largest).

ISSplot Auto AllAllows ISSplot to set the scale for each individual waveform.

Figure 3-64 Change Scale Dialog Screen

ISSplot Window Menu/Help Menu

The Window menu enables the positioning and arrangement of multiple ISSplot windows at the same time. Selecting any displayed window activates that frame, allowing manipulation of the data.

The Help menu provides information about ISSplot menus and commands. The About command provides version information for ISSplot.

ISSplot makes use of shortcut key commands for many functions, making ISSplot as easy as clicking your mouse and touching a few keys.

Key Strokes Action

Left-Mouse button down and drag, or select zoom inicon on toolbar menu

Magnify the selected area in main display, impedancediagram, PQ diagram, and phasor diagrams

Left-mouse double click Move Marker #1 to current position in main display

Shift + Left-mouse double-click or left-mouse down andright-mouse double click Move Marker #2 to current position in main display

Align cursor on Marker #1 and drag Drag Marker #1 in main display

Align cursor on Marker #2 and drag Drag Marker #2 in main display

Right-mouse down

Current and voltage selection menu in main display andphasor diagrams

Impedance in the Impedance diagram

Voltage and Current in the Phase diagram

Real and Reactive Power in PQ diagram

Left key or select left scroll icon in toolbar menu Move left in main display

Right key or select right scroll icon in toolbar menu Move right in main display

Home key or select move to beginning icon in toolbarmenu Move to the beginning of the record in the main display

End key or select move to end icon in toolbar menu Move to the end of the record in the main display

Table 3-1 ISSplot Shortcut Keys

3–39

ISScom – 3

NOTE: Cursor bars may be dragged to any location by positioning the cursor arrow on a bar and dragging the mouse. Double click the left key to position one cursor bar and Shift‑Double Click or double click the right key to position the other cursor bar at the current cursor arrow time position.

Figure 3-66 ISSplot Screen with Callouts

Figure 3-65 ISSplot® Toolbar

MARKER #1All analog traces. This view shows peak values. RMS values may also be displayed.

Delta value between Marker #1 and Marker #2.

Value at Marker #1

Value at Marker #2

MARKER #2

Control status input and contact output traces (discrete I/O)

Date and Timestamp for record

Time at Marker #2

Time at Marker #1

Time of TripCommand

Time at Marker #2

Scaling for each analog trace. This can be set automatically or manually adjusted.

Time at Marker #1


3–40

Window Menu/Help Menu

The Window menu enables the positioning and arrangement of all ISScom windows so that there is better access to available functions. This feature allows the display of several windows at the same time. Clicking on an inactive window activates that window.

The Help menu provides two commands. The Contents command initiates a link to a PDF (Portable Document File) version of this instruction book for easy reference. An Adobe Acrobat® reader is required to view this document. The M‑4272 Instruction Book has been Bookmarked. By selecting the “Navigator pane’ in Adobe Acrobat Reader, the user can directly access selected topics.

The About ISScom® command displays ISScom version and development information (Figure 3‑67). Also, this screen displays unit information.

Figure 3-67 About ISScom Dialog Box

System Setup and Setpoints – 4

4–1

4 System Setup and Setpoints

4.1 Unit Setup ............................................................................... 4–1

4.2 System Setup ...................................................................... 4–23

4.3 System Diagrams .................................................................. 4–28

4.4 System Setpoints .................................................................. 4–35

Chapter four is designed for the person or group responsible for the Unit Setup, System Setup and System Setpoints of the M-4272 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System (MBTS).

Chapter 4 consists of:

• Functionalandconnectiondiagramsforatypical application of the MBTS.

• TheUnitSetupSection,which consistsof general unit setup information, Com-munications setup, Oscillograph setup and Transfer Event Log setup.

• TheSystemSetupSectionprovidesthedefinitions of system quantities and equip-ment characteristics required by the MBTS whichincludeCT,VTconfigurationselec-tion and Input and Output assignments.

• A System Setpoints Section which de-scribes the unit transfer settings, enabling functions and setpoints, output contact as-signments and digital input assignments.

The selection of the MBTS System Setup param-eters and Setpoints is performed using the M-3872 ISScom® Communications and Oscillographic AnalysisSoftware.However,somesetupinformationcan also be entered from the unit’s M-3931 FrontPanelHumanMachineInterface(HMI),andwillbeincludedwhereapplicable.

4.1 Unit Setup

NOTE: SetupRecord Forms are contained inAppendix A.TheSetupRecordFormtables list the MBTS parameter settings choices for each feature and function.

GENERAL UNIT SETUP

The General Unit setup consists of the setup of the followingfeaturesandfunctions:

• CommAccessCode

• UserAccessCodes

• UserLogoLines

• UserControlNumber

• OKLEDFlash

• TimeandDate

COMM ACCESS CODE

If additional link security is desired, a communica-tion access code can be programmed. Like the user access codes, if the communication access code is set to 9999 (default), communication security is disabled.


4–2

ISScom® Comm Access Code SetupTosettheMBTSCommAccessCodeperformthefollowing:

NOTE: Communicationmustbeestablishedwiththe target MBTS for this procedure.

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menuselect Tools/System Access Code/Comm Access.ISScomwilldisplaytheCommunication Access Code Resetdialogscreen(Figure4-1).

Figure 4-1 Communication Access Code Reset Dialog Screen

2. EnterthedesiredNewCommunicationAccess Code (1-9999), then re-enter(confirmation)theNewAccessCode.

3. Select OK,ISScomwilldisplayaCom-municationAccessCodeSentConfirma-tionScreen(Figure4-2).

Figure 4-2 Communication Access Code Sent Confirmation Screen

4. Select OK,ISScomwillreturntotheMainScreen.

ThenewCommunicationAccessCodewillnotbeinaffectuntilcommunicationshavebeenclosedwiththeMBTSforap-proximately 2.5 minutes.

HMI Comm Access Code Setup 1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.

2. IfLevelAccessisactive,thefollowingisdisplayed:

ENTER ACCESS CODE 0

a. InputtherequiredAccessCode,thenpress ENTER.

b. If the properAccessCodehasbeenentered,theHMIwillreturn:

LEVEL #(1,2 or 3) Access Granted!


c. Go to step 4.

3. If Level Access is not active, then thefollowingisdisplayed:


4. PresstheRightarrowpushbuttonuntilthefollowingisdisplayed:


5. Press ENTER, thefollowingwillbedis-played:

COM1 SETUP COM1 com2 com3 com_adr


COMM ACCESS CODE ACCSS eth eth_ip


COMM ACCESS CODE 9999


4–3

8. Input thedesiredCommAccessCodeasfollows:

a. UtilizingtheUpandDownarrowpush-buttons select the desired first digit.

b. PresstheLeftarrowpushbuttononce,then repeat the previous step as neces-sarytoinputthedesiredCommAccessCode digits.

c. WhenthedesiredCommAccessCodehas been input, then press ENTER. The followingwillbedisplayed:

COMM ACCESS CODE ACCESS eth eth_ip

9. Press Exit.

USER ACCESS CODES

The MBTS includes three levels of access codes. Depending on their assigned code, users have varying levels of access to the installed functions.

1. Level 1 Access = Read setpoints, monitorstatus,viewstatushistory.

2. Level 2 Access=Alloflevel1privi-leges, plus read & change setpoints, target history, set time clock.

3. Level 3 Access=Alloflevel2privi-leges, plus access to all configuration functions and settings.

Each access code is a user-defined one-to four-digitnumber.Accesscodescanonlybealteredbya level 3 user.

If the level 3 access code is set to 9999, the access code feature is disabled. When access codes are disabled, the access screens are bypassed, and all users have full access to all the MBTS menus. The deviceisshippedfromthefactorywiththeaccesscode feature disabled.

ISScom® User Access Codes SetupTosettheMBTSUserAccessCodesperformthefollowing:


1. From the ISScom Main Screen menuselect Tools/System Access Code/User Access. ISScomwill display theUserAccessCodeResetdialogscreen(Figure4-3).

Figure 4-3 User Access Codes Reset Dialog Screen

2. EnterthedesiredNewUserAccessCode(1-9999), then re-enter (confirmation) the NewUserAccessCode.

3. Select OK, ISScomwilldisplayaNewUser Access Code Sent ConfirmationScreen(Figure4-2).

Figure 4-4 New User Access Code Sent Confirmation Screen



4–4

HMI User Access Codes Setup 1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.


ENTER ACCESS CODE 0





c. Go to step 4.





5. If User Access Codes are to be set,thenuse theRIGHTarrowpushbuttontoselectALTERACCESSCODES.Thefollowingwillbedisplayed:

ALTER ACCESS CODES vers sn ACCESS number


ENTER ACCESS CODE LEVEL#1 level#2 level#3

7. Press ENTER,thefollowingwillbedis-played:

LEVEL #1 9999

8. InputthedesiredUserAccessCodeasfollows:


b. PresstheLeftarrowpushbuttononce,then repeat the previous step as neces-sarytoinputthedesiredAccessCode.

c. When the desired Access Code hasbeen input, then press ENTER. The followingwillbedisplayed:

ENTER ACCESS CODE LEVEL#1 level#2 level#3

9. TosetUserAccessCodeLevel#2presstheRIGHTarrowpushbutton to selectLEVEL#2, thenpressENTER the fol-lowingwillbedisplayed:

LEVEL #2 9999

10. Repeat Step 8 to enter the desired Level #2UserAccessCode.

11. TosetUserAccessCodeLevel#3presstheRIGHTarrowpushbutton to selectLEVEL#3, thenpress ENTER the fol-lowingwillbedisplayed:

LEVEL #3 9999

12. Repeat Step 8 to enter the desired Level #3UserAccessCode.

13. Press the EXITpushbuttonwillreturntothe previous selection screen:

ALTER ACCESS CODES vers sn ACCESS number


4–5

USER LOGO LINE

The user logo is a programmable, two-line by24-characterstring,whichcanbeusedtoidentifytheMBTS,andwhichisdisplayedlocallywhentheunitis idle. This information is also available in ISScom®.

USER CONTROL NUMBER

Thisisauser-definedvaluewhichcanbeusedforinventory or identification. The unit does not use this value,butitcanbeaccessedthroughtheHMIorthecommunications interface, and can be read remotely.

SYSTEM OK LED

The green SYSTEM OK LED is controlled by the unit’smicroprocessor.AflashingSYSTEM OK LED indicates proper program cycling. The LED can also be programmed to be continuously illuminated.

ISScom User Logo Line, User control Number and System OK LED SetupTo set the MBTS User Logo Line, User Control NumberandSystemOKLEDperformthefollowing:


1. From the ISScom Main Screen menuselect Tools/Miscellaneous Setup. ISScomwill display theMiscellaneousSetupdialogscreen(Figure4-5).

Figure 4-5 Miscellaneous Dialog Screen

2. If entering/editing the User Logo lines, then enter the desired User Logo Lines.

3. If changing the User Control Number,then enter the desired User Control Number.

4. Ifenabling/disablingtheSystemOKLEDFlashoperation, thenselecteitherEn-able of Disable.


HMI User Logo Line Setup 1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.


ENTER ACCESS CODE 0





c. Go to step 4.






SOFTWARE VERSION VERS sn access number


USER LOGO LINE 1 LOGO 1 logo 2 alrm


4–6


USER LOGO LINE 1 _BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO.

8. Input the desired User Logo Line 1 as follows:

a. UtilizingtheUpandDownarrowpush-buttons select the desired first letter/symbol/digit/blank space.

b. PresstheRightarrowpushbuttononce,then repeat the previous step as neces-sary to input the desired User Logo Line 1.

c. When the desired User Logo Line 1 has been input, then press ENTER. The followingwillbedisplayed:

USER LOGO LINE 1 —WAIT—

USER LOGO LINE 1 LOGO 1 logo 2 alrm

9. To enter a User Logo Line 2 press the RIGHTarrowpushbuttononce,thefol-lowingwillbedisplayed:

USER LOGO LINE 2 logo 1 LOGO 2 alrm


USER LOGO LINE 2 _ M-4272

11. Input the desired User Logo Line 2 as follows:

a. UtilizingtheUpandDownarrowpush-buttons select the desired first letter/symbol/digit/blank space.

b. Press the RIGHT arrow pushbuttononce, then repeat the previous step as necessary to input the desired User Logo Line 2.

c. When the desired User Logo Line 2 has been input, then press ENTER. The followingwillbedisplayed:

USER LOGO LINE 2 —WAIT—

USER LOGO LINE 2 logo 1 LOGO 2 alrm

12. Press Exit.

HMI User Control Number Setup 1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.


ENTER ACCESS CODE 0





c. Go to step 4.








4–7


USER CONTROL NUMBER vers sn access NUMBER


USER CONTROL NUMBER 1

8. InputthedesiredUserControlNumberasfollows:


b. PresstheLeftarrowpushbuttononce,then repeat the previous step as neces-sary to input the desired User Control Number.

c. WhenthedesiredUserControlNumberhas been input, then press ENTER. The followingwillbedisplayed:

USER CONTROL NUMBER vers sn access NUMBER

9. Press Exit.

HMI System OK LED Setup 1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.


ENTER ACCESS CODE 0





c. Go to step 4.



CAUTION: Do not enter DIAGNOSTICMODEwhen protected equipment is in service. EnteringDIAGNOSTICMODEwhenprotectedequipmentisinservice removes all protective functions of the MBTS.

4. Presstherightarrowpushbuttonuntilthefollowingisdisplayed:




6. Presstherightarrowpushbuttonuntilthefollowingisdisplayed:

DIAGNOSTIC MODE time error eth DIAG

7. Press ENTER,thefollowingwarningwillbe displayed:

PROCESSOR WILL RESET! ENTER KEY TO CONTINUE

CAUTION: Do not enter DIAGNOSTICMODEwhen protected equipment is in service. EnteringDIAGNOSTICMODEwhenprotectedequipmentisinservice removes all protective functions of the MBTS.

8. Press ENTER, the relaywill resetandDIAGNOSTIC MODEwillbetemporarilydisplayedfollowedby:

OUTPUT TEST (RELAY) OUTPUT input led module


FLASH SYS OK LED com3 clock LED cal


FLASH SYS OK LED off ON


4–8

11. UtilizingtheRightorLeftarrowpushbut-tonsselecteitherONorOFF.


FLASH SYS OK LED –DONE–


FLASH SYS OK LED com3 clock LED cal

14. Press EXIT, the following will be dis-played:

PRESS EXIT TO EXIT DIAGNOSTIC MODE

15. Press EXIT, theunitwillcycle throughthePowerSelfTests.

SYSTEM CLOCK

ThisfeatureallowstheusertosettheMBTSinternalclock. The clock is used to time stamp system events such as transfers and oscillograph operations.

Theclockisdisabledwhenshippedfromthefac-tory (indicated by “80” seconds appearing on the clock) to preserve battery life. If the MBTS is to beunpoweredforanextendedlengthoftime,theclock should be stopped (from Diagnostic Mode or ISScom®Figure4-6).IftheIRIG-Binterfaceisused, the hours, minutes, and seconds information intheclockwillbesynchronizedwithIRIG-Btimeinformation every hour.

The MBTS can accept a modulated IRIG-B signal us-ingtherearpanelBNCconnector,orademodulatedTTL level signal using extra pins on the rear panel COM2RS-232interfaceconnector(seeFigureB-4for COM2 pinout.) If the TTL signal is to be used, thenJumper5willberequiredtobepositioned(seeSection5.5,CircuitBoardSwitchesandJumpers).

ISScom Set Date/TimeTosettheMBTSDate/Timeperformthefollowing:


1. From the ISScom Main Screen menuselect System/Setup/Set Date/Time. ISScomwilldisplay theSetDate/Timedialogscreen(Figure4-6).

Figure 4-6 Set Date/Time Dialog Screen

2. If setting the Date and Time to the con-nected PC Date and Time then:

a. Select“PCTime”.ISScomwilldisplaya “write values to unit?” confirmationscreen.

b. Select“Yes”.TheTimeandDatewillbeset to the PC Time and Date. ISScom willthenreturntothemainscreen.

3. If setting the Date and Time manually then:

a. Select “Relay Time”.

b. Enter the desired Date and Time.

c. Select “Save”. ISScom will display a“write values to unit?” confirmationscreen.

d. Select“Yes”.TheTimeandDatewillbeset to the desired Time and Date. ISS-comwillthenreturntothemainscreen.

HMI SET DATE and TIME 1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.


ENTER ACCESS CODE 0





c. Go to step 4.


4–9



4. Press the RIGHTarrowpushbuttonuntilthefollowingisdisplayed:


5. Press ENTER, then press the RIGHTarrow pushbutton until the following isdisplayed:

DATE & TIME TIME error eth diag


DATE & TIME 08-Jan-2001 00:00:80


DATE & TIME 01 Year

8. InputthedesiredYearasfollows:


b. PresstheLeftarrowpushbuttononce,then repeat the previous step as neces-sary to input the desired Year.

c. When the desired Year has been input, then press ENTER.Thefollowingwillbedisplayed:

DATE & TIME JAN feb mar apr may

9. InputthedesiredMonthasfollows:

a. UtilizingtheRightorLeftarrowpushbut-tons select the desired Month.

b. When the desired Month has been selected, then press ENTER. The fol-lowingwillbedisplayed:

DATE & TIME 8 Date

10. InputthedesiredDateasfollows:

a. UtilizingtheUpandDownarrowpush-buttons select the desired Date first digit.

b. PresstheLeftarrowpushbuttononce,then repeat the previous step as neces-sary to input the desired date.

c. When the desired Date has been input, then press ENTER.Thefollowingwillbedisplayed:

DATE & TIME SUN mon tue wed thu

11. InputthedesiredDayasfollows:

a. UtilizingtheRightorLeftarrowpushbut-tons select the desired Day.

b. When the desired Day has been se-lected, then press ENTER.Thefollow-ingwillbedisplayed:

DATE & TIME 01 Hour

12. InputthedesiredHourasfollows:


b. PresstheLeftarrowpushbuttononce,then repeat the previous step as neces-sarytoinputthedesiredHour.

c. WhenthedesiredHourhasbeeninput,then press ENTER.Thefollowingwillbedisplayed:

DATE & TIME 13 Minutes

13. InputthedesiredMinutesasfollows:



4–10

b. PresstheLeftarrowpushbuttononce,then repeat the previous step as neces-sary to input the desired Minute(s).

c. When the desired Minutes have been input, then press ENTER.Thefollowingwillbedisplayed:

DATE & TIME 16 Seconds

14. InputthedesiredSecondsasfollows:


b. PresstheLeftarrowpushbuttononce,then repeat the previous step as neces-sary to input the desired Seconds.

c. When the desired Seconds have been input, then press ENTER.Thefollowingwillbedisplayed:

DATE & TIME TIME error eth diag

COMMUNICATION SETUP

Communication setup can be accomplished utilizing either ISScom® or the HMI.TheCommunicationsetupconsistsofthesetupofthefollowingfeaturesand functions:

• COMPortdefinitionsandDeviceAddress

• EthernetPortSettings

• InstallingModems

Serial Ports (RS-232) NOTE: COM1 and COM2 can be disabled

for security purposes from the commu-nicationsHMImenu.ALevel2AccessCode is required.

Twoserial interfaceports,COM1andCOM2,arestandard 9-pin, RS-232, DTE-configured ports. The front-panel port, COM1, can be used to locally set and interrogate the MBTS using a temporary con-nection to a PC or laptop computer. The second RS-232 port, COM2, is provided at the rear of the unit.COM2isunavailableforcommunicationswhentheoptionalethernetportisenabled.However,theDemodulated IRIG-B may still be used through the COM2PortwhenEthernetisenabled.

Serial Port (RS-485) NOTE: COM3 can be disabled for security pur-

poses from the communications HMImenu. A Level 2 Access Code is re-quired.

COM3 located on the rear terminal block of the M-4272isanRS-485,2-wireconnection.Appendix B,FigureB-3illustratesa2-wireRS-485network.

Individualremoteaddressingalsoallowsforcom-municationsthroughaserialmultidropnetwork.Upto 32 MBTSs can be connected using the same 2 wireRS-485communicationsline.

Direct ConnectionInorderforISScomtocommunicatewiththerelayusing direct serial connection, a serial “null modem” cable is required,with a 9-pin connector (DB9P)for the system, and an applicable connector for the computer (usually DB9S or DB25S). Pin-outs for a nullmodemadapterareprovided inAppendixB,Communications.

Anoptional10footnullmodemcable(M-0423)isavailable from the factory, for direct connection be-tweenaPCandtherelay’sfrontpanelCOMport,or the rear COM2 port.

When fabricating communication cables, every effort should be made to keep cabling as short as possible.Lowcapacitancecableisrecommended.The RS-232 standard specifies a maximum cable length of 50 feet for RS-232 connections. If over 50 feet of cable length is required, other technologies should be investigated.

Other communication topologies are possible using theM-4272DigitalMotorBusTransferSystem.AnApplicationNote,“Serial Communication with Beck-with Electric’s Integrated Protection System Relays” isavailablefromthefactoryorfromourwebsiteatwww.beckwithelectric.com.

Device AddressIndividualMBTSDeviceAddressesshouldbebe-tween1and255.ThedefaultDeviceAddressis1.


4–11

ISScom COM Port Definitions and System’s Communication AddressTosetuptheCOMPortsandCommunicationAd-dressesperformthefollowing:


1. FromtheISScom® Main Screen menu select Tools/System Comm Setup. ISScomwill display the SystemCom-municationSetupdialogscreen(Figure4-7).

TheSystemCOMPortthatisinusewillbe indicated at the top of the display.

2. Select the desired COM Port to be setup (1, 2 or 3).

3. Enter the desired “Dead Sync Time” (2 to 3000 msec).

This delay establishes the line idle time to re-sync packet communication. Dead sync time should be programmed based on the channel’s baud rate.

Baud Rate Dead-Sync Time9600 4 ms4800 8 ms2400 16 ms1200 32 ms

Table 4-1 Dead-Sync Time

4. Enter the desired “Baud Rate” (1200 to 9600). COM2 and COM3 share the same baud rate (see Section 5.5, Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers).

5. Enter the desired “Stop Bits” value (1 or 2).

6. Enterthedesired“Parity”(None,oddoreven).

Figure 4-7 System Communication Setup Dialog Screen


4–12

Figure 4-8 Multiple Systems Addressing Using Communications-Line Splitter

7. Enter the desired “System’s Communica-tionAddress”(1to255).

The individual addressing capability of ISScom®andtheMBTSallowsmultiplesystems to share a direct or modem con-nectionwhenconnectedthroughCOM2using a communications-line splitter (Figure4-8).Onesuchdeviceenables2to 6 units to share one communications line. Appendix B,FigureB2illustratesasetupofRS-232FiberOpticnetwork.

8. When the COM Port settings have been entered, then select Save.ISScomwilldisplay the COM Port Settings Warning Screen(Figure4-9).

Figure 4-9 COM Port Settings Warning Screen

9. Select Yes, ISScom® will display theCOM Port Setting Verification screen(Figure4-10).


4–13

Figure 4-10 COM Port Setting Verification Screen

10. Verifythesettings,thenselectYes, ISS-comwilldisplaytheCOMPortSettingsConfirmationscreen(Figure4-11).

Figure 4-11 COM Port Settings Confirmation Screen


HMI COM Port Enable/Disable, Definitions and Device Address 1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.


ENTER ACCESS CODE 0





c. Go to step 4.




Communication stat COMM setup

5. PressENTER,thefollowingwillbedis-played:



PORT ACCESS enable DISABLE

7. PresstheLeftorRightArrowpushbuttonas necessary to enable or disable the COM port.


COM1 BAUD RATE baud_4800 BAUD_9600

9. PresstheLeftorRightarrowpushbuttonas necessary to select the desired baud rate.


COM1 DEAD SYNC TIME 50 ms

11. Input the desired Dead Sync Time as follows:


b. PresstheLeftarrowpushbuttononce,then repeat the previous step as nec-essary to input the desired Dead Sync Time.

c. When the desired Dead Sync Time has been input, then press ENTER. The followingwillbedisplayed:

COM1 PARITY NONE odd even


4–14

12. PresstheLeftorRightarrowpushbuttonas necessary to select the desired Parity setting.


COM1 STOP BITS 1

14. UtilizingtheUporDownarrowpushbut-tons select the desired Stop Bits.

15. PressENTER,thefollowingwillbedis-played:


16. SelectingCOM2orCOM3willactivatethe same menu choices as displayed withtheselectionofCOM1.Repeatasnecessary to setup the remaining COM Ports.

ETHERNET COMMUNICATION SETTINGS

The optional RJ45 ethernet port can be enabled utilizing either ISScom® from the Ethernet Settings menuorfromtheHMICommunicationmenu.Whenthe ethernet port is enabled the COM2 Serial Port isnotavailableforcommunications.However,theDemodulated IRIG-B may still be used through the COM2Portwhenethernetisenabled.

The following parametersmust be set for properethernet communication:

DHCP PROTOCOL

ENABLE:IfthenetworkserversupportstheDHCPprotocolthenetworkserverwillassigntheIPAd-dress,NetMaskandGatewayAddress.

DISABLE:IfthenetworkserverdoesnotsupporttheDHCPprotocolortheuserchoosestomanuallyinputethernetsettings,thenobtaintheIPAddress,NetMaskandGatewayaddressfromtheNetworkAdministratorandenterthesettings.

ETHERNET PROTOCOLS

TheStandardPortNumberfortheMODBUSoverTCP/IP protocol is 502. The master device may requiretheentryoftheStandardPortNumber.

ISScom Ethernet Port Setup with DHCP NOTE: Communicationmustbeestablishedwith

the target MBTS for this procedure.

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menuselect Tools/System Ethernet Setup. . ISScomwilldisplaytheEthernetSetupscreen(Figure4-12).

Figure 4-12 Ethernet Setup Screen

3. Select Ethernet Enable.

4. SelectDHCPProtocolEnable.

5. Select Save. Theethernetboardisnowconfigured for use and may be accessed throughanetwork.

ISScom Ethernet Port Setup without DHCP NOTE: Communicationmustbeestablishedwith

the target MBTS for this procedure.

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menuselect Tools/System Ethernet Setup. . ISScomwilldisplaytheEthernetSetupscreen(Figure4-12).

3. Select Ethernet Enable.

4. SelectDHCPProtocolDisable.

5. EntervaluesforIPAddress,NetMaskandGateway.

6. Select Save.Theethernetboardisnowconfigured for use and may be accessed throughanetwork.


4–15

HMI Ethernet Port Setup 1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.


ENTER ACCESS CODE 0





c. Go to step 4.







6. UsetheRightarrowpushbuttontoselectETH(UpperCase).

ETHERNET SETUP access ETH eth_ip


ETHERNET DISABLE enable

8. UsetheRightarrowpushbuttontose-lectENABLE(UpperCase),thenpressENTER,thefollowingwillbedisplayed:

TCP/IP SETTINGS TCP_SETTINGS


DHCP PROTOCOL DISABLE enable

10. IfthenetworkdoesnotsupporttheDHCPprotocol, then go to Manual Configura-tionofEthernetBoard(followingpage)to manually configure the ethernet board.

11. IftheDHCPProtocolistobeenabled,thenusetheRight/Leftarrowpushbut-ton to select ENABLE (Upper Case),then press ENTER,thefollowingwillbedisplayed:


12. Press EXIT, the ethernet board willreconfigure and the following will bedisplayed:

CONFIGURING ETH...

If the ethernet board successfully obtains anIPAddressthefollowingwillbedis-played for approximately 2 seconds:

ETHERNET IP ADDRESS xx.xx.xx.xx

Theethernetboardisnowconfiguredforuseandmaybeaccessedthroughanetwork.Thedisplaywillreturntothefollowing:



4–16

If the ethernet board fails to obtain an IP Addresswithin15secondsthefollowingwill be displayed (for approximately 2seconds):

CONFIGURING ETH... ETH BOARD ERROR

Contact the Network Administrator todetermine the cause of the configuration failure.

HMI Manual Configuration of Ethernet Board 1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.


ENTER ACCESS CODE 0





c. Go to step 4.







6. UsetheRightarrowpushbuttontoselectETH(UpperCase).



ETHERNET DISABLE enable

8. EnsurethatENABLEisselected(UpperCase).

IfENABLEisnotselected(UpperCase),then use the Left arrowpushbutton toselectENABLE.


DHCP PROTOCOL DISABE enable

10. EnsurethatDISABLEisselected(uppercase).IfDISABLEisnotselected,thenusetheleftarrowpushbuttontoselectDISABLE.


IP ADDRESS XX.XX.XX.XX

12. EnterthedesiredIPAddress,thenpressENTER,thefollowingwillbedisplayed:

NET MASK XX.XX.XX.XX

13. EnterthedesiredNetMask,thenpressENTER,thefollowingwillbedisplayed:

GATEWAY XX.XX.XX.XX

14. Enter thedesiredGateway, thenpressENTER,thefollowingwillbedisplayed:



4–17

15. Press EXIT, the ethernet board willreconfigure and the following will bedisplayed:

CONFIGURING ETH...

If the ethernet board is successfully con-figured,thentheenteredIPAddresswillbe displayed for approximately 2 seconds:

ETHERNET IP ADDRESS xx.xx.xx.xx

Theethernetboardisnowconfiguredforuseandmaybeaccessedthroughanetwork.

INSTALLING THE MODEMS

Using ISScom® to interrogate, set or monitor the MBTS using a modem requires both a remote modem connected at the MBTS location and a local modem connectedtothecomputerwithISScominstalled.

NOTE: Any compatiblemodemmay be used;however,theunitonlycommunicatesat1200 to 9600 baud.

Inorder touse ISScom tocommunicatewith theMBTSusingamodem,thefollowingmustbepro-videdwiththeMBTS:

• Anexternalmodem(1200baudorhigher),capable of understanding standard ATcommands.

• Serialmodemcablewith9-pinconnectorfor the MBTS and the applicable connector for the modem.

Similarly, the computer running ISScom must also have access to a compatible internal or external modem.

Connecting the PC Modem 1. If the computer has an external modem,

then use a standard straight-through RS-232 modem cable (M-3933) to con-nect the computer to the modem.

2. If the computer has an internal modem, then refer to the modem’s instruction book to determine which communica-tions port should be selected.

3. Verifythatthemodemisattachedto(ifexternal) or assigned to (if internal) the same serial port as assigned in ISScom.

While ISScom can use any of the 255 serial ports (COM1 through COM255), most computers support only COM1 and COM2.

4. Connect the modem to a telephone line, then energize the modem.

Initializing the PC Modem 1. Verifythatthemodemisconnectedas

described in “Connecting the PC Mo-dem”.

2. Open ISScom, then select the COMM menu item.

3. ISScomwilldisplaytheCommunicationDialogscreen(Figure4-13).

4. Select COMM DEVICE/MODEM, ISS-comwilldisplaytheExpandedCommu-nicationDialogscreen(Figure4-14)toinclude modem setup information.

5. Enter the required information in the PC Modem Settings section of the Commu-nication screen

6. Select INITIALIZE from the expanded Communications dialog box.

COMMAND BUTTONS

Serial COM TheSerialCOMPortselectionallowsPort the user to select the COM Port, Baud

Rate, Parity and Stop Bits.

Open COM InitiatescontactwiththeMBTS, either by direct serial or modem communication.

Close COM Breakscommunicationwiththe protective system, for both direct serial or modem communication.

TCP_IP Opens the ethernet applicable com-municationscreenselectionstoallowuser to enter a TCP_IP address (if necessary), and opening and closing communicationwiththetargetrelay.

Modem Displays the expanded Communication dialog box.

Cancel Returns you to the ISScom main window;anychangestothedisplayedinformation are lost.

Open TCP_IP Initiatescontactwiththeprotectivesys-tem by ethernet connection.

Close TCP_IP Closes Ethernet Connection


4–18

COMMAND BUTTONS

Bring Up Whenselected,followingTerminal connection to the target modem,Window allowstheusertosendcommandsto the modem.

After Dialing DisplaystheAdd/Editdialogbox,Add allowingyoutotypeaprotectivesys-

tem’s unit identifier, phone number, and communication address.

Edit DisplaystheAdd/Editdialogbox,allow-ingyoutoreviewandchangetheuserlines (unit identifier), phone number, and communication address of a selected entry.

Delete Deletes a selected entry.

Save Saves any changes to the displayed information

Initialize AllowstheusertosendspecialsetuporotherATcommandsdirectlytothemodem.

Dial Dials the entry selected from the direc-tory.

Hang Up Endsmodemcommunication,allowingthe user to dial again.

Connecting the Local Modem to the MBTSSetup of the modem attached to the MBTS may be slightly complicated. It involves programming parameters(usingtheATcommandset),andstor-ing this profile in the modem’s nonvolatile memory.

After programming, the modem will power up intheproperstateforcommunicatingwiththeMBTS.Programming may be accomplished by using the “BringUpTerminalWindowafterdialing”selection(Figure 4-14). Refer to your modem manual forfurther information.

NOTE: The MBTS does not issue or understand anymodemcommands.Itwillnotadjustthe baud rate and should be considered a “dumb” peripheral. It communicates with1start,8data,and0,1or2stopbits.

ConnecttheModemtotheMBTSasfollows: 1. Connect the unit to an external modem

by attaching a standard RS-232 modem cable to the appropriate serial commu-nications port on both the unit and the modem.

2. Connect the modem to a telephone line, then energize the modem.

The modem attached to the MBTS must have the followingATcommandconfiguration:

E0 NoEcho

Q1 Don’t return result code

&D3 OntoOFFDTR,hangupandreset

&S0 DSRalwayson

&C1 DCDONwhendetected

S0=2 Answeronsecondring

Thefollowingcommandsmayalsoberequiredatthe modem:

&Q6 Constant DTE to DCE

N0 Answeronlyatspecifiedspeed

W Disableserialdatarateadjust

\Q3 Bidirectional RTS/CTS relay

&B1 Fixedserialportrate

S37 Desired line connection speed

Path: Comm menu

Figure 4-13 Communications Dialog Screen


4–19

Figure 4-14 Expanded Communication Dialog Screen

Figure 4-15 Terminal Window

When connected to another terminal device, the Terminal Window allows the user to send mes-sages or commands. Outgoing communications are displayed in the top pane and incoming messages aredisplayedinthebottomtwopanes,inASCIItextandHEXformat.

TherearesomevariationsintheATcommandssup-ported by modem manufacturers. Refer to the hard-wareuserdocumentation fora list of supportedATcommands and direction on issuing these commands.

OSCILLOGRAPH SETUP

The oscillographic recorder provides comprehen-sivedatarecordingofallmonitoredwaveforms,andstatus inputs storing up to 248 cycles of data. The total record length is user-configurable from 1 to 16 partitions.

The number of samples per cycle used to store the data is user selectable. The number of samples per cyclethatcanbeselectedare16or32(50or60Hz).The number of samples selected effects the length of the data that can be saved and its resolution. The lowerthenumberofsamples,thelongertherecordlengththatcanbestored(butatalowerresolution).

The oscillographic recorder can be triggered by a designated control/status input (usually a MBTS initiate input), an automatically initiated signal, a trip output, a manual transfer signal, serial communica-tions or manually by the user.

When untriggered, the recorder continuously stores waveform data, thereby keeping themost recentdata in memory. When triggered, the recorder stores pre-trigger data, then continues to store data in memory for a user-defined, post-trigger delay period. The records may be analyzed using ISScom®, and arealsoavailableinCOMTRADEfileformat.

Setup Oscillograph Recorder NOTE: Communication must be established

withthetargetMBTSforthisprocedure.When not connected to the MBTS the Send selection does not save the Oscil-lograph Recorder settings to an open file.

To setup the Oscillograph Recorder perform the following:

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menuselect System/Oscillograph/Setup. ISScom will display the OscillographSetupscreen(Figure4-16).


4–20

Number of Partitions

Number of Cycles per Each Partition

1 124 Cycles2 80 Cycles3 60 Cycles4 48 Cycles5 40 Cycles6 32 Cycles7 28 Cycles8 24 Cycles9 24 Cycles10 20 Cycles11 20 Cycles12 16 Cycles13 16 Cycles14 16 Cycles15 12 Cycles16 12 Cycles

Table 4-2 Recorder Partitions

2. Select the Number of Records (Parti-tions).

The recorder’s memory may be parti-tioned into 1 to 16 partitions. The MBTS Oscillograph Recorder memory buffer is fixed and contains room for a finite num-ber of cycles of recorded data. Consider Table4-2whendeterminingthenumberof Oscillograph records, The number of cycles of recorded data is directly related to the number of records selected.

NOTE: Table 4-2 is based on 32 samples per second. For other sample rates thenumber of cycles per partition has to be scaled accordingly.

3. Select the desired Trigger Inputs and Trigger Outputs.

The recorder can be triggered remotely through serial communications using ISScom®, or automatically using pro-grammed status inputs or outputs.

4. Select the Post Trigger Delay.

Apost-triggerdelayof5%to95%mustbe specified. After triggering, the re-corderwillcontinuetostoredatafortheprogrammed portion of the total record beforere-armingforthenextrecord.Forexample,asettingof80%willresultinarecordwith20%pre-triggerdata,and80%post-triggerdata.

5. Select the Oscillograph Samples per Cycle.

The number of data samples per cycle can be selected either 16 or 32 samples per cycle.

6. Select Send,ISScomwilldisplayaOscil-lograph Setup Sent Confirmation Screen (Figure4-16).



4–21

Figure 4-16 Setup Oscillograph Recorder

Figure 4-17 Oscillograph Setup Sent Confirmation Screen


4–22

Figure 4-18 Sequence Of Events Setup

SEQUENCE OF EVENTS RECORDER SETUP

Protective function Pickup, Trip, Dropout and/or Out-put/Input Pickup or Dropout are selected to trigger the Sequence of Events Recorder.

Setup Sequence of Events Recorder NOTE: Communication must be established

withthetargetMBTSforthisprocedure.When not connected to the MBTS the Save selection does not save the Se-quence of Event settings to the open file.

To setup the Sequence of Events Recorder perform thefollowing:

1. FromtheISScom® Main Screen menu select System/Sequence of Event Recorder/Setup. ISScom will displaythe Sequence of Events Setup screen (Figure4-18).

2. Select the desired Inputs and Outputs, then select Save. ISScom will dis-play a Send Changes to Unit Screen (Figure4-19).

Figure 4-19 Sequence of Events Send Changes to Unit Screen



4–23

4.2 System Setup

NOTE: SetupRecord Forms are contained inAppendix A.TheSetupRecordFormtables list the MBTS parameter settings choices for each feature and function.

The System Setup consists of defining all pertinent information regarding the system quantities. The SetupSystemdialogscreen(Figure4-20) isac-cessed through the System menu (System/Setup/Setup System). Regardless of the functions that are enabled or disabled, all Setup System values are required to be entered. Several MBTS func-tions require the proper setting of these values for correct operation.

MBTS Setup SystemTheNominalFrequencyof50or60HzandtheCTSecondaryRating(1or5Amp)hasbeenconfiguredat the factory and is indicated (grayed out and can notbechanged).However,whenanISScom®“NewFile“isopened,theNominalFrequencyandCTSec-ondaryRatingmaybeselected.Attemptingtowritea file to an MBTS that is not configured the same, willresultinISScomreturninganerrormessage.


TosetuptheMBTSSystemperformthefollowing:

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menuselect System/Setup/Setup System. ISScomwilldisplaytheSetupSystemscreen(Figure4-20).

NOTE: See Section 4.3, System Diagrams for TypicalVTThree-LineConnectionDia-grams.

2. EntertheNominalVoltage.

TheNominalVoltagesetting(50to140V)isneededforpropernormalizationofperunitquantities.NominalVoltageforthefollowingvoltageconnections isasfollows:

• Line-to-LineVTconnections

VNominal = VBus/VTRatio

• Line-to-GroundVTconnections

VNominal = V Bus / (e3 VTRatio)

3. EntertheNominalCurrent.Thesecond-ary CT current of the phase CTS.

4. Select the Phase Rotation. (ABC orACB).

NOTE: See Section 4.3, System Diagrams for Typical VT Three-Line ConnectionDiagrams.

5. Select the S1/S2 VT Configuration button. ISScom displays theS1/S2VTConfiguration selection screen (Figure4-21).

TheS1/S2VTConfigurationallowstheselection of the Source 1 and Source 2 voltage transformer configuration. When phase-ground (three -phase) is selected, the phase-to-phase single phase choices are grayed out and only one phase to ground choice can be made. When phase-to-phase (three-phase) is select-ed, the phase-to-ground single-phase choices are grayed-out and only one phase-to-phase choice can be made. Both Source 1 and Source 2 must have thesameVTConfiguration.

6. SelectthedesiredS1andS2VTConfigu-ration, then select OK, ISScom returns to the Setup System screen.

7. Select the Bus VT Configuration button. ISScom displays theBusVTConfigura-tionselectionscreen(Figure4-23).

Some selections are grayed-out depend-ing on the Source 1/Source 2 selection. The Bus VT Configuration must havethe same phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase selection as the Source 1/Source 2 configuration. If either of three-phase selections are chosen for the Source 1/Source 2, then the bus must have the same configuration. However, if theSource 1/Source 2 single-phase selec-tion is chosen then the bus configuration can be either the same single-phase or the three-phase.

Forexample,iftheSource1/Source2selec-tion is phase-to-phase (three phase), then the bus must use the same phase-to-phase (three-phase) configuration. If the Source 1/Source 2 selection is phase-to-phase (single phase BC), then the bus choices willbephase-to-phase(singlephaseBC)or phase-to-phase (three phase).

8. SelectthedesiredBusVTConfiguration,then select OK,ISScomwillreturntotheSetup System screen.


4–24

Figure 4-20 Setup System Dialog Screen

Figure 4-21 S1/S2 VT Configuration Selection Screen


4–25

9. Select the S1/S2 CT Configuration button. ISScom displays the S1/S2 CT ConfigurationSelectionscreen (Figure4-22). The S1/S2 CT Confguration Selec-tionisbasedonwhethertheS1andS2CTs are connected to the rear terminals of the MBTS. The default selection is “Yes”whichincludesthecurrentvaluesfor S1 and S2 on the Single Line Diagram (Figure 3-20). Selecting “No” removesthe S1 and S2 current elements from the Single Line Diagram.

10. EntertheVTandCTratios.

TheVTandCTratiosareusedonlyformonitoring and displaying system pri-mary quantities.

• RatioofthePhaseVTs Example:13,800V:120V=

13,800/120 = 115 : 1

• RatioofPhaseCTs Example: 3,000: 5 = 3000/5

= 600: 1

NOTE: If neither pulsed or latched output is enabled,thentheoutputcontactwillde-faulttotheNormalMode.NormalModemaintains the output contact energized as long as the condition that caused it tooperateexists.After theactuatingconditioniscleared,thecontactwillresetafter the programmed seal-in time has elapsed.

11. Select Outputs from the LATCHED OUTPUTS section of the System Setup screen. ISScom®willdisplaytheLatchedOutputsSelectionScreen(Figure4-24).

The Latched Outputs selection screen allowstheusertoselectwhichoutputsare latched when they are activated.Outputs 1 through 4 are the Trip and Close command outputs for the breakers and cannot be latched (the pulse length of these outputs are set in the Common Settings screen Figure 4-35). Theseoutputs remain latched until reset by an ISScomcommandorbytheHMIoftheMBTS. When selected as Latched the outputwillbegrayedoutinthePulsedOutput Selection screen.

12. Select the desired outputs to be Latched, then select OK,ISScomwillreturntotheSetup System screen.

NOTE: If neither pulsed or latched output is enabled,thentheoutputcontactwillde-faulttotheNormalMode.NormalModemaintains the output contact energized as long as the condition that caused it tooperateexists.After theactuatingconditioniscleared,thecontactwillresetafter the programmed seal-in time has elapsed.

13. Select Outputs from the PULSED OUTPUTS section of the System Setup screen.ISScomwilldisplaythePulsed OutputsSelectionScreen(Figure4-25).

The Pulsed Outputs selection screen allowstheusertoselectwhichoutputsarepulsedwhentheyareactivated.ThepulsewidthisdefinedintheOutputSealin time section of Figure 4-20, SetupSystem Dialog Screen. If pulse MBTS operationisselected,outputwilldropoutafter the seal-in delay expires, even if the conditionwhichcausedtheMBTStopickup is still out of band. When selected as Pulsedtheoutputwillbegrayedoutinthe Latched Output Selection screen.

Outputs 1 through 4 are the trip and close command outputs for the breakers, the pulse length of these outputs are set in the Common Settings screen (Figure4-35).

14. Select the desired outputs to be Pulsed, then select OK,ISScomwillreturntotheSetup System screen.

15. Select Input Status from the INPUT ACTIVE STATE section of the System Setup screen. ISScomwill display theInput Active States Selection Screen(Figure4-26).

ThisInputActiveStatesselectionscreenallowstheusertoselecttheactiveinputstate for each input. Inputs 1, 2, 4 and 5 are the breaker status inputs whichhave predefined terminals for “a” and “b” contacts. Checking the inputs for the ActiveInputOpenparameterdesignatesthe “operated” state established by an opening rather than closing an external contact.


4–26

Figure 4-22 S1/S2 CT Configuration Selection Screen

For example: Checking Inputs 3 and6 for theActive InputClose parameterdesignated the operated state of the breakerTOC,52PSor52Hintelligencecontactthatisclosedwhenthebreakeris fully racked-in. If the breaker is not fully racked-in(intestposition),theM-4272willblock any type of transfer.

16. SelectthedesiredActiveInputStateforeach Input, then select OK, ISScom®willreturn to the Setup System screen.

17. Select the desired Duplicate Outputs.

The Duplicate Outputs Selection feature (Figure4-20)allowsanadditionaloutputto be selected that will operate at thesame time as the trip or close commands are issued to their assigned outputs. The duplicate output can provide additional trip and close outputs as needed.

18. Select the Output Seal In Time for each Output (2 to 8160 Cycles).

The Output Seal-in Time provides the userwiththeabilitytoindividuallyenterthe seal-in time of each output. This setting is only used if the output has not been selected as a latched output. The seal-in time defines the time period that the output is closed even if the condition no longer exists.

19. When all Setup System parameters have been entered/selected, then select Save.

20. FromtheISScommainscreenmenuse-lect System/Profile/Switching Method. ISScomwilldisplaytheSwitchingProfileMethodscreen(Figure3-47).

21. SelectthedesiredSwitchingMethod.

• If“Manual”wasselected,thennofurtheraction is required.

• If“InputContact”wasselectedthesta-tusofinputcontactsIN17andIN18willdetermind the active profile as indicated in Table 4-3.

Input 17 Input 18 SelectionOpen Open Profile 1

Closed Open Profile 2Open Closed Profile 3

Closed Closed Profile 4

Table 4-3 Input Activated Profile

NOTE: Assumingactivestateisclosed.

Figure 4-23 Bus VT Configuration Selection Screen


4–27

Figure 4-26 Input Active States Selection Screen

Figure 4-24 Latched Outputs Selection Screen Figure 4-25 Pulsed Outputs Selection Screen

NOTE: Ifneitherpulsedorlatchedoutputisenabled,thentheoutputcontactwilldefaulttotheNormalMode.NormalModemaintainstheoutputcontactenergizedaslongastheconditionthatcausedittooperateexists.Aftertheactuatingconditioniscleared,thecontactwillresetafterthepro-grammed seal-in time has elapsed.


4–28

Figure 4-27 Three-Phase Wye-Wye VT Three-Line Connection Diagram

M-4272 TypicalConnection Diagram

A

B

C

MOTOR MOTOR

52S1 52S2

A

B

C

A B C A B C

SOURCE 1 (S1)

VT-S1 Three VT Wye-Wye Connection VT-S2 Three VT Wye-Wye Connection

VT-B Three VT Wye-Wye ConnectionM-4272

STATION BUS SYSTEM

1 CT-S1 and CT-S2 are single phase CTs. They both must be connected to the same phase,either Phase A, Phase B or Phase C.

SOURCE 2 (S2)

83

81

79

M-4272VA

VB

VC

78

80

82

89

87

85

M-4272VA

VB

VC

84

86

88

959391

VA VB VC

90 92 94

IS1

1

M-4272

CT-S1 SinglePhase CT

97

96

IS21M-4272


99

98

4.3 System Diagrams


4–29

Figure 4-28 Three-Phase Wye-Primary/Wye Secondary, One Phase Grounded VT Three-Line Connection Diagram


A

B

C

MOTOR MOTOR

52S1 52S2

A

B

C

A B C A B C

SOURCE 1 (S1)

VT-S1 Three VT Wye-WyeAlternate Connection


VT-B Three VT Wye-WyeAlternate Connection

M-4272

STATION BUS SYSTEM


SOURCE 2 (S2)

83

81

79

M-4272VA

VB

VC

78

80

82

89

87

85

M-4272VA

VB

VC

84

86

88

959391

VA VB VC

90 92 94

IS1

1

M-4272


97

96

IS21M-4272


99

98


4–30

Figure 4-29 Three-Phase Open Delta VT Three-Line Connection Diagram


A

B

C

MOTOR MOTOR

52S1 52S2

A

B

C

A B C A B C

STATION BUS SYSTEM

1 CT-S1 and CT-S2 are single phase CTs. They both must be connected to the same phase,either Phase A, Phase B or Phase C respectively.

VT-S1 Two VT Open-Delta Connection VT-S2 Two VT Open-Delta Connection

VT-B Two VT Open-Delta Connection

SOURCE 1 (S1) SOURCE 2 (S2)

83

81

79

M-4272VAB

VBC

VCA

78

80

82

89

87

85

M-4272VAB

VBC

VCA

84

86

88

959391

M-4272

VAB VBC VCA

90 92 94

IS1

1

M-4272


97

96

IS21M-4272


99

98


4–31

Figure 4-30 Single Phase, Phase-Ground VT Three-Line Connection Diagram


A

B

C

MOTOR MOTOR

52S1 52S2

A

B

C

A B C A B C

STATION BUS SYSTEM


VT-S2 One VTPhase-GroundConnection

2VT-S1 One VTPhase-GroundConnection

2

2

VT-B One VTPhase-GroundConnection

2

VT-S1, VT-S2 and VT-B are single phase VTs. They all must be connected tothe same phase, either Phase A-To-Ground, Phase B-To-Ground or Phase C-To-Ground.

SOURCE S1 (S1) SOURCE 2 (S2)

83

81

79

M-4272VA

VB

VC

78

80

82

89

87

85

M-4272VA

VB

VC

84

86

88

959391

M-4272

VA VB VC

90 92 94

IS1

1

M-4272


97

96

IS21M-4272


99

98


4–32

Figure 4-31 Single-Phase, Phase-Phase VT Three-Line Connection Diagram


A

B

C

MOTOR MOTOR

52S1 52S2

A

B

C

A B C A B C

SOURCE 1 (S1)

STATION BUS SYSTEM


VT-S2 One VTPhase-PhaseConnection

2VT-S1 One VTPhase-PhaseConnection

2

2

VT-B One VTPhase-PhaseConnection

2

VT-S1, VT-S2 and VT-B are single phase VTs. They all must be connected to thesame phase, either Phase A-To-Phase B, Phase B-To-Phase C or Phase A-To -Phase C.

SOURCE 2 (S2)

83

81

79

M-4272VAB

VBC

VCA

78

80

82

89

87

85

M-4272VAB

VBC

VCA

84

86

88

959391

M-4272

VAB VBC VCA

90 92 94

IS1

1

M-4272


97

96

IS21M-4272


99

98


4–33

Figure 4-32 Single-Phase Source Side, Phase-Ground, Three-Phase Bus Side, Wye-Wye Three-Line Connection Diagram


A

B

C

MOTOR MOTOR

52S1 52S2

A

B

C

A B C A B C


STATION BUS SYSTEM




2

2 VT-S1 and VT-S2 are single phase VTs. They both must be connected to thesame phase, either Phase A-To-Ground, Phase B-To-Ground or Phase C-To -Ground.

VT-B Three VT Wye-Wye Connection

83

81

79

M-4272VA

VB

VC

78

80

82

89

87

85

M-4272VA

VB

VC

84

86

88

M-4272

959391

VA VB VC

90 92 94

IS1

1

M-4272


97

96

IS21M-4272


99

98


4–34

Figure 4-33 Single-Phase Source Side, Phase-Phase, Three-Phase Bus Side Open Delta Three-Line Connection Diagram


A

B

C

MOTOR MOTOR

52S1 52S2

A

B

C

A B C A B C

SOURCE 1 (S1) SOURCE 2(S2)

STATION BUS SYSTEM




2

2 VT-S1 and VT-S2 are single phase VTs. They both must be connected to the samephase, either Phase A-To-Phase B, Phase B-To-Phase C or Phase A-To -Phase C.


959391

M-4272

VAB VBC VCA

90 92 94

83

81

79

M-4272VAB

VBC

VCA

78

80

82

89

87

85

M-4272VAB

VBC

VCA

84

86

88

IS1

1

M-4272


97

96

IS21M-4272


99

98


4–35

4.4 System Setpoints

System SetpointsThe System Setpoints consist of defining all per-tinent information regarding the system setpoints and transfer logic settings. The M-4272 System Setpointsdialogscreen(Figure4-34)isaccessedthrough the System menu (System/Setup/Set-points).

NOTE: Configuration Record Forms are con-tained in Appendix A. The Configura-tionRecordFormtableslisttheSystemSetpoint parameters and the settings choices for each function.

The MBTS System Setpoints consists of entering thefollowing:

• SelectingTransfer Logic and conditionsincludingAutomatic,ManualTransferset-tings

• Enabling the functionsandentering thedesired settings

• Designatingtheoutputcontactseachfunc-tionwilloperate,andwhichcontrol/statusinputswillenableorblockthetransfer.

The choices include 11 programmable output con-tacts (OUT5–OUT16) and six breaker status inputs (IN1–IN6)forSource1andSource2,plus12otherprogrammableinputs.Ablockorfixedtimetransferchoice for bus fuse loss logic operation.

ThetransfersettingsforAutomaticTransfers,ManualTransfers, Common Settings, control/status inputs and output contact assignments must be chosen be-fore entering the settings for the individual functions.

Each of the individual submenus are described in thefollowingpages.Settingsfordisabledfunctionsdo not apply. Some menu and setting screens do not appear for functions that are disabled. The System Setpoints can only be entered using the M-3872software.SeeSection1.2,M-4272 Motor Bus Transfer System for a listing of those Settings, FunctionsandStatusvaluesthatareavailablefromthefrontpaneldisplayandHMI.

TheSystemSetpointsdialogscreencontainstwosettinggroups,theTransferSettingsandtheFunc-tion Settings. The Transfer Settings group contains the settings that are necessary for transferring the motorbusloadquicklyandsafelyfromonepowersourcetoanotherpowersource.

TheFunctionSettingsgroupcontainssettingsthatcan initiate the transfer or are used as logic inputs to the transfer logic.

AtthebottomoftheSystemSetpointsdialogscreentherearetwoadditionalselections:

• Display All —Selecting theDisplayAllbutton displays the All Setpoints Table dialog screen (Figure 3-13).This dialogscreen contains the settings for each MBTSfunctionwithinasinglewindowtoallowscrollingthroughallMBTSsetpointand configuration values.

• Configure — Selecting the Configure but-ton displays the Configure dialog screen (Figure3-14),whichcontainsachartofprogrammed input and output contacts, in ordertoallowscrollingthroughallMBTSoutput and blocking input configurations.

Bothdialogscreens(AllSetpointsTableandConfig-ure),featureJumpCommandButtonswhichallowtheusertojumpfromascrollingdialogscreentoanindividual MBTS function dialog screen and return tothescrollingdialogscreen.Allavailableparam-eterscanbereviewedorchangedwhen jumpingto a MBTS configuration dialog screen from either scrolling dialog screen.

The Transfer Settings group includes four menus. The Common Settings submenu contains settings that are used by the AutomaticTransfer,ManualTransfer and Automatic Trip Logic. For example,some of the common settings are the Breaker Clos-ingTime,TripandClosePulseLengthsandNewSourceVoltageLimits.TheseandothersettingsareusedwhetheranAutomaticorManualTransfer isperformed. Therefore, the settings in the Common Settings submenu must be entered for a transfer to operate correctly.


4–36

TRANSFER SETTINGS

COMMON SETTINGS (CS)

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Common Settings

The Common Settings selection from the Transfer Settingsgroup (Figure4-34)opens theCommonFunctionSettingsDialogscreen(Figure4-35),whichincludestheCommonFunctionSettings,InputsandOutputs tabs.

Figure 4-34 System Setpoints Dialog Screen


4–37

COMMON SETTINGS/COMMON FUNCTION SETTINGS TAB

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Common Settings

Figure4-35,illustratestheMBTSCommonFunc-tion Settings found under theCommon FunctionSettings Tab on the Common Function Settingsdialog screen.

Common Settings/Transfer ModeTransfer Mode can be selected as either Simultane-ous or Sequential:

• Simultaneous — With a transfer initiated, within10msoftransferinitiate,allthreemethodsof transfer,Fast, In-PhaseandResidualVoltageTransferareimmediately

enabledtosuperviseclosureofthenewsource breaker without waiting for thebreaker status contact confirmation that the old source breaker has opened. Atthe same instant, the commands for the oldsourcebreakerand thenewsourcebreaker to trip and close are sent simul-taneously if and only if the phase angle between the motor bus and the newsourceiswithinthedeltaphaseanglelimitfortheFastTransferMethodimmediatelyupontransferinitiation.HoweveronlytheFixedTimeTransferisenabled30cyclesafter the old source breaker has opened. Refer to Appendix F, Transfer Logic Time Sequence for Timing Sequence of Transfer Logic in Simultaneous Transfer Mode.

Figure 4-35 Common Function Settings Dialog Screen


4–38

• Sequential — With a transfer initiated, the command to trip the old source breaker issentwithin10ms.Uponconfirmationfrom the old source breaker status con-tact that the old source breaker is open. Within 4ms of receipt of this confirmation, allthreetransfermethods,Fast,In-PhaseTransfer and Residual Voltage Transferare enabled to supervise closure of the newsourcebreakerandtheFixedTimeTransfer is enabled 30 cycles later. Refer to Appendix F, Transfer Logic Time Se-quence for Timing Sequence of Transfer Logic in Sequential Transfer Mode.

Common Settings/Upper-Lower Voltage Limit New SourceThis setting defines the upper and lower voltagelimitsofthenewsource.Ifthenewsourcevoltageisnotwithintheselimits,thenatransferisblocked.

If a transfer is blocked and an initiate transfer sig-nal is received, the transfer is not started (no trip or close command is sent to the supply breakers). Thispreventsatransfertoanewsourcethatdoesnot meet the voltage requirements established by theUpperandLowerVoltageLimits.Theresultisthatthemotorbuswilllosepowerwhentheprotec-tive MBTS trips the supply breaker and initiates a transfertothenewsourceatthesametime.Sincetheexistingpower isbeing tripped (due tosomeabnormality)andthenewsourceisoutsideofthesettingrange,atransferwillnotoccurandthemotorbuswilllosepower.

Common Settings/Breaker Closing TimeThe Breaker Closing Time setting defines the breakerclosingtime(thetimeperiodfromwhentheclosecommandisissuedtowhenthenewsourcebreaker status contact closes) of the Source 1 and Source 2 breakers that the MBTS is controlling. The breaker closing time is used during an In-phase transfer. The in-phase transfer sends the close com-mand in advance of the phase coinsidence based on this breaker time and the rate of change of the frequency of the decaying motor bus.

The purpose of using the breaker closing time is tohavethebreakeractuallyclosejustatthetimeof the phase coinsidence setting is in cycles, so timechangesbasedonfrequency.TheAdaptationfeature,whenselectedcalculates theS1andS2breaker closing times based on the average time of the Last 8 breaker operations. When initially se-lected,theselectedbreakerclosingtimewillbeuseduntil eight breaker operations have been averaged. Breaker Closing Time setpoints cannot be changed whilethisfeatureisenabled.

Common Settings/S1(S2) Breaker Closing Time DeviationThe S1(S2) Breaker Closing Time Deviation setting establishes when the breaker has exceeded thenormal expected variations, plus or minus from the programmed closing time.

When the Breaker Closing Time Deviation setting is exceeded a “S1/S2 Breaker Closing Time Out of Range” indicator on the System Status section of theSecondaryMeteringandStatusscreenwillbeactivated.Activationofthisindicatorwouldindicatethat the breaker may require maintenance.

Common Settings/S1(S2) Breaker 52a & 52b Position DisagreementThe S1 Breaker 52a & 52b Position Disagreement settings define the time the 52a and 52b breaker statuscontactsofthesamebreakerareallowedtobe in the same state before the MBTS responds to that condition. If the 52a and 52b contacts on the same breaker are both closed or both open, then transfers are blocked. The Pickup Time is the time that both breaker status contacts are either closed or both open before the unit responds to that condi-tion.ThePickupTimeallowsforpossibleoverlapofthe contacts as the breaker changes position. The Dropout Time Delay is the time period for the MBTS to consider the breaker status contact inputs in the same state after they are no longer in the same state.Thissettingisonlyapplicablewhenboththe52a and 52b breaker status contacts are connected to the MBTS.


4–39

Common Settings/Incomplete Transfer Lockout TimeThe Incomplete Transfer Lockout Time setting estab-lishesthetimeperiodinwhichanAutomaticTransfermust be completed. The time period is defined as the timeatwhich thetransfer is initiateduntil thetransfer is complete.

IfatransferisnotcompletedwithintheIncomplete Transfer Lockout TimeperiodthefollowingMBTSactionswilloccur:

1. Thestatusofthetargetbreakerwillbesetby this timer.

2. TheMBTSwill stopattempting tofinishthe present transfer.

3. TheMBTSwillenterintoalockoutcondi-tion.

4. The Lockout Blocking contact (output 8) will change state and any subsequenttransferinitiatecommandswillbeignored.

This feature keeps the unit from operating until the cause of the incomplete transfer is determined. It also prevents the unit from un-expectedly closing at alatertimewhentheconditionswouldallowaclose.

Common Settings/Local Manual Initiate Time DelayThe Local Manual Initiate Time Setting establishes the time delay before a locally initiated Manual Transfer actuates.

The manual local transfer can be initiated in either the Remote or Local mode of operation. The purpose ofthistimedelayistoallowpersonnelinitiatingthetransfertomoveawayfromthefrontoftheswitch-gear thatwould be operating during the transfer.This assumes that the M-4272 is physically located on theswitchgear.Typically,manual transfersoc-curwhen themotor bus load is being transferedfrom one source to another and the conditions are stableandatimedelaywouldhavenoeffectonifthe transfer is successful. This feature should not be used if there is any difference in frequency or fluctuatingvoltageamplitudes.

Common Settings/Remote Manual Initiate Time Delay CAUTION:ThisfeatureshouldNOTbeusedifthere isanydifference in frequencyorfluctuatingvoltage amplitudes.

The Remote Manual Initiate Time Setting estab-lishes the time delay before a remotely initiated Manual Transfer actuates.

The Remote Manual Transfer can be initiated in Remote mode of operation. The purpose of this time delayistoallowpersonnelinitiatingthetransfertomove away from the front of the switchgear thatwould be operating during the transfer. This as-sumes that the remote manual initiate pushbutton is physically located on the switchgear.Typically,manualtransfersoccurwhenthemotorbusloadisbeing transferred from one source to another and theconditionsarestableandthetimedelaywouldhave no effect if the transfer is successful.

Common Settings/Blocking After Transfer TimeTheBlockingAfterTransferTime setting establishes the time delay after a transfer has been completed before another transfer is possible. During this time period, all initiate commands are ignored. The initi-ate commands are not stored or remembered, the initiatecommandwillonlyberecognizedafterthisblock time. The purpose of this feature is to prevent an immediate automatic transfer back to an unviable source.Inaddition,thenewsourcevoltagemaydipdue to the motor bus load being connected. This dip in voltage could cause the 27B Bus Phase Under-voltage (internal or external) to trigger a transfer.

Common Settings/Trip Command and Close Command Pulse LengthPath: System/Setup/Setpoints/Common Settings

The Trip Command and Close Command Pulse Length settings establish the length of the trip and close outputs.

Trip/Close Circuit (TCM/CCM) Open ConditionThis feature works in conjunction with the Trip/Close Circuit (TCM/CCM) monitor function. If the Trip/Close Circuit function is enabled and detects anopen condition this featurewhenenabledwillblock any transfers.

Common Settings Save/Cancel — The Save se-lection(Figure4-35)savestheCommonFunctionSettings Tab Settings either to an open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previ-ous open screen.


4–40

COMMON FUNCTION SETTINGS INPUTS TAB

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Common Settings/Input

Figure4-36,illustratestheMBTSCommonFunctionSettings found under the Inputs Tab on the Common FunctionSettingsdialogscreen.

Common Settings/Breaker Status InputsThe Breaker Status Inputs section provides the user withtheabilitytoselectthetypeof52breakerstatuscontact being used for Source 1 and Source 2. One of the three choices presented must be selected, the

52a, or 52b or both 52a and 52b. Only one choice for each breaker can be selected. The selection must match the physical connections to the unit for proper operation.

The 52a and 52b breaker status input contacts need to be breaker auxiliary contacts that change state wheneverthebreakercloses/opensandwhenthebreaker is in test or fully racked-in (connected) posi-tions.Duringcommissioning,whenabustransfertest is simulated, the M-4272 needs to see the 52aand52bcontactschangestateevenwhenthebreaker is in test position.

Figure 4-36 Common Function Settings Inputs Dialog Screen


4–41

Figure 4-37 Transfer Block #1 Input Dialog Screen

Common Settings/External Control Inputs ConfigurationThe External Control Inputs Configuration section includes four selections:

• TransferBlock#1

• TransferBlock#2

• TransferBlock#3

• ExternalStatusReset

Common Settings/Transfer Block #1 (#2, #3)TheTransfer Block #1, #2 and #3 provide threepossible inputs to be used to block transfers. When theTransferBlock#1buttonisselectedtheTransferBlock#1Inputsdialogscreenisdisplayed(Figure4-37).

The desired input or inputs for blocking can be se-lected.ThesameistrueforTransferBlock#2andTransfer Block #3 dialog screens.Once an inputhasbeenselecteditwillbegrayedoutontheotherdialog screens since it has already been assigned.

Common Settings/External Status ResetThisfeatureallowstheusertoselecttheexternalinput to be used to reset the system status and any selected latched outputs. When the External Status Reset button is selected the External Status Reset InputSelectiondialogscreenisdisplayed(Figure4-38).

Only one input can be selected. When an input is selecteditwillbegrayedoutinotherdialogboxeswhichallowselectionofinputsfordifferentfunctions.

Common Function Inputs Save/Cancel — The Save selection (Figure4-36) saves theCommonFunction Settings InputTab settings either to anopen file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous open screen.

Figure 4-38 External Status Input Selection Dialog Screen


4–42

COMMON SETTINGS OUTPUTS TAB

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Common Settings/Outputs

Figure4-39,illustratestheMBTSCommonFunctionSettings found under the Outputs Tab on the Com-monFunctionSettingsdialogscreen.

Common Settings/Auto Fast Transfer Ready OutputsThe Auto Fast Transfer Ready Outputs feature(Figure4-39)allowstheusertoselectoneormoreoutputs(Figure4-40)toindicatewhentheAutomaticFasttransferisready.

TheconditionsthatarenecessaryforaFastTransferto be ready to execute are:

• Nolockout/blockingconditionsexist.

• ThephaseanglebetweentheMotorBusandtheNewSourceiswithinlimitsetting.

• TheDeltaVoltagebetweentheMotorBusandtheNewSourceiswithinlimitsetting.

• TheDeltaFrequencybetweentheMotorBus and theNewSource iswithin limitsetting.

If a transfer is initiated and there are no Lock/Block-ing conditions or the conditions for anAuto FastTransfer are not true, then a Fast transferwouldnot occur.The trip commandwould be sent, butthe close commandwould not occur until condi-tions would allow an in-phase, residual or fixedtime transfer.

Common Function Settings/Manual Fast Transfer/Hot Parallel Ready OutputsTheManualFastTransfer/HotParallelReadyOut-putsfeature(Figure4-39)allowstheusertoselectoneormoreoutputs(Figure4-41)toindicatewhenthe ManualFastTransfer/HotParallelReadyOutputs are ready.

The conditions that are necessary for a Manual FastTransfer/HotParallel to be ready to executeareasfollows:

• NoLockout/Blockingconditionsexist.

• ThePhaseAnglebetweentheMotorBusandtheNewSourceiswithinlimitsetting.

• TheDeltaVoltagebetweentheMotorBusandtheNewSourceiswithinlimitsetting.

• TheDeltaFrequencybetweentheMotorBus and theNewSource iswithin limitsetting.

If a transfer is initiated and there are no Lock/Blocking conditions or any of the conditions for aManualFastTransfer arenot true, thenaFastTransferwouldnotoccur.TheManualTransfertripcommandwouldbesent,buttheclosecommandwouldnotoccuruntiltheconditionswouldallowanIn-Phase,ResidualorFixedTimeTransfer.FortheHotParallelTransfer,whenaManualHotParallelTransfer is attempted and one of the parameters is outside of the setting, the close command is not sent if transfer conditions are not met. If conditions are not met before the incomplete transfer block timer expires, then an Incomplete Transfer Blocked Indicationwillbedisplayed.

Common Settings/Transfer Ready OutputsTheTransferReadyOutputsfeature(Figure4-39)allowstheusertoselectoneormoreoutputs(Figure4-42)toindicatewhentheTransfer Ready Outputs are ready.

Figure 4-42 Transfer Ready Output Selection Dialog Screen


4–43

Figure 4-39 Common Function Settings Outputs Dialog Screen

Figure 4-41 Manual Fast Transfer/Hot Parallel Ready Output Selection Dialog Screen

Figure 4-40 Auto Fast Transfer Ready Output Selection Dialog Screen


4–44

The Transfer ready indication only indicates that there are no blocking conditions, it does not indicate theDeltaPhaseAngle,DeltaFrequency,orDeltaVoltageparametersarewithin thesettingsof theAutomaticorManualTransfersettings.IfatransferisinitiatedwhentherewereanyLockout/Blockingconditionspresent,thenthetransferwillbeblocked.Thetripcommandwouldnot be sent.

One or more outputs can be selected to indicate whenanAutomaticorManualTransferisready.ATransferReadyindicationisgivenwhenthereareno Lockout/Blocking conditions. Lockout/Blocking conditionsthatwillpreventatransferare:

• VoltageBlocking—Ifpriortoatransfer,thenewsourcevoltageexceedstheUpperorLowerVoltageLimits,alltransfersareblocked as long as the voltage remains outside these limits.

• ExternalBlocking—Whenanyexternalblocking control input contact is closed, all transfers are blocked.

• Incomplete Transfer Lockout — Blocksany transfer initiated by a protective MBTS initiate, or an automatic initiated transfer or a manual transfer if the last transfer wasnotcompletedwithinthetimedelay.Atimedelaycanbesetfrom50to3000Cycles. The MBTS remains in the lockout condition until manually reset.

• BusVTFuseLossBlocking—Transferis blocked if the user has selected Bus VTFuseLosstoblocktransfersandtheMBTSdetectsaBusVTFuseLoss(60FL).

• BothBreakersSameStateBlocking—Ifboth breaker status contacts are in the open state, due to an external operation that opens the second breaker whileleavingthefirstoneopen,andiftheAutoClose feature is not selected, no transfer sequence is initiated.

Furthermore,anysubsequentinitiationofatransfersequencewhilethebreakersarein this state is inhibited. If both breaker sta-tus contacts are closed due to an external operation that closes the second breaker while leavingthefirstoneclosed,andifthe auto trip feature is disabled, no transfer sequence is initiated.

• TransferinProcessBlocking—Whenatransfer is in process, any other transfer initiate inputs will be ignored until theoriginal transfer is complete.

• BlockingAfterTransfer—Afteratransferhas been completed, any additional trans-fers are blocked for 0 to 8160 cycles, as selected by the user.

• Trip/CloseCircuitOpenBlocking—Trans-fer is blocked if the Trip or Close Circuit Open is detected.

• 52aand52bPositionDisagreementBlock-ing—Transfer isblockedwhenthe52aand 52b status input positions disagree (applicablewhenboth52aand52bstatusinputs are used).

Common Settings/Transfer Completed OutputsThe Transfer Completed Outputs feature (Figure4-39)allowstheusertoselectoneormoreoutputs(Figure4-43)toindicatewhichoutputistobeusedtoindicatewhenatransferhasbeencompleted.

Typically this output would be configured as alatchedoutputsoitwouldremainclosedlikeatar-get to indicate that a transfer had been completed.

Common Settings/Fast Transfer Load Shedding OutputsTheFastTransferLoadSheddingOutputsfeature(Figure4-39)allowstheusertoselectoneormoreoutputs(Figure4-44)toindicatewhichoutputistobeusedforFastTransferLoadShedding.

TheFastTransferLoadSheddingcommandissentat the same time as the Trip command for either Simultaneous or Sequential modes of transfer.

Common Settings/In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding OutputsThe In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding Outputs fea-ture(Figure4-39)allowstheusertoselectoneormoreoutputs(Figure4-45)toindicatewhichoutputis to be used for In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding.


4–45

The In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding command is sentattheendoftheFastTransfertimewindowifafast transfer has not been completed. The purpose of this load shedding output is to disconnect some loadssotherewillbeabetterpossibilityofcomplet-ing an In-Phase Transfer. There may be a load that wouldcausethemotorbustodecayveryquicklyifaFastTransferwasnotsuccessfulanditwouldbe better to disconnect that load so the rest of the motorbuswouldhaveabetterchancetocompleteanIn-Phasetransfer.AnotherpurposecouldbetodisconnectaverysensitiveloadifaFastTransferis not possible.

Common Settings/Load Shedding OutputsTheLoadSheddingOutputsfeature(Figure4-39)allowstheusertoselectoneormoreoutputs(Figure4-47)toindicatewhichoutputistobeusedforthisLoad Shedding.

TheLoadSheddingFunctionSelectionalsopro-vides the ability to select one of 5 choices to be used to perform this load shedding feature. Typically LoadSheddingoccursaftertheFastandIn-PhaseTransfers have not been successful.

Figure 4-43 Transfer Completed Output Selection Dialog Screen

Figure 4-44 Fast Transfer Load Shedding Output Selection Dialog Screen

FortheF27B#3,F81#1orF81R#1functions,whenthe settings are satisfied the selected load shedding outputisclosed.ForResidualVoltageTransfertheLoadSheddingOutput isclosedwhen themotorbusvoltagedropsbelowtheResidualVoltageLimit.TheclosecommandforResidualVoltageTransferis sent after the programmed load shedding time delay.FortheFixedTimeTransfertheLoadShed-dingOutputisclosedwhentheFixedTimeDelayhas timedout.Theclosecommand for theFixedTime Delay Transfer is sent after the programmed load shedding time delay.

Common Settings/Incomplete Transfer Outputs —TheIncompleteTransferOutputsfeature(Figure4-39)allowsusertoselectoneormoreoutputs(Fig-ure4-46)toindicatewhichoutputistobeusedtoindicatewhenatransferhasbeenincomplete.Typi-callythisoutputwouldbeconfiguredasalatchedoutput so it would remain closed like a target toindicate that a transfer has been incomplete.

Common Function Outputs Save/Cancel — The Save selection (Figure4-39) saves theCommonFunctionSettingsOutputsTabsettingseithertoanopen file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous open screen.


4–46

Figure 4-45 In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding Output Selection Dialog Screen

Figure 4-47 Load Shedding Output Selection Dialog Screen

Figure 4-46 Incomplete Transfer Outputs Selection Dialog Screen


4–47

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SETTINGS (ATS)

Path:System/Setup/Setpoints/AutomaticTransferSettings

TheAutomaticTransferSettingsselectionfromtheTransfer Settings group (Figure 4-34) opens theAutomaticTransferSettingsdialogscreen(Figure4-48),whichincludesthefollowingtabs:

• Setup

• FastTransfer

• In-PhaseTransfer

• ResidualVoltageTransfer

• FixedTimeTransfer

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SETTINGS SETUP TAB

Path:System/Setup/Setpoints/AutomaticTransferSettings/Setup

Figure4-48,illustratestheMBTSAutomaticTransferSettingsfoundundertheSetupTabontheAutomaticTransfer Settings dialog screen.

Automatic Transfer Settings Setup Tab/Auto Transfer ModeTheAutoTransferMode(Figure4-48)canbeDis-abled or Enabled. If Disable is selected and then Save is selected, then the remaining settings in theAutomaticTransferSettingsdialogscreenaregrayed out.

HMI Auto Transfer Mode Enable/DisableToenableordisableAutoTransferfromtheFrontPanelperformthefollowing:



ENTER ACCESS CODE 0





c. Go to Step 4.




AUTO TRANSFER AUTO_XFER man_xfer


AUTO TRANSFER disable enable

6. PresstheLeftorRightarrowpushbuttonasnecessarytoenableordisableAutoTranfer (upper case).

7. Press ENTER.Thefollowingwillbedis-played:

AUTO TRANFER AUTO X_FER man x_fer

8. TheMBTSisnowintheselectedAutoTranfer Mode. Press EXIT as necessary to return to the Main Menu.

Automatic Transfer Settings Setup Tab/Both S1 & S2 Breakers OpenBoth the S1 and S2 Breakers Open portion of the dialog screen (Figure 4-48) provides a selectionforhowtheMBTSshouldrespondwhenboththeSource 1 and Source 2 breakers are open.

In normal operation either the Source 1 or the Source 2 break is closed. If the breaker that is closed is opened by an external operation when the BlockTransfer is selected, then no transfer is performed by the M-4272. While this condition continues to exist anytransfer initiatedexternallyor internallywillbeblockedandnotransferswilloccur.

IftheAutoClosefeaturehasbeenselected,thenifthebreakerthatwasclosedisopenedbyanexter-naloperationtheotherbreakerwillbeclosed.ThebreakerthatisbeingclosedwillusetheFastTrans-fer,In-PhaseTransfer,ResidualVoltagetransferorFixedTimeTransfersettingsoftheAutomaticTrans-ferfeature.Thetransfermethodusedwilldependonhowthemotorbusvoltagedecayswhenthepower


4–48

Automatic Transfer/Auto Transfer BlockTheAutoTransferBlockselectionopens theAutoTransferBlockdialogscreen(Figure4-49)thatallowstheusertoselectaninputthatisusedtoblockAuto-matic Transfers. When an input has been selected it willbegrayedoutinotherdialogscreensthatprovideinput selection since it has already been assigned.

Figure 4-49 Automatic Transfer Block Input Settings Dialog Screen

sourceisdisconnected.Forexample,assumetheSource 1 breaker is closed and the Source 2 breaker isopen.AnoperatoraccidentallyopenstheSource1breaker.TheMBTSwillclosetheSource2breakerbasedontheAutomaticTransfersettings.

TheAutoCloseselectionoperatestotransferineitherdirection.Thepurposeistopermitatransferwhenthenormally-closed breaker is accidentally/inadvertently trippedresultingintwoopenbreakers.Thisoperationis very similar to the regular transfer process except that it does not send out the trip command, since the second breaker is already open.

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SETTINGS SETUP TAB/EXTERNAL CONTROL INPUTS CONFIGU-RATION

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/AutomaticTransfer Settings/Setup

The External Control Inputs Configuration portion of the AutomaticTransfer Settings dialog screen(Figure4-48)includesthefollowingExternalControlInput configuration selections:

• AutoTransferBlock

• 86P-S1Initiate(S1toS2)

• 86P-S2Initiate(S2toS1)

• 27-S1Initiate(S1toS2)

• 27-S2Initiate(S2toS1)

Figure 4-48 Automatic Transfer Settings Dialog Screen


4–49

an input or inputs that are used to initiate Automatic Transfers from an external 27 device.

The selected input will initiate an Automatic Transfer from Source 2 to Source 1. If the Source 1 breaker is closed and the Source 2 breaker is open the trans-fer is blocked since the breakers are in the wrong positions for this transfer and the transfer is ignored. Since Automatic Transfers can occur in either direc-tion a separate Transfer Initiate Input is needed.

When an input has been selected it will be grayed out in other dialog screens that provide input selection since it has already been assigned.

Automatic Transfer Settings Setup Tab/Save/Cancel — The Save selection (Figure 4-48) saves the Automatic Transfer settings either to an open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous open screen.

Automatic Transfer InitiationThe 86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2), 86P-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1), 27-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2) or 27-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1) will provide an internal single-shot initi-ate signal with a short pulse lasting less than 10ms. This internal initiate signal will turn off even though the external input contact is still high and latched.

For example, when the M-4272 receives an external input command at 86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2) and the transfer is already blocked due to unhealthy voltage at the new standby source. The Internal Transfer Initiate Signal expires and no transfer was initiated.When the healthy voltage at the new standby source is restored later, even though an external input com-mand is still high, the M-4272 relay’s internal single shot 86P-S1 initiating transfer command has already turned off and no transfer is initiated.

For the continuous internal multi-shot automatic transfer initiation use the M-4272 ISSlogic® function to implement this special auto transfer logic.

The internal initiate transfer signal in ISSlogic stays high as long as the Input contact initiating a transfer is high (closed) and there are no blocking transfer conditions and block transfer signals.

If the blocking transfer signal (such as unhealthy volt-age at the new standby source or any external block input signals) occurs before the Input contact initiat-ing a transfer is activated, the transfer is blocked and the internal initiate transfer signal is off. However, when the blocking condition is released, the internal initiate transfer signal turns on immediately to start a transfer process.

The ISSlogic section is described in detail on pages 4-89 to 4-96.

Automatic Transfer/86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2)The 86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2) opens a dialog screen similar to Figure 4-49 that allows the user to select an input that is used to initiate Automatic Transfers from an 86P Lockout MBTS.

The selected input will initiate an Automatic Transfer from Source 1 to Source 2. If the Source 2 breaker is closed and the Source 1 breaker is open the transfer is blocked since the breakers are in the wrong posi-tions for this transfer, the transfer is ignored. Since Automatic Transfers can occur in either direction, a separate Transfer Initiate Input is needed.

When an input has been selected it will be grayed out in other dialog screens that provide input selec-tion since it has already been assigned.

Automatic Transfer/86P-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1)The 86P-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1) opens a dialog screen similar to Figure 4-49 that allows the user to select an input or inputs that are used to initiate Automatic Transfers from an 86P Lockout MBTS.

The selected input will initiate an Automatic Transfer from Source 2 to Source 1. If the Source 1 breaker is closed and the Source 2 breaker is open the trans-fer is blocked since the breakers are in the wrong positions for this transfer and the transfer is ignored. Since Automatic Transfers can occur in either direc-tion, a separate Transfer Initiate Input is needed.


Automatic Transfer/27-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2)The 27-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2) opens a dialog screen similar to Figure 4-49 that allows the user to select an input or inputs that are used to initiate Automatic Transfers from an external 27 device.

The selected input will initiate an Automatic Transfer from Source 1 to Source 2. If the Source 2 breaker is closed and the Source 1 breaker is open the trans-fer is blocked since the breakers are in the wrong positions for this transfer and the transfer is ignored. Since Automatic Transfers can occur in either direc-tion a separate Transfer Initiate Input is needed.


Automatic Transfer/27-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1) The 27-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1) opens a dialog screen similar to Figure 4-49 that allows the user to select


4–50

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SETTINGS FAST TRANSFER TAB

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/AutomaticTransferSet-tings/FastTransfer

The FastTransfer tab (Figure 4-50) displays thesettings for the Automatic FastTransfer.The topright corner of the display includes a command buttonthatwilldisableorenabletheautomaticfasttransfer.Thisselectionallows theAutomaticFastTransfer to be disabled (or enabled) independent fromtheAutomaticIn-Phase,ResidualandFixedTime transfers.

SincetheFastTransferisthemostdesirabletypeof transfer, this feature is typically used to disable the other types of transfers if needed. Appendix F, Time Sequence of Transfer Logic includes the tim-ing diagrams of the Simultaneous and Sequential Transfers.Alltransfersareenabledatthesametimewiththedecayofthemotorbusvoltagedeterminingwhichtypeoftransferispossible.Thisfeatureallowsthe user to disable the individual types of transfers if desired.

Automatic Fast Transfer/Delta Phase Angle Limit TheDeltaPhaseAngleLimit(Figure4-50)canbesetfrom0.0to90.0degrees.TheDeltaPhaseAngleistheanglebetweenthevoltagesofthemotorbusandthenewsource.Thissettingcannotbedisabled,thephaseangleisalwaysoneoftheparametersusedto determine if a fast transfer can be executed.

Automatic Fast Transfer/Delta Voltage LimitTheDeltaVoltageLimit (Figure4-50)canbesetfrom0to60volts.TheDeltaVoltageisthevoltagediffer-encebetweenthemotorbusandthenewsource.This setting can be disabled. If it is disabled then this parameter is not used as a condition to execute aFastTransfer.

Automatic Fast Transfer/Delta Frequency LimitTheDelta Frequency Limit (Figure 4-50) can be setfrom0.2to2.0Hz.TheDeltaFrequencyisthefrequencydifferencebetween themotorbusandthenewsource.Thissettingcanbedisabled.Ifitisdisabled then this parameter is not used as a condi-tion to execute a fast transfer.

Figure 4-50 Automatic Transfer Settings Fast Transfer Tab Dialog Screen


4–51

Automatic Fast Transfer/Time WindowTheTimeWindow(Figure4-50)can be set from 1 to10cycles.TheTimeWindowdefinesthewindowofopportunityforaFastTransfer.TheTimeWindowstartswhenthetransferisinitiatedandendsattheselectedtimelimit.IfaFastTransferhasnotbeencompletedby theendof thisTimeWindow, thenthe Fast Transfer is disabled and will no longerattempted. An In-Phase, Residual or FixedTimeTransfer is still possible.

ClosingcommandTimeDelayisgrayedoutwhenCommonFunctionSettings/TransferModeissettoSequential.

Automatic Fast Transfer/Closing Command Time DelayThe time delay can be set from 0 to 10 cycles. This timedelayisonlyusedforFastTransfermethodinSimultaneous transfer mode. Since the trip and close command are normally issued at the same time forFastTransfermethodinSimultaneoustransfermode,thistimedelayallowstheflexibilitytodelaythe closing command to accomplilsh the break-before-make mode of operation (open transition).

Automatic Fast Transfer/Blocking Inputs SelectionThe Blocking Inputs Selection button(Figure4-50)opens the Blocking Inputs Selection dialog screen (Figure4-51).AnyInputortheFuseLoss(FL)func-tioncanbeselectedtoblockaFastTransfer.Whenother functions such as External Status Reset are selectedfortheseinputsitwillbeidentifiednexttothat input.

Automatic Fast Transfer Tab Save/CancelTheSaveselection(Figure4-50)savestheAuto-maticFastTransfersettingseithertoanopenfileorto the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous open screen.

TheconditionsthatarenecessarytoexecuteaFastTransfer are:


• Thephaseanglebetweenthemotorbusandthenewsourceiswithinlimitsetting.

• TheDeltaVoltagebetweenthemotorbusandthenewsourceiswithinlimitsetting.

• TheDeltaFrequencybetweenthemotorbusandthenewsourceiswithinlimitset-ting.

• AtransfermustbecompletedwithintheFast Transfer time window of 1 to 10cycles.

Figure 4-51 Fast Transfer Blocking Inputs Selection Dialog Screen


4–52

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SETTINGS/IN-PHASE TRANSFER TAB

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/AutomaticTransferSet-tings/In-Phase Transfer

Figure4-52,illustratestheMBTSAutomaticTransferSettings found under the In-Phase Transfer Tab on theAutomaticTransferSettingsdialogscreen.The top right corner of the display includes a command buttonthatwilldisableorenabletheautomaticIn-PhaseTransfer.ThisselectionallowstheautomaticIn-Phase Transfer to be disabled (or enabled) in-dependentfromtheAutomaticFast,ResidualandFixedTimeTransfers.

Typically this feature is used to disable the other types of transfers if needed. Appendix F, Time Sequence of Transfer Logic includes the timing diagrams of the Simultaneous and Sequential Trans-fers.Alltransfersareenabledatthesametimeandthe characteristics of the motor bus voltage decay determineswhichtypeoftransferispossible.Thisfeatureallowstheusertodisabletheindividualtypesof transfers if desired.

Automatic In-Phase Transfer/Delta Voltage LimitTheDeltaVoltageLimit can be set from 0 to120 volts. TheDeltaVoltageisthevoltagedifferencebetweenthemotorbusandthenewsource.Thissettingcanbe disabled. If it is disabled then this parameter is not used as a condition to execute an In-Phase Transfer.

Automatic In-Phase Transfer/Delta Frequency LimitTheDeltaFrequencyLimit can be set from 0.10 to 10.00Hz.TheDeltaFrequencyisthefrequencydif-ferencebetweenthemotorbusandthenewsource.This setting cannot be disabled. The frequency is alwaysoneoftheparametersusedtodetermineifan In-Phase Transfer can be executed.

Automatic In-Phase Transfer/Time WindowTheTimeWindowcanbesetfrom10to600cycles.TheTimeWindowdefinesthewindowofopportunityforaIn-PhaseTransfer.Thetimewindowstartswhenthe transfer is initiated and ends at the selected time limit. If an In-Phase Transfer has not been completed bytheendofthistimewindowthentheIn-PhaseTransferisdisabledandwillnolongerbeattempted.AResidualorFixedTimeTransferisstillpossible.

Figure 4-52 Automatic Transfer Settings In-Phase Transfer Tab Dialog Screen


4–53

Automatic In-Phase Transfer/Blocking Inputs SelectionThe Blocking Inputs Selection button opens the Blocking Inputs Selection dialog screen (Figure4-51).AnyInputortheFuseLoss(FL)functioncanbe selected to block an In-Phase Transfer. When other functions such as External Status Reset are selectedfortheseinputsitwillbeidentifiednexttothat input.

Automatic In-Phase Transfer Save/CancelTheSaveselectionsavestheAutomaticIn-PhaseTransfer Tab settings either to an open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previ-ous open screen.

The conditions that are necessary to execute an In-Phase Transfer are:


• TheconditionsforFastTransferhavenotbeen matched.


• TheDeltaFrequencybetweenthemotorbus and the new source is within limitsetting.

• ThePhaseAnglebetweenthemotorbusandthenewsourceischangingandmustenter the first phase coincidence (first zerodegreecrossing)withintheIn-PhaseTransfertimewindow(adjustablefrom10to 600 cycles).

The In-Phase Transfer feature includes two programmable advanced breakerclosing times for Source 1 and Source 2 breakers(Figure4-36)tocoordinatetheclosing of the first phase coincidence. Programmable breaker closing time is from 0 to 12 cycles.

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SETTINGS/RESIDUAL VOLTAGE TRANSFER TAB

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/AutomaticTransferSet-tings/ResidualVoltageTransfer

Figure4-53,illustratestheMBTSAutomaticTransferSettings foundunder theResidualVoltageTrans-ferTabon theAutomaticTransferSettingsdialogscreen.

TheResidualVoltageTransfertab(Figure4-53)dis-playsthesettingsfortheResidualVoltageTransfer.The top right corner of the display includes a com-

Figure 4-53 Automatic Transfer Settings Residual Voltage Transfer Tab Dialog Screen


4–54

mandbuttonthatwilldisableorenabletheautomaticResidualVoltageTransfer.ThisselectionallowstheautomaticResidualVoltageTransfertobedisabled(orenabled)independentfromAutomaticFast,In-PhaseandFixedTimeTransfers.

Typically this feature is used to disable the other types of transfers if needed. Appendix F, Time Sequence of Transfer Logic includes the timing diagrams of the Simultaneous and Sequential Trans-fers.Alltransfersareenabledatthesametimeandthe decay characteristic of the motor bus voltage determineswhichtypeoftransferispossible.Thisallows theuser to disable the individual typesoftransfers if desired.

Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer/Residual Voltage LimitTheResidualVoltageLimit can be set from 5 to 60 volts.WhenthemotorbusvoltagedropsbelowtheResidualVoltageLimittheclosecommandissentto thenewsourcebreaker. IfLoadSheddinghasbeen selected, then the Load Shedding Output is closedwhen themotorbusvoltagedecreases tolessthantheResidualVoltageLimit,thenaftertheLoad Shedding Time Delay times out, the close commandissenttothenewsourcebreaker.

This setting cannot be disabled, it is always theparameter used as the condition to execute a Re-sidualVoltageTransfer.ThereisnoTimeWindowfortheResidualVoltageTransfer.However,itmustbe completed by the Incomplete Transfer Lockout Time Limit setting.

Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer/Load Shedding Time DelayThe Load Shedding Time Delay can be set from 0 to 100 cycles. The time delay defines the time pe-riodfromwhenthemotorbusvoltagedecreasestolessthantheResidualVoltageLimituntiltheclosecommand is sent.

Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer/Blocking Inputs SelectionThe Blocking Inputs Selection button opens the Blocking Inputs Selection dialog screen (Figure4-51).AnyInputortheFuseLoss(FL)functioncanbe selected to blockaDelayedResidualVoltageTransfer. When and input is selected, it is not grayed out in the other types of transfers.

Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer Save/CancelTheSaveselectionsavestheAutomaticResidualVoltageTransferTabsettingseithertoanopenfileor to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous open screen.

The conditions that are necessary to execute a DelayedResidualVoltageTransferare:


• TheconditionsforaFastTransferhavenotbeen matched.

• Theconditions foran In-PhaseTransferhave not been matched.

• Themotorbusvoltagedropsbelow theResidual Voltage Transfer Limit setting(adjustable from 0 to 60 V) within theIncomplete Transfer Lockout Time Limit setting (50 to 3000 cycles).

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SETTINGS/FIXED TIME TRANSFER TAB

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/AutomaticTransferSet-tings/Fixed-TimeTransfer

Figure4-54,illustratestheMBTSAutomaticTransferSettingsfoundundertheFixedTimeTransferTabontheAutomaticTransferSettingsdialogscreen.

TheFixedTimeTransfertab(Figure4-54)displaysthesettingsfortheAutomaticFixedTimeTransfer.The top right corner of the display includes a com-mandbutton thatwilldisableorenable theAuto-maticFixedTimeTransfer.ThisselectionallowstheautomaticFixedTimeTransfer tobedisabled (orenabled)independentfromAutomaticFast,In-PhaseandResidualVoltagetransfers.

Typically this feature is used to disable the other types of transfers if needed. Appendix F, Time Sequence of Transfer Logic includes the timing diagrams of the SimultaneousandSequentialTransfers.Alltransfersare enabled at the same time and the decay of the motorbusvoltagedetermineswhichtypeoftransferispossible.Thisfeatureallowstheusertodisablethe individual types of transfers if desired.

TheFixedTimeTransferisbasedonlyonTimeDelayanddoesnotusethePhaseAngle,FrequencyorVoltagetosupervisetheclosingofthenewsourcebreaker.


4–55

Automatic Fixed Time Transfer/Time DelayThe Time Delay setting can be set from 30 to 1000 cycles.When the conditions aremet for a FixedTime Transfer the Time Delay starts timing. When the Time Delay times out, a close command is sent to the Load Shedding Time Delay. When the Load Shedding Time Delay times out the close command issenttothenewsourcebreaker.Nootherparam-eters are monitored.

IfFixedTimeTransferhasbeenselectedasaLoadSheddingFunctionSelectionintheCommonSet-tings(Figure4-47),thenthesignalsenttotheLoadSheddingOutputwillbetruewhentheFixedTimeTransfer, Time Delay times out.

These settings cannot be disabled, they are the only parametersusedastheconditiontoexecuteaFixedTimeTransfer.ThereisnoTimeWindowfortheFixedTimeTransfer.However, itmustbecompletedbythe Incomplete Transfer Lockout Time Limit setting.

Automatic Fixed Time Transfer/Load Shedding Time DelayThe Load Shedding Time Delay can be set from 0 to 100 cycles. The Load Shedding Time Delay defines thetimeperiodfromwhentheFixedTimeTransfer,TimeDelaytimesoutandwhentheclosecommandissenttothenewsourcebreaker.

Automatic Fixed Time Transfer/Blocking Inputs SelectionThe Blocking Inputs Selection button opens the Block-ing Inputs Selection dialog screen (Figure 4-51).Any Inputor theFuseLoss (FL) functioncanbeselectedtoblockaFixedTimeTransfer.Whenaninput is selected, it is not grayed out in other types of transfers.

Automatic Fixed Time Transfer Save/CancelTheSaveselectionsavestheAutomaticFixedTimeTransfer Tab settings either to an open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previ-ous open screen.

The conditions that are necessary to execute a delayedFixedTimeTransferare:



• The conditions for an In-Phase transferhave not been matched.

• Themotorbusvoltagedropsbelow theResidual Voltage Transfer limit setting(adjustablefrom0to60V)withinthein-complete transfer lockout time limit setting (50 to 3000 cycles).

Figure 4-54 Automatic Transfer Settings Fixed Time Transfer Tab Dialog Screen


4–56

MANUAL TRANSFER SETTINGS (MTS)

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Manual Transfer Settings

The Manual Transfer Settings selection from the Transfer Settings group (Figure 4-34) opens theManual Transfer Settings Dialog screen (Figure4-55),whichincludesthefollowingtabs:

• Setup

• FastTransfer

• In-PhaseTransfer

• ResidualVoltageTransfer

• HotParallelTransfer

HMI Manual Transfer Enable/Disable (MBTS Front Panel)

ToenableordisableManualTransferfromtheFrontPanelperformthefollowing:



ENTER ACCESS CODE 0





c. Go to Step 4.






MANUAL TRANSFER disable enable

6. PresstheLeftorRightarrowpushbut-ton as necessary to enable or disable Manual Transfer (upper case).

7. Press ENTER.Thefollowingwillbedis-played:


8. TheMBTSisnowintheselectedManualTransfer Mode. Press EXIT as necessary to return to the Main Menu.

MANUAL TRANSFER SETTINGS SETUP TAB

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Manual Transfer Settings/Setup

Figure4-55,illustratestheMBTSManualTransferSettings found under the Setup Tab on the Manual Transfer Settings dialog screen.

Manual Transfer Settings/Manual Transfer Mode

Manual TransferTheManualTransferMode (Figure 4-55) can beDisabled or Enabled. If Disable is selected and then Save is selected, then the remaining settings in the Manual Transfer Settings dialog screen are grayed out. There are settings in the Common Settings that effect the operation of the Manual Transfer.

Manual Transfer Settings/External Control Inputs ConfigurationThe External Control Inputs Configuration portion of theManualTransferSettingsdialogscreen(Figure4-55)includesthefollowingExternalControlInputconfiguration selections:

• Manual Transfer Block

• ManualTransferInitiate

Manual Transfer/Manual Transfer BlockThe Manual Transfer Block selection opens the ManualTransferBlockdialogscreen(Figure4-56)thatallowstheusertoselectaninputthatisusedto block Manual Transfers. When an input has beenselecteditwillbegrayedoutinotherdialogscreens that provide input selection since it has already been assigned.


4–57

Figure 4-55 Manual Transfer Settings Dialog Screen

Figure 4-57 Manual Transfer Initiate Input Settings Dialog Screen

Figure 4-56 Manual Block Input Settings Dialog Screen


4–58

Manual Transfer/Manual Transfer InitiateThe Manual Transfer Initiate opens a dialog screen (Figure4-57)thatallowstheusertoselectaninputor inputs that are used to initiate Manual Transfers.

TheselectedinputwillinitiateanManualTransferfrom Source 1 to Source 2 or from Source 2 to Source 1 depending on the breaker positions at that time. If the Source 1 breaker is closed and the Source2breakerisopenthenthetransferwillbefrom Source 1 to Source 2. If the Source 2 breaker is closed and the Source 1 breaker is open then thetransferwillbefromSource2toSource1.TheManual Transfer does not have separate initiate inputsfortransferringinaspecificdirection;thisisdifferent from the automatic transfer initiate.

Whenaninputhasbeenselecteditwillbegrayedout in other dialog screens that provide input selec-tion since it has already been assigned.

Manual Transfer Save/CancelThe Save selection saves the Manual Transfer Settings Tab either to an open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous open screen.

MANUAL TRANSFER SETTINGS/FAST TRANSFER TAB

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Manual Transfer Settings/FastTransfer

The Fast Transfer tab (Figure 4-58) displays thesettingsfortheManualFastTransfer.Thetoprightcorner of the display includes a command button thatwilldisableorenabletheManualFastTransfer.Thisselectionallows theManualFastTransfer tobe disabled (or enabled) independent from the In-Phase,ResidualVoltageandHotParalleltransfers.

SincetheFastTransferisthemostdesirabletypeof transfer, this feature is typically used to disable the other types of transfers if needed. Appendix F, Time Sequence of Transfer Logic includes the tim-ing diagrams of the Simultaneous and Sequential Transfers.All transfers areenabledat the sametimewiththedecayofthemotorbusvoltagede-terminingwhichtypeof transfer ispossible.Thisfeature allows the user to disable the individualtypes of transfers if desired.

Manual Fast Transfer/Delta Phase Angle LimitTheDeltaPhaseAngleLimitcanbesetfrom0.0to90.0degrees.TheDeltaPhaseAngleistheanglebetweenthevoltagesofthemotorbusandthenew

source. This setting cannot be disabled, the phase angleisalwaysoneoftheparametersusedtode-termine if a fast transfer can be executed.

Manual Fast Transfer/Delta Voltage LimitTheDeltaVoltageLimit can be set from 0 to 60 volts. TheDeltaVoltageisthevoltagedifferencebetweenthemotorbusandthenewsource.Thissettingcanbe disabled. If it is disabled then this parameter is notusedasaconditiontoexecuteaFastTransfer.

Manual Fast Transfer/Delta Frequency LimitTheDeltaFrequencyLimit can be set from 0.02 to 2.0Hz.TheDeltaFrequencyisthefrequencydiffer-encebetweenthemotorbusandthenewsource.This setting can be disabled. If disabled, then this parameter is not used as a condition to execute a fast transfer.

Manual Fast Transfer/Time WindowTheTimeWindowcanbesetfrom1to10cycles.TheTimeWindowdefinesthewindowofopportu-nityforaFastTransfer.TheTimeWindowstartswhenthetransferisinitiatedandendsatthese-lectedtimelimit.IfaFastTransferhasnotbeencompletedbytheendofthisTimeWindow,thentheFastTransferisdisabledandwillnolongerbeattempted.AnIn-Phase,ResidualorFixedTimeTransfer is still possible.

Manual Fast Transfer/Closing Command Time DelayThe time delay can be set from 0 to 10 cycles. This timedelayisonlyusedforFastTransfermethodinSimultaneous transfer mode. Since the trip and close command are normally issued at the same time forFastTransfermethodinSimultaneoustransfermode,thistimedelayallowstheflexibilitytodelaythe closing command to accomplilsh the break-before-make mode of operation (open transition).

Manual Fast Transfer/Blocking Inputs SelectionThe Blocking Inputs Selection button opens the Blocking Inputs Selection dialog screen (Figure4-59).AnyInputortheFuseLoss(FL)functioncanbeselectedtoblockaManualFastTransfer.Whenan input is selected, it is not grayed out in other types of transfers.

Manual Fast Transfer Save/CancelTheSaveselectionsavestheManualFastTransfersettings to an open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel returns the user to the previous open screen.


4–59

Figure 4-59 Manual Fast Transfer Blocking Inputs Selection Dialog Screen

Figure 4-58 Manual Transfer Settings Fast Transfer Tab Dialog Screen


4–60

This setting cannot be disabled. The frequency is alwaysoneoftheparametersusedtodetermineifa In-Phase Transfer can be executed.

Manual In-Phase Transfer/Time WindowTheTimeWindowcanbesetfrom10to600cycles.TheTimeWindow defines the window of oppor-tunity for an In-PhaseTransfer.The timewindowstartswhenthetransferisinitiatedandendsattheselected time limit. If an In-Phase Transfer has not beencompletedbytheendofthistimewindowthentheIn-PhaseTransferisdisabledandwillnolongerbeattempted.AResidualorFixedTimeTransferisstill possible.

Manual In-Phase Transfer/Blocking Inputs SelectionThe Blocking Inputs Selection button opens the Blocking Inputs Selection dialog screen (Figure4-61).AnyInputortheFuseLoss(FL)functioncanbe selected to block an In-Phase Transfer. When an input is selected, it is not grayed out in other types of tranfers.

Manual In-Phase Transfer/Save/CancelThe Save selection saves the Manual In-Phase Transfer Tab settings either to an open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previ-ous open screen.

NoLockout/Blockingconditionsexist.

• TheconditionsforFastTransferhavenotbeen matched.


• TheDeltaFrequencybetweenthemotorbus and the new source is within limitsetting.

• ThePhaseAnglebetweenthemotorbusandthenewsourceischangingandmustenter the first phase coincidence (first zerodegreecrossing)withintheIn-PhaseTransfertimewindow(adjustablefrom10to 600 cycles).

The In-Phase Transfer feature includes two programmable advanced breakerclosing times for Source 1 and Source 2 breakers(Figure4-34)tocoordinatetheclosing of the first phase coincidence. Programmable breaker closing time is from 0 to 12 cycles.

The Conditions that are necessary to execute a ManualFastTransferare:




• TheDeltaFrequencybetweenthemotorbusandthenewsourceiswithinlimitset-ting.

• A transfermustbecompletedwithin theFastTransfertimewindowof1to10cycles.

MANUAL TRANSFER SETTINGS/IN-PHASE TRANSFER TAB

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Manual Transfer Settings/In-Phase Transfer

The In-PhaseTransfer tab (Figure4-60) displaysthe settings for the In-Phase Transfer. The top right corner of the display includes a command button thatwilldisableorenabletheautomaticIn-PhaseTransfer.ThisselectionallowsthemanualIn-Phasetransfer to be disabled (or enabled) independent from theManual Fast,ResidualVoltage andHotParallel Transfers.

Typically this feature is used to disable the other types of transfers if needed. Appendix F, Time Sequence of Transfer Logic includes the timing diagrams of the Simultaneous and Sequential Transfers.Alltransfersareenabledatthesametimeand the decay of the motor bus voltage determines whichtypeoftransferispossible.Thisfeatureallowsthe user to disable the individual types of transfers if desired.

Manual In-Phase Transfer/Delta Voltage LimitTheDeltaVoltageLimit can be set from 0 to 120 volts.TheDeltaVoltage is the voltage differencebetweenthemotorbusandthenewsource.Thissetting can be disabled. If it is disabled then this parameter is not used as a condition to execute an In-Phase Transfer.

Manual In-Phase Transfer/Delta Frequency LimitTheDeltaFrequencyLimitcanbesetfrom0.1to10.0Hz.TheDeltaFrequencyisthefrequencydifferencebetweenthemotorbusandthenewsource.


4–61

Figure 4-61 In-Phase Transfer Blocking Inputs Selection Dialog Screen

Figure 4-60 Manual Transfer Settings In-Phase Transfer Tab Dialog Screen


4–62

MANUAL TRANSFER SETTINGS/RESIDUAL VOLTAGE TRANSFER TAB

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Manual Transfer Settings/ResidualVoltageTransfer

TheResidualVoltageTransfertab(Figure4-62)dis-playsthesettingsfortheResidualVoltageTransfer.The top right corner of the display includes a com-mandbuttonthatwilldisableorenabletheManual ResidualVoltageTransfer.ThisselectionallowstheManualResidualVoltageTransfertobedisabled(orenabled) independent from ManualFast,In-PhaseandHotParallelTransfers.

Typically this feature is used to disable the other types of transfers if needed. Appendix F, Time Sequence of Transfer Logic includes the timing diagrams of the Simultaneous and Sequential Transfers.Alltransfersareenabledatthesametimeand the decay of the motor bus voltage determines whichtypeoftransferispossible.Thisfeatureallowsthe user to disable the individual types of transfers if desired.

Manual Residual Voltage Transfer/Residual Voltage LimitTheResidualVoltageLimit can be set from 5 to 60 volts.WhenthemotorbusvoltagedropsbelowtheResidualVoltageLimittheclosecommandissentto thenewsourcebreaker. IfLoadSheddinghasbeen selected, then the Load Shedding Output is closedwhen themotorbusvoltagedecreases tolessthantheResidualVoltageLimit,thenaftertheLoad Shedding Time Delay times out the close com-mandissenttothenewsourcebreaker.

This setting cannot be disabled, it is always theparameter used as the condition to execute a Re-sidualVoltageTransfer.ThereisnoTimeWindowfortheResidualVoltageTransfer.However,itmustbe completed by the Incomplete Transfer Lockout Time Limit setting.

Manual Residual Voltage Transfer/Load Shedding Time DelayThe Load Shedding Time Delay can be set from 0 to 100 cycles. The time delay defines the time pe-riodfromwhenthemotorbusvoltagedecreasestolessthantheResidualVoltageLimituntiltheclosecommand is sent.

Manual Residual Voltage Transfer/Blocking Inputs SelectionThe Blocking Inputs Selection button opens the Blocking Inputs Selection dialog screen (Figure4-63).AnyInputortheFuseLoss(FL)functioncanbe selected to blockaDelayedResidualVoltageTransfer. When an input is selected, it is not grayed out in other types of transfers.

Manual Residual Voltage Transfer Save/CancelThe Save selection saves the Manual Residual VoltageTransferTabsettingseithertoanopenfileor to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous open screen.

The conditions that are necessary to execute a DelayedResidualVoltageTransferare:



• Theconditions foran In-PhaseTransferhave not been matched.

• Themotorbusvoltagedropsbelow theResidual Voltage Transfer Limit setting(adjustable from 0 to 60 V) within theIncomplete Transfer Lockout Time Limit setting (50 to 3000 cycles).


4–63

Figure 4-63 Residual Voltage Transfer Blocking Inputs Selection Dialog Screen

Figure 4-62 Manual Transfer Settings Residual Voltage Transfer Tab Dialog Screen


4–64

MANUAL TRANSFER SETTINGS/HOT PARAL-LEL TRANSFER TAB

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Manual Transfer Settings/HotParallelTransfer

TheHotParallelTransfertab(Figure4-64)displaysthesettings for theHotParallelTransfer.The topright corner of the display includes a command button thatwilldisableorenable theManualHotParallelTransfer.WhenevertheHotParallelTransferisenabledtheManualFast,In-phaseandResidualTransfersaredisabled.OnlywhentheHotParallelTransferisdisabledcantheManualFast,In-phaseand Residual Transfers be enabled.

TheHotParallelTransferistypicallyusedtotransferthe motor load back to the original source after an Automatic Transfer has been completed andthe conditions that caused it to occur have been resolved. This transfer operates differently than all the other transfers, in that it closes the breaker to thenewsourcefirstandthenopensthebreakertotheoldsource.Thisallowsforabumplesstransfersince the motor bus is never disconnected from a source.TheHotParalleltransferisonlyperformedwhenthebusandnewsourceconditionsarestable.

Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Delta Phase Angle LimitTheDeltaPhaseAngleLimit can be set from 0.0 to 90.0degrees.Thedeltaangleistheanglebetweenthevoltagesofthemotorbusandthenewsource.This setting cannot be disabled. The phase angle isalwaysoneoftheparametersusedtodetermineifaHotParallelTransfercanbeexecuted.

Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Delta Voltage LimitTheDeltaVoltageLimit can be set from 0 to 60 volts. Thedeltavoltageisthevoltagedifferencebetweenthemotorbusandthenewsource.Thissettingcanbe disabled and if it is disabled, then this parameter isnotusedasaconditiontoexecuteaHotParalleltransfer.

Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Delta Frequency LimitTheDeltaFrequencyLimit can be set from 0.02 to 0.5 hertz. The delta frequency is the frequency difference between the motor bus and the newsource. This setting can be disabled and if it is disabled then this parameter is not used as a conditiontoexecuteaHotParallelTransfer.

Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Time WindowTheTimeWindow can be set from 1 to 50 cycles. TheTimeWindowdefinesthewindowofopportunityforaHotParallelTransfer.TheTimeWindowstartswhen the transfer is initiated and ends at theselectedtimelimit.IfaHotParallelTransferhasnotbeencompletedbytheendof thisTimeWindow,thentheHotParallelTransfer isdisabledandwillno longer be attempted and an Incomplete Transfer alarmwillbeset.

Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Tripping Command Time DelayThe Tripping Command Time Delay can be set from 0 to 30 cycles. The Tripping Command Time Delay is thetimefromwhenthenewsourcebreakerclosesuntil the old source breaker is tripped. This time defineshow long the twosourcesareparalleled.This time setting should be set as short as possible tolimittheamountoftimethemotorbuswouldbeexposed to double fault currents.

Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Blocking Inputs SelectionThe Blocking Inputs Selection button opens the Blocking Inputs Selection dialog screen (Figure4-65).AnyInputortheFuseLoss(FL)functioncanbeselectedtoblockaHotParallelTransfer.

Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Save/CancelTheSaveselectionsavestheManualHotParallelTransfer settings either to an open file or to the tar-get MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous open screen.

TheconditionsthatarenecessarytoexecuteaHotParallel Transfer are:

• Nolockout/blockingconditionsexist.


• Thedeltavoltagebetweenthemotorbusandthenewsourceiswithinlimitsetting.

• Thedelta frequencybetween themotorbus and the new source is within limitsetting.

• AtransfermustbecompletedwithintheHotParallelTransfertimewindowof1to50 cycles.


4–65

Figure 4-65 Hot Parallel Blocking Inputs Selection Dialog Screen

Figure 4-64 Manual Transfer Settings Hot Parallel Transfer Tab Dialog Screen


4–66

AUTO TRIP (AT)

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/AutoTrip

TheAutoTripselectionfromtheTransferSettingsgroup (Figure 4-34) opens the Auto Trip Dialogscreen(Figure4-66).

If an external operation closes the second breaker whileleavingthefirstoneclosed,andiftheAutoTripfeatureisenabled,theMBTSwilltripthebreakerthatwasoriginallyclosedwithinanadjustabletimedelay (0 to 50 Cycles in increments of 0.5 Cycle) after the second breaker is closed.

TheAutoTripoperatesineitherdirectiontoallowexternal parallel transfer but prohibit inadvertent parallel operation. It must be noted that the external operation that closes the second breaker must be supervised by means that are external to the mo-torbustransfersystem.AutoTripisnot a transfer, the only command sent is a trip command after the time delay and no other parameters are used to supervise this operation.

Forexample,inanapplicationwheretherearetwoMBTS units connected in a main-tie-main configu-ration(seeFigure4-67)itisrecommendedtodis-abletheAutoTripfeature.Inthisconfigurationbothunits can operate a common tie breaker. If one unit transfers by tripping its main breaker and closing the tiebreaker,thentheotherunitwouldnowseebothof its breakers closed. Depending on the breaker selectedintheAutoTripfeaturethisunitwouldtripeitheritsmainbreakerandbothmotorbuseswouldbedisconnectedoritwouldtripitstiebreakerthatwas just closed, disconnecting themotor bus oftheunitthatoriginallytransferred.Neitherofthesesituations is desirable!

Auto Trip/Enable/DisableIn the top right corner of the screen is a command button that will Disable or Enable the Auto Tripfeature.

Auto Trip/Breaker Trip OptionThe Breaker Trip Option allows the selection ofwhichbreakertotripwhenbothbreakersareclosed.The selections include the “Just Closed Breaker” or “Originally Closed Breaker”. Typically the Originally ClosedBreakeristrippedtoallowanexternalHotParallel Transfer.

Auto Trip/Tripping Command Time DelayThe Tripping Command Time Delay allows theuser to delay (0 to 50 cycles) sending the selected Breaker Trip Option.

Auto Trip/Blocking Inputs SelectionThe Blocking Inputs Selection button opens the Blocking Inputs Selection dialog screen (Figure4-61).AnyInputortheFuseLoss(FL)functioncanbeselected toblockanAutoTrip.Whenan inputis selected, it is not grayed out in other types of transfers.

Auto Trip Save/CancelThe Save selection saves the AutoTrip settingseither to an open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous open screen.


4–67

STATION BUS SYSTEM

N.C.52S1

VT-B1

N.C. 52S2

VT-S2

BUS 1 BUS 2

VT-B2

52T

N.O.

BUS-TIE

VT-S1

CT-S1 CT-S2

CT-B1 CT-B2

M-4272 M-4272

M M M M


VS1VS1

IS1

VS2 VBusIS2

IS1

IS2 VBus VS2

Figure 4-67 Main-Tie-Main Application Example

Figure 4-66 Automatic Trip Settings Dialog Screen


4–68

FUNCTION SETTINGS

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints

TheFunctionSettingsGroup(Figure4-34)includesfollowingfunctions:

• 27BBusPhaseUndervoltage

• 50S1 Source 1 Instantaneous PhaseOverload Detection

• 50S2 Source 2 Instantaneous PhaseOverload Detection

• 50BF#1Source1BreakerFailure

• S1BFSource1BreakerFailure(BreakerStatus)

• 81BusVoltageFrequency

• TCMTripCircuitMonitor

• 60FLBusVTFuse-Loss

• 50BF#2Source2BreakerFailure(BreakerStatus)

• S2BFSource2BreakerFailure(BreakerStatus)

• 81RROCOF(BusVoltage)

• CCMCloseCircuitMonitor

• ISSLISSlogic

27B BUS PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/27B

The 27B Bus Phase Undervoltage selection from the FunctionSettings group (Figure 4-34) opensthe Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2)dialogscreen(Figure4-68).Thedialogscreenincludesthefollowingtabs:

• 27#1Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2)

• 27#2Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate (S2 to S1)

• 27#3BusPhaseUndervoltage

• 27#4BusPhaseUndervoltage

27#1 BUS PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE TRANS-FER INITIATE (S1 TO S2)

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/27B/27#1

Figure4-68displaysthesettingsforthe27#1Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2) function.

Enable/Disable — The top right corner of the dis-playincludesacommandbuttonthatwilldisableorenablethefunction.Thisselectionallowsthe27#1Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2)

to be disabled (or enabled) independent from the 27#2Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate (S2 to S1),27#3BusPhaseUndervoltageorthe27#4Bus Phase Undervoltage.

Pickup — The 27#1 Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2) function Pickup (5 to 120 Volts)initiatesatransferfromSource1toSource2based on an undervoltage condition on the motor bus.However,itcanbeprogrammedtooperateanyavailable output.

Voltage Inhibit—Whenenabled,theVoltageInhibit(5to120Volts)isusedtoblockthe27BFunctionwhenthemotorbusvoltage isbelowthissetting.VoltageInhibitisneededwhentheMBTSisinitiallyenergizedorwhenthebusphasevoltageistem-porarilynotappliedtotheunit.TheVoltageInhibitFunctionmaybedisabledorenabled.

The27B#1FunctionsettingsusedtoinitiateanAuto-maticTransfermustbecoordinatedwithanyvoltagedipthatmayoccurwhenlargemotorsarestarted.The27B#1Functionshouldnotinitiateatransferwhenalarge motor is being started. The voltage dip caused by a large motor starting can be as much as 10 volts and last from several seconds up to 3 or 4 seconds.

Time Delay—ATimeDelay(1to8160cycles)canbe applied to delay the Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2) start.

I/O Selection — The I/O Selection button opens the 27B#1BusPhaseUndervoltageTransferIniti-ateInputs/OutputsSelectionDialogScreen(Figure4-69)thatallowsanyinputortheFuseLoss(FL)functiontobeselectedtoblockthe27B#1function.The27B#1functioncanalsobeusedtoactivateaselectedoutputwhenittimesout.

Save/Cancel — The Save selection saves the 27 Bus Phase Undervoltage settings either to an open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous open screen.

27#2 BUS PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE TRANS-FER INITIATE (S2 TO S1)

The27B#2BusPhaseUndervoltageTransferInitiate(S2 to S1) is used to initiate a transfer from Source 2 to Source 1 based on an undervoltage condition on the motor bus. In all other respects it is the same asthe27B#1.

27#3 and 27#4 Bus Phase UndervoltageThe27B#3and27B#4aregeneral purposeBusPhase Undervoltage functions. They have the same settingsand I/Oselectionsas27B#1and27B#2except they are not predefined to initiate transfers. These functions could be used for load shedding, tripping or as an alarm.


4–69

Figure 4-69 27B#1 Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate Inputs/Outputs Selection Dialog Screen

Figure 4-68 Function Settings Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2) Dialog Screen


4–70

50 SOURCE 1 INSTANTANEOUS PHASE OVERLOAD DETECTION

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/50S1

TheInstantaneousPhaseOverload(50S1)Functionprovides fast tripping for high Source 1 currents. The settingsmustbesetsuchthattheywillnotpickup

Figure 4-70 Source 1 Instantaneous Phase Overload Detection Dialog Screen

Figure 4-71 Source 1 Instantaneous Phase Overload Detection I/O Selection Dialog Screen

for normal load current conditions. Ranges and In-crementsarepresentedinFigure4-70.Sincethisisonlyasinglephaseelement,the50S1Functioncan only be used for overload detection and not used for overcurrent protection. The current (IR) is equal to the primary current (Ip) divided by the ap-propriate CT ratio.


4–71

50 SOURCE 2 INSTANTANEOUS PHASE OVERLOAD DETECTION

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/50S2

TheInstantaneousPhaseOverload(50S2)Functionprovides fast tripping for high Source 2 currents. The settingsmustbesetsuchthattheywillnotpickup

Figure 4-72 Source 2 Instantaneous Phase Overload Detection Dialog Screen

Figure 4-73 Source 2 Instantaneous Phase Overload Detection I/O Selection Dialog Screen

for normal load current conditions. Ranges and In-crementsarepresentedinFigure4-72.Sincethisisonlyasinglephaseelementthe50S2Functioncan only be used for overload detection and not used for overcurrent protection. The current (IR) is equal to the primary current (Ip) divided by the ap-propriate CT ratio.


4–72

50BF #1 SOURCE 1 BREAKER FAILURE

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/50BF#1

The 50BF#1Source1BreakerFailureselection from the Function Settings group (Figure 4-34)opens the 50BF#1Source1BreakerFailure dialog screen(Figure4-74).

Enable/Disable — The top right corner of the dis-playincludesacommandbuttonthatwilldisableorenable the function.

Pickup Current — Abreaker failure condition isdetected by the continued presence of current after a trip command has been sent to the Source 1 breaker. If the current is greater than the Pickup Current setting for the time period of the Time De-lay setting after the trip command is sent, then the breaker failure alarm indicated.

If the Simultaneous Transfer mode is selected (Common Function Settings Figure 4-34), thenthebreakerthatwasjustclosedistrippedopentopreventtheNewSourcefromcontinuingtobecon-nected through the failed breaker to the Old Source that could have a fault.

If the Sequential Transfer mode is selected (Com-monFunctionSettingsFigure4-34),thenaclosecommandwillnotbesentsincethebreakerstatuswouldindicatethatthetrippedbreakerdidnotopen.Since the transfer could not be completed the In-

completeTransferLockouttimerwouldtimeoutandgenerate a lockout condition.

Time Delay — The time period (1 to 30 cycles) after the PickupCurrent setting is exceeded at whichpointtheBreakerFailureAlarmisactuated.

NOTE: To have 50BF #1 Function workingproperly, the time delay should not be set longer than the trip S1 breaker com-mand’spulsewidth/duration.

I/O Selection — The I/O Selection button opens the 50BF#1Source1BreakerFailureOutputs/BlockingInputsSelectionDialogScreen(Figure4-76). This screenallowsanyinputortheFuseLoss(FL)func-tiontobeselectedtoblockthe50BF#1Function.The50BF#1Functioncanalsobeusedtoactivateaselectedoutputwhenittimesout.

I/O Initiate — The I/O Initiate button opens the 50BF#1Source1BreakerFailureInitiateInputs/InitiateOutputsSelectionDialogScreen(Figure4-77).This screenallowstheselectionofoutputsorinputsthatcanbeusedtoinitiateabreakerfailure.Anyoftheoutputs can also be selected to initiate a breaker failure.Figure4-75illustratesthelogiccombinationsthat can be implemented.

Save/Cancel — The Save selection saves the 50BF#1Source1BreakerFailure settings either to an open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous open screen.

Figure 4-74 50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure Dialog Screen

OR

Trip S1 (S2) BreakerCommand

Output Initiate

DFT Current > PUDelay Trip Signal

Input Initiate

AND

Figure 4-75 Breaker Failure Logic Diagran


4–73

Figure 4-76 50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure I/O Selection Dialog Screen

Figure 4-77 50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure Initiate Inputs/Initiate Outputs Selection Dialog Screen


4–74

50BF #2 SOURCE 2 BREAKER FAILURE

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/50BF#2

The 50BF#2Source2BreakerFailureselection from the Function Settings group (Figure 4-34)opens the 50BF#2Source2BreakerFailure dialog screen(Figure4-78).The50BF#2Source2BreakerFailureFunctionincludesthesamefeaturesas50BF#1exceptthatitmonitorsforabreakerfailureoftheSource 2 breaker and Output 1 for Trip S1 is the default output setting.

S1 BF SOURCE 1 BREAKER FAILURE (BREAKER STATUS)

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/S1BF

The S1 BF Source 1 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status)selectionfromtheFunctionSettingsgroup(Figure4-34)openstheS1BFSource1BreakerFailure(BreakerStatus)dialogscreen(Figure4-79).

The Source 1 breaker status inputs are monitored for breaker failure. The Source 1 breaker is considered failedwhenthebreakerstatushasnotchangedstatewithintheprogrammabletimeafteratripcommandis issued.

When the Simultaneous Transfer mode is selected (Common Function Settings Figure 4-35), and a breaker failure occurs on Source 1 that should havetripped,thebreakerthatwasjustclosedwillbetripped.ThispreventstheNewSourcefromcon-tinuing to be connected through the failed breaker to the old source that may be faulted.

If the Sequential Transfer mode is selected (Com-monFunctionSettingsFigure4-35), then a close commandwillnotbesentsincethebreakerstatuswouldindicatethatthetrippedbreakerdidnotopen.Since the transfer could not be completed, the In-

completeTransferLockouttimerwouldtimeoutandgenerate a lockout condition.


Time Delay — (0 to 30 cycles) The Source 1 breaker isconsideredfailedwhenthebreakerstatushasnotchangedstatewithintheprogrammabletimeaftera trip command is issued.

NOTE: TohaveS1BFFunctionworkingproperly,the time delay should not be set longer than the trip S2 breaker command’s pulsewidth/duration.

I/O Selection — The I/O Selection button opens the S1BFSource1BreakerFailureOutputsBlock-ing InputsSelectionDialogScreen(Figure4-80). ThisscreenallowsanyinputortheFuseLoss(FL)functiontobeselectedtoblocktheS1BFFunction.TheS1BFFunctioncanalsobeusedtoactivateaselectedoutputwhenittimesout.

Save/Cancel — The Save selection saves the S1BFSource1BreakerFailure(BreakerStatus) settings either to an open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous open screen.

S2 BF SOURCE 2 BREAKER FAILURE (BREAKER STATUS)

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/S2BF

TheS2BFSource2BreakerFailure(BreakerSta-tus)selectionfromtheFunctionSettingsgroup(Fig-ure4-34)openstheS2BFSource2BreakerFailure(BreakerStatus)dialogscreen(Figure4-81).TheS2BFSource2BreakerFailureFunctionincludesthesamefeaturesasS1BFexceptthatitmonitorsfor a breaker failure of the Source 2 breaker.

Figure 4-78 50BF #2 Source 2 Breaker Failure Dialog Screen


4–75

Figure 4-79 S1 BF Source 1 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status) Dialog Screen

Figure 4-80 S1 BF Source 1 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status) I/O Selection Dialog Screen

Figure 4-81 S2 BF Source 2 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status) Dialog Screen


4–76

Figure 4-82 60FL Bus VT Fuse Loss Dialog Screen

60FL BUS VT FUSE LOSS

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/60FL

The60FLBusVTFuseLossselectionfromtheFunc-tionSettingsgroup(Figure4-34)opensthe60FLBusVTFuseLossdialogscreen(Figure4-82).


Delta Voltage Pickup—The60FL BusVTFuse-Loss condition is detected by comparing either the Three-Phase voltage of the motor bus to the Three-Phasevoltageoftheconnectedsource(VT’sin Three-Phase connection) or the Single Phase voltage of the motor bus to the Single Phase volt-agesoftheconnectedsource(VT’sinsinglephaseconnection):

• PhaseAtoPhaseA

• PhaseBtoPhaseB

• PhaseCtoPhaseC

Time Delay—ATimeDelaycanbeappliedtodelaythe60FL BusVTFuse-Lossfunctionoutput.

Bus VT Fuse Loss Condition — When the differ-enceinvoltagebetweenthebusandtheconnectedsourceispresentforthetimedelaytheMBTSwillrespond based on the selection to either Block TransferorperformaFixedTimeTransferwhenatransfer is initiated. Since the bus voltage cannot be observed the only possible transfer that could beperformedistheFixedTimeTransfer.

I/O Selection — The I/O Selection button opens the60FL BusVTFuse-LossI/OSelectionDialogScreen(Figure4-83) thatallowsany inputor theFuseLoss(FL)functiontobeselectedtoblockthe60FLFunction.The60FLFunctioncanalsobeusedtoactivateaselectedoutputwhenittimesout.


4–77

Figure 4-83 60FL Bus VT Fuse-Loss Function Inputs/Outputs Selection Dialog Screen


4–78

81 BUS VOLTAGE FREQUENCY

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/81

Figure4-84displaysthesettingsforthe81#1BusVoltage Frequency function. The settings for the81#2BusVoltageFrequencyarethesameasthe81#1.

Enable/Disable — The top right corner of the dis-playincludesacommandbuttonthatwilldisableorenablethefunction.Thisselectionallowsthe81#1BusVoltageFrequencytobedisabled(orenabled)independent from the 81#2BusVoltageFrequency.

Pickup—The 81 #1(2) BusVoltage FrequencyFunctiondetectsadropinfrequencyofthemotorbus. If the frequency is less than the Pickup setting (50.00to67.00Hz)or(40.00to57.00Hzfor50Hzunit) for a time period that exceeds the Time Delay setting,thenan81#1or81#2willbeindicatedandan output can be activated.

The81#1functioncanbeusedforloadshedding(Common Setting Outputs Load Shedding). The 81 Function is automatically disabled when the busphasevoltageinputislessthan5to15V(PositiveSequence) based on the frequency, or less than 5 V(SinglePhase).

Time Delay—ATimeDelay(5to65500cycles)canbeappliedtodelaytheBusVoltageFrequencyoutput.

I/O Selection — The I/O Selection button opens the 81#1BusVoltageFrequencyI/O Selection Dialog Screen(Figure4-85) thatallowsany inputor theFuse Loss (FL) function to be selected to blockthe81#1(2)Function.The81#1(2)Functioncanalsobeusedtoactivateaselectedoutputwhenittimes out.

Save/Cancel — The Save selection saves the 81#1(2)BusVoltageFrequencyFunctionDialogScreen settings either to an open file or to the tar-get MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous open screen.


4–79

Figure 4-84 81 #1(2) Bus Voltage Frequency Function Dialog Screen

Figure 4-85 81 #1(2) Bus Voltage Frequency Function Inputs/Outputs Selection Dialog Screen


4–80

Time Delay—ATimeDelaycanbeappliedtodelaythe81RROCOF(BusVoltage)functionoutput.Thetime delay and magnitude settings of the 81R should be based on simulation studies.

Negative Sequence Voltage Inhibit — The func-tion uses the negative sequence voltage to block the 81R.

Increasing ROCOF — The Increasing ROCOF(BusVoltage)canbeselectedaseitherEnableorDisable.WhentheIncreasingROCOFisselectedto Disable, the 81R function detects the rate of change of frequency of the motor bus voltage in the decreasing direction only, and the 81R function is blocked to detect the increasing direction. When the IncreasingROCOFisselectedtoEnable,the81Rfunction detects the rate of change of frequency of the motor bus voltage in both the increasing and decreasing directions.

I/O Selection — The I/O Selection button opens the 81RROCOF(BusVoltage)I/O Selection Dialog Screen(Figure4-87) thatallowsany inputor theFuseLoss(FL)functiontobeselectedtoblockthe81R#1(2)Function.The81R#1(2)Functioncanalsobeusedtoactivateaselectedoutputwhenittimes out.

Save/Cancel — The Save selection saves the 81R#1(2)ROCOF(BusVoltage)FunctionDialogScreen settings either to an open file or to the tar-get MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous open screen.

81R (Rate Of Change Of Frequency) (BUS VOLTAGE)

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/81R

Figure 4-86 displays the settings for the 81R #1ROCOF (Bus Voltage) function. The settings forthe81R#2ROCOF(BusVoltage)arethesameasthe81R#1.

NOTE: Bus VT configuration must be set toThree-Phasetoenablethe81RROCOFFunction.

Enable/Disable — The top right corner of the dis-playincludesacommandbuttonthatwilldisableorenablethefunction.Thisselectionallowsthe81R#1ROCOF(BusVoltage)tobedisabled(orenabled)independent from the 81R#2.

Pickup — The81RRateofChangeofFrequency(ROCOF)BusVoltage function is used to detectthe rate of change of the frequency of the motor bus as it decays. When the bus is disconnected from the original source the frequency begins to decrease and the longer the bus is disconnected the faster the frequency changes. This function is usedtorecognizethattheROCOFhasexceededthe Pickup setting.

NOTE: Setting the Pickup to a minimum value of 0.2Hz/secisrecommendedwhenusingnominal frequencies.

This function is typically used for load shedding. If a load that is causing the frequency to change quickly can be disconnected, then a transfer may still be possible.The81RFunctionisautomaticallydisabledduring unbalanced faults and other disturbances.


4–81

Figure 4-86 81R #1(2) ROCOF (Bus Voltage) Function Dialog Screen

Figure 4-87 81R #1(2) ROCOF (Bus Voltage) Inputs/Outputs Selection Dialog Screen


4–82

CCM (CLOSE CIRCUIT MONITOR)

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/CCM

Figure 4-90 displays the settings for the CCM(Close Circuit Monitor) function. The settings for theCCM#2CloseCircuitMonitorarethesameastheCCM#1.

The CCM inputs are provided for monitoring the continuity of the close circuits. The inputs can be usedfornominalclosecoilvoltagesof24Vdcto250Vdc.Closecircuitmonitoringisperformedinthe active breaker status only. Both the DC supply and continuity for the circuit is monitored. If a close coil is detected as being open for the time delay then transfers are blocked.

TheM-4272CloseCoilMonitorwillblockalltrans-fers and illuminate the appropriate alarm LED on theunitfrontpanelwhenallofthefollowingcondi-tions exist:

• The M-4272 CCM is connected to thetarget close coil circuit.

• TheCCMFunctionisenabled.

• Anopenconditionhasbeendetectedinthe close coil circuit for the duration of the Time Delay.

TheM-4272CCMFunctioniscomprisedoftwoele-ments;theclosecoilcircuitopendetectioncircuitelement and the block all transfers element. The closecoilcircuitopendetectioncircuitwillilluminatethealarmLEDevenwhentheM-4272isnotphysi-cally connected to the close coil circuit. When the M-4272 is not connected to the close coil circuit, then the appropriate CCM alarm LED on the unit front panel should be labeled as necessary to identify the alarm as not valid. With the M-4272 connected totheclosecoilcircuittheCCMFunctionmustbeenabled in order for the M-4272 to block all trans-fers. If the M-4272 is not connected to the close coil circuit, there is no affect on transfer operation.

The output of the Close Circuit Monitoring function can be programmed as an alarm to alert mainte-nance personnel.

CCM Connection Considerations — External connections for the Close Circuit Monitoring func-tionareshowninFigures4-88,4-89andFigures5-5 and 5-6.

The default Close Circuit Monitor input voltage is 250Vdc.SeeSection5.5,Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers, (Table5-4 forCCM#1,Table5-6forCCM#2) forotheravailableclosecircuit inputvoltage selections.

Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. recommends that theM-4272 CCM circuit be connected directly to the close coil, bypassing the anti-pump “Y” relay por-tionoftheclosecircuitasillustratedinFigure4-88.

The type of anti-pump “Y” relay that is often found withintheclosecoilcircuitisgenerallyahighimped-ancetype,suchasanIDECRRSeriesPowerRelay.The relay coil resistance is high (approximately 8.5 to10KOhms),andit’sratedpickupcurrentis11to13mA,±15%at20°C.However,therelay’sdropoutvoltageisapproximately10to15%ofrated110Vdc voltage. Therefore, the anti-pump relay may be heldupandwouldnotdropoutuntil the leakagecurrentisreducedtoapproximately2mA.

CAUTION: Connecting the M-4272 Close Coil Monitor(CCM)inparallelwithotherrelayCCMsintheclosecoilcircuitwheretheanti-pump“Y”relayis not bypassed may not provide reliable breaker closing operations.

If the close coil circuit configuration does not sup-port connecting the CCM directly to the close coil (Figure4-89),thenBeckwithElectricCo.,Inc.doesnot recommend connecting the M-4272 CCM in parallelwithotherrelayCCMs.IftwoormoreCCMsare connected to the close coil circuit, there is a high probabilitythattheanti-pump“Y”coilwillnotdropout. Therefore, only one CCM, either a M-4272 or other relay should be used in the close coil circuit to provide reliable breaker closing operation.

Enable/Disable — The top right corner of the dis-play includesacommandbutton thatwilldisableor enable the function. This selection allows theCCM#1(CloseCircuitMonitor)tobedisabled(orenabled) independent from the CCM#2.

Time Delay—ATimeDelaycanbeappliedtodelaythe CCM (Close Circuit Monitor) function output.

Dropout Time Delay—ATimeDelaycanbeap-plied to delay the reset of the CCM (Close Circuit Monitor) function output.


4–83

I/O Selection — The I/O Selection button opens the CCM (Close Circuit Monitor) I/O Selection Dialog Screen(Figure4-91) thatallowsany inputor theFuseLoss(FL)functiontobeselectedtoblocktheCCM (Close Circuit Monitor).TheCCM#1(2)Func-tion can also be used to activate a selected output whenittimesout.

M-4272

Close CircuitMonitoring Input

OutputContact

StationBattery+

OtherContacts

-

52b

LS

LCS

Y

52CloseCoil

Y

Y LS

-+

Legend

Anti-pump relay prevents reclosing on a sustained close command.

A spring charge limit switch shown with breaker closing spring discharged.

Latch check switch, closed when latch is reset.

YY

LS

LCS

Figure 4-88 Recommended Close Circuit Monitoring Input Configuration

Save/Cancel — The Save selection saves the CCM (Close Circuit Monitor)FunctionDialogScreenset-tings either to an open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous open screen.


4–84

M-4272

Close CircuitMonitoring Input

OutputContact

StationBattery+

OtherContacts

-

52b

LS

LCS

Y

52CloseCoil

Y

Y LS

-+

Legend

Anti-pump relay prevents reclosing on a sustained close command.

A spring charge limit switch shown with breaker closing spring discharged.

Latch check switch, closed when latch is reset.

YY

LS

LCS

Figure 4-89 Close Circuit Monitoring Input Configuration With Anti-pump Relay Not Bypassed


4–85

Figure 4-91 CCM (Close Circuit Monitor) Inputs/Outputs Selection Dialog Screen

Figure 4-90 CCM (Close Circuit Monitor) Function Dialog Screen


4–86

When the Output Contact is open, and continuity existsintheTripCircuit,asmallcurrentflowsthatactivates the Trip Circuit Monitoring Input. If the Trip Circuit is open, and the output contact is open, no currentflowsandtheTripCircuitMonitoringInputisdeactivated.AnOutputContact that isweldedclosedwouldalsocausetheTripCircuitMonitoringInput to deactivate, indicating failure of the Output Contact.

WhentheOutputContactisclosed,nocurrentflowsin the Trip Circuit Monitoring Input. If the M-4272 has issued a trip command to close the Output Contact and Trip Circuit Monitoring Input remains activated, this is an indication that the Output Contact failed to close.

The output of the Trip Circuit Monitoring function can be programmed as an alarm to alert maintenance personnel.

TheM-4272TripCoilMonitor(TCM)willblockalltransfers and illuminate the appropriate alarm LED on the unit front panel when all of the followingconditions exist:

• The M-4272 TCM is connected to thetarget trip coil circuit.

• TheTCMFunctionisenabled.

• Anopenconditionhasbeendetectedinthe trip coil circuit for the duration of the Time Delay.

TCM (TRIP CIRCUIT MONITOR)

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/TCM

Figure4-93displaysthesettingsfortheTCM(TripCircuit Monitor) function. The settings for the TCM #2TripCircuitMonitorarethesameastheTCM#1.

Enable/Disable — The top right corner of the dis-play includesacommandbutton thatwilldisableor enable the function. This selection allows the TCM#1 (TripCircuitMonitor) to be disabled (orenabled) independent from the TCM#2.

The TCM inputs are provided for monitoring the con-tinuity of the trip circuits. The inputs can be used for nominaltripcoilvoltagesof24Vdcto250Vdc.Tripcircuit monitoring is performed in the active breaker status only. Both the DC supply and continuity for the circuit is monitored. If a trip coil is detected as being open for the time delay then transfers are blocked.

External connections for the Trip Circuit Monitoring functionareshowninFigure4-92andFigures5-5and 5-6. The default Trip Circuit Monitor input volt-ageis250Vdc.SeeSection5.5,Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers, (Table 5-3 for TCM#1,Table5-5forTCM#2)forotheravailabletripcircuitinput voltage selections.

M-4272

Trip CircuitMonitoring Input

OutputContact

StationBattery+

-

OtherContacts

52a

52TripCoil

+

-

Figure 4-92 Trip Circuit Monitoring Input


4–87

Figure 4-93 TCM (Trip Circuit Monitor) Function Dialog Screen

The M-4272 TCM Function is comprised of twoelements;thetripcoilcircuitopendetectioncircuitelement and the block all transfers element. The trip coilcircuitopendetectioncircuitwillilluminatethealarmLEDevenwhentheM-4272isnotphysicallyconnected to the trip coil circuit. When the M-4272 is not connected to the trip coil circuit, then the ap-propriate TCM alarm LED on the unit front panel should be labeled as necessary to identify the alarm as not valid.

With the M-4272 connected to the trip coil circuit theTCMFunctionmustbeenabledinorderfortheM-4272 to block all transfers. If the M-4272 is not connected to the trip coil circuit, there is no affect on transfer operation.

Time Delay—A TimeDelay can be applied todelay the TCM (Trip Circuit Monitor) function output.

Dropout Time Delay—ATimeDelaycanbeap-plied to delay the reset of the TCM (Trip Circuit Monitor) function output.

I/O Selection — The I/O Selection button opens the TCM (Trip Circuit Monitor) I/O Selection Dialog Screen(Figure4-93) thatallowsany inputor theFuseLoss(FL)functiontobeselectedtoblocktheTCM (Trip Circuit Monitor).TheTCM#1(2)Func-tion can also be used to activate a selected output whenittimesout.

Save/Cancel — The Save selection saves the TCM (trip Circuit Monitor)FunctionDialogScreensettingseither to an open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous open screen.


4–88

Figure 4-94 TCM (Trip Circuit Monitor) Inputs/Outputs Selection Dialog Screen


4–89

ISSL (ISSLOGIC®)

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/ISSL

Figure4-95displaysthesettingsfortheISSL(ISS-Logic)function.ThesettingsfortheISSL#2through6arethesameastheISSL#1.

The MBTS provides six logic functions and associ-ated ISSLogic. The logic functions can be used to allowexternal devices to trip through theMBTS,providing additional target information for the ex-ternal device. More importantly, these functions can beusedinconjunctionwithISSLogictoexpandthecapabilityoftheMBTSbyallowingtheusertodefinecustomized operating logic.

Enable/Disable — The top right corner of each ISSlogic tab includesacommandbutton thatwilldisableorenablethefunction.ThisselectionallowstheISSL#1(ISSlogic)tobedisabled(orenabled)independent from the ISSL#2,#3,#4,#5and#6.

ISSLogic Settings and Logic FunctionsISSlogic includes six Initiating Input sources:

• InitiatingOutputs

• InitiatingFunctionTimeOut

• Initiating Function Pickup (including theISSLogicFunctionsthemselves)

• InitiatingInputs

• InitiatingSystemStatus

• InitiationusingtheCommunicationPoint

TheonlylimitationisthatanISSLogicFunctionmaynot be used to initiate itself.

There are three Blocking Input sources:

• BlockingInputs

• BlockSystemStatus

• BlockingusingtheCommunicationPoint

The activation state of the input function selected in theInitiatingFunctioncanbeeitherTimeout(Trip)orPickup. The desired Time Delay for security consid-erationscanbeobtainedintheISSLogicFunctionTime Delay setting.

TheISSLogicFunctioncanbeprogrammedtoper-formanyorallofthefollowingtasks:

• ChangetheActiveSettingProfile

• CloseanOutputContact

• BeactivatedforuseasaninputtoanotherISSLogicFunction

• Initiateatransfer

• Blockatransfer


4–90

Figure 4-95 ISSLogic® Function Dialog Screen


4–91

ISSLogic® Function SetupTosetupanISSLogicFunctionperformthefollowing:

1. FromtheISScom® Main Screen menu select System/Setup/Setpoints/ISSL. ISSLogicwilldisplaytheISSLogicFunc-tiondialogscreen(Figure4-95).

2. Fromthetoprightcornerofthescreenselect the desired ISSL tab, then select Enable.

3. If desired select the Initiating Outputs button.ISSLogicwilldisplaytheInitiatingOutputsSelectionscreen(Figure4-96).

a. Select the desired Initiating Outputs, then select OK.

b. Select the desired Initiating Output LogicFunction(AND/OR).

6. Ifdesiredselect the InitiatingFunctionTimeout button. ISSLogic will displaytheInitiatingFunctionTimeoutSelectionscreen(Figure4-97).

7. Select the desired Initiating FunctionTimeout, then select OK.

8. Ifdesiredselect the InitiatingFunctionPickup button. ISSLogic will displaytheInitiatingFunctionPickupSelectionscreen(Figure4-98).

9. Select the desired Initiating FunctionPickup, then select OK.

Figure 4-98 Selection Screen for Initiating Function Pickup

Figure 4-97 Selection Screen for Initiating Function Timeout

Figure 4-96 Selection Screen for Initiating Outputs


4–92

10. If desired select the Initiating System Status button. ISSLogic®willdisplaytheInitiating System Status Selection screen (Figure4-99).

Figure 4-99 Selection Screen for Initiating System Status


4–93

11. Select the desired Initiating System Sta-tus selection(s), then select OK.

12. SelectthedesiredLogicFunction(AND/OR/NOR/NAND). The selected LogicFunction(AND/OR/NOR/NAND)willap-plyonlytotheInitiatingFunctionTimeoutSelection(s), Initiating FunctionPickupSelection(s) and Initiating System Status Selection(s).TheselectedLogicFunc-tionwillignorethefunctionsandSystemStatus that are not selected.

13. If desired select the “Initiate via Com-munication point”. Select Check Box.

14. If desired select Initiating Input button. ISSLogic®willdisplaytheInitiatingInputSelectionscreen(Figure4-100).

15. Select the desired Initiating Input(s), then select OK.

16. Select the desired Initiating Inputs Logic Function(AND/OR).

17. If desired select Blocking Inputs button. ISSLogicwilldisplaytheBlockingInputsSelectionscreen(Figure4-101).

18. Select the desired Blocking Input(s), then select OK.

19. If desired select Block System Status button. ISSLogicwill display theBlockSystemStatusSelectionscreen(Figure4-102).

20. Select the desired Block System Status(s), then select OK.

21. Select the desired Blocking Inputs/Block System Status Logic Function (AND/OR). The selected Blocking Inputs/Block-ingSystemStatusLogicFunction(AND/OR)willapplyonlytotheselectedBlock-ing Input(s) and Blocking System Status Selection(s);theselectedLogicFunctionwillignoretheInputsandSystemStatusthat are not selected.

22. If desired select the “Block via Commu-nication point”. Select Check Box.

23. Select the desired Time Delay.

Figure 4-100 Selection Screen for Initiating Inputs

Figure 4-101 Selection Screen for Blocking Inputs


4–94

Figure 4-102 Selection Screen for Block System Status

NOTE: The DO/RST Timer is described in detail in the“Dropout/ResetTimerFeature”laterin this section.

24. Select the desired DO/RST Delay.

25. Select either Dropout Timer or Reset Timer.

NOTE: The ISSlogic® ProfileSwitch feature isdescribedindetailinthe“ChangeActiveProfile (ISSLogic)” later in this section.

26. Determine if Profile Switching will beactiveandproceedasfollows:

a. IfProfileSwitchingwillnotbeactivated,thenselect“NotActivated”.

b. IfProfileSwitchingwillbeactivatedthenselect the desire profile.

27. Select the desired Outputs.

28. Determine if a transfer or transfer block willbeinitiatedandproceedasfollows:

a. Ifatransferortransferblockwillnotbeinitiated,thenselect“NoTransferIniti-ate”.

b. If a transfer or transfer block will beInitiated then select the desire function.

29. Select Save, ISSlogicwill return to the SystemSetpointsDialogScreen(Figure4-34).

ISSL#1isnowsetup,theremainingISSLselectionscan be setup as desired.


4–95

PU Status

PU Time DelaySetting (30)

Output

25 35

Dropout Delay Timer

Seal in Delay

Seal in Delay

Dropout Delay

Cycles

PU Time Delay Timing

IPSlogic Functions (1 - 6)

A

B

C D

E

Figure 4-103 Dropout Delay Timer Logic Diagram

Reset Delay Timer

PU Status

Output

25 25

Reset Delay10 Cycles

12 8Cycles

ResetDelay

5

Seal InTimer

ResetDelay

10

PU Time Delay Timing

IPSlogic Functions (1 - 6)

A

DC

B

E

F

G

PU Time DelaySetting (30)

Figure 4-104 Reset Delay Timer Logic Diagram

Change Active Profile (ISSLogic®)To change the active profile simply select the de-siredprofile.The“Notactivated”selectionmeanstheprofilewillnotbechanged.Ifthepresentlyactiveprofileisselectedastheprofiletowhichtochangethereiseffectivelynochangesinceitwouldchangeto the same profile.

When an ISSLogic Function is enabled and thelogicbecomes“true”theISS#isalwaysactivatedso it could be used as an initiating input to any other ISSLogic.

SincetherearesixISSLogicFunctionspersettingprofile, depending on the number of different MBTS settings defined, the scheme may provide up to 24 different logic schemes.

DO/RST (Dropout/Reset) Timer FeatureThe DO/RST timer can be set as either Dropout or Reset mode. The operation of the Dropout Delay Timer and the Reset Delay Timer are described below.

Dropout Delay TimerTheDropoutDelayTimerlogicispresentedinFigure4-103.TheDropoutDelayTimerfeatureallowstheusertoaffectanoutputtimedelaythatstartswhentheISSLogicPUStatusdropsout(A)andcanholdthe Output (D) status true beyond the Output Seal In Delay value (C).

However,theSealInDelay(E)mayholdtheOutput(B) true if the time after ISSLogic PU Status dropout (A)andDropoutDelayTimervalue(D)arelessthanthe Seal In Delay time (E).

Reset Delay TimerTheResetDelayTimerlogicispresentedinFigure4-104.TheResetDelayTimer featureallows theuser to delay the reset of the PU Time Delay Timer andhold theaccumulated timervalue (A) for theduration of the Reset Time Delay time period (B). TheResetDelayTimerstartswhentheISSLogicPU Status drops out (C).

If the ISSLogic PU Status remains dropped out (D) after the reset delay has timed out, then the ISSLogicPUtimervaluewillberesettozero(E).

If theISSLogicPUStatusreasserts(F)whiletheReset Delay Timer is still timing, then the PU Timer Delay begins timing from the accumulated value (G).


4–96

Figure 4-105 ISSLogic Function Diagram

ISS

Logi

c F

unct

ions

Blo

ckin

g In

puts

Sel

ecta

ble

And

/Or

Pro

gram

mab

leIn

puts

and

AU

XIn

put

Blo

ck V

iaC

omm

unic

atio

nP

oint

Initi

atin

g In

puts

Initi

atin

g Fu

nctio

n

Sel

ecta

ble

And

/Or

Sel

ecta

ble

And

/Or/N

or/N

and

Sel

ecta

ble

And

/Or

Pro

gram

mab

leIn

puts

and

AU

XIn

put

Pro

gram

mab

lefu

nctio

n(s)

(Incl

. IS

SLo

gic

and

Sys

tem

Sta

tus)

Initi

atin

g O

utpu

ts

Sel

ecta

ble

And

/Or

Out

puts

Initi

ate

Via

Com

mun

icat

ion

Poi

nt

Pro

gram

med

Tim

e D

elay

Pro

gram

med

Out

puts

5-1

6

Log

inS

eque

nce

ofE

vent

s

0-65

,500

cyc

les

(109

1sec

at

60H

z)

Log

Pic

kup

inS

eque

nce

ofE

vent

s

ISS

Logi

c #

NA

ctiv

ated

This

sec

tion

of IS

SLo

gic

initi

ates

the

Func

tion

Ope

ratio

n

This

sec

tion

of IS

SLo

gic

is u

sed

to B

lock

the

Func

tion

Ope

ratio

n

This

sec

tion

of IS

SLo

gic

used

to a

ctiv

ate

the

desi

red

Out

put

Initi

ate

Tran

sfer

Pro

gram

med

Pro

file

Set

tings

Gro

ups

1-4

Blo

ckTr

ansf

er

Sel

ecta

ble

And

/Or

R

Installation – 5

5–1

5 Installation

5.1 General Information .................................................................... 5–1

5.2 Mechanical/Physical Dimensions .............................................. 5–2

5.3 External Connections ................................................................. 5–5

5.4 Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers ...................................... 5–15

5.5 ISScom® Communications and AnalysisSoftware Installation ................................................................. 5–20

5.6 Activating Initial Local Communications ................................. 5–20

5.7 Pre-Commissioning Checkout .................................................. 5–22

5.8 Initial Setup Procedure ............................................................ 5–23

5.1 General Information

NOTE: Prior to the installation of the equipment,it is essential to review the contents ofthis manual to locate data which may beof importance during the installationprocedures. The following is a quickreview of the contents of this chapter.

The person or group responsible for the installationof the MBTS will find herein all mechanicalinformation required for the physical installation,equipment ratings, and all external connections inthis chapter. For reference, the Three-LineConnection Diagrams are repeated fromChapter 4, System Settings and Setpoints.Further, a commissioning checkout procedure isoutlined using the HMI option to check the externalCT and VT connections. Additional tests whichmay be desirable at the time of installation aredescribed in Chapter 6, Testing.

Service Conditions and Conformity to CEStandardStating conformance to CE Standard EN 61010-12001, operation of this equipment within the followingservice conditions does not present any knownpersonnel hazards outside of those stated herin:

• 50 to 400 Centigrade

• Maximum relative humidity 80% fortemperatures up to 310 C, decreasing in alinear manner to 50% relative humidity at400 C.

This equipment will function properly, and at statedaccuracies beyond the limits of this CE Standard,as per the equipment's specifications, stated in thisInstruction Book.

It is suggested that the terminal connectionsillustrated here be transferred to station one-linewiring and three-line connection diagrams, stationpanel drawings and station DC wiring schematics.

If during the commissioning of the M-4272 DigitalMotor Bus Transfer System, additional tests aredesired, Chapter 6, Testing, may be consulted.


5–2

!"!#$#

%

&

%

'

(

%

%

)

%* *

+,

+-

+ ! ***

%.+/01

,+% %+,

,+%%%%+,

%

%

'

'.

2

3

32

**((%

%+ '

'%(0

'%(0

*345*6*3,*337

*33*

*3353*7

*25*7

* 5*7

*5* 27

*5*7

2*335 *7

2*25*7

Figure 5-1 Horizontal Unit Mechanical/Physical Dimensions

5.2 Mechanical/PhysicalDimensions

Figure 5-1 contains the physical dimensions of theMBTS that may be required for mounting the unit ona rack. Figure 5-2 provides panel mountingdimensions. Figure 5-3 provides vertical panelmounting dimiensions and Figure 5-4 provides cutoutdimensions.

Installation – 5

5–3

!"#$%

&'

Figure 5-2 Panel Mount Cutout Dimensions (Hortizontal and Vertical)


5–4

ENTEREXIT

STATUS

BRKROPEN

C LO S E DB R K R

C LO S E D

B R K R

R E S E T

STATUS

P S 2

SOURCE1

1

BRKROPEN

SOURCE2

12

14

16

11

13

15

1718

99

OUTPUTS

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

OPEN

B R K R B R K R

STATUS

S 1

OPEN

INPUTS

C O M 1

TCM-1OPEN

TCM-2OPENOPEN

CCM-1OPEN

910

78

P

OUT 7

OUT 8

OUTPUTS

OUT 5

OUT 6

OUT 3

OUT 4

OUT 1

OUT 2

M-4272

TMIntegrated Synchronizing SystemsITR I

HCE

CEL

KC

WTE

BCKB

ELEC

EM a d e in U .S .A .TW

CH

IRTI C ..O . NI CC NI.O C

T I M EYS N C

AID G /T I M E

YS N C

AID G /

O KSYSO KSYS

CCM-2

MOTOR BUS TRANSFER

10.2[25.91]

9.97[25.32]

19.00[48.26]

17.50[44.5]

18.31[46.51]

4.00[10.16]

1.48[3.76]

6.96[17.68]

0.35[0.89]

Figure 5-3 Vertical Unit Mechanical/Physical Dimensions

Installation – 5

5–5

Grounding RequirementsThe M-4272 is designed to be mounted in anadequately grounded metal panel, using groundingtechniques (metal-to-metal mounting) and hardwarethat assures a low impedance ground.

Unit IsolationSensing inputs should be equipped with test switchesand shorting devices where necessary to isolatethe unit from external potential or current sources.

Insulation CoordinationSensing Inputs: 60 V to 140 V, Installation CategoryIV, Transient Voltages not to exceed 5,000 V.

Torque Requirements• Terminals 1–74: 7.5 in-lbs, minimum, and

8.0 in-lbs, maximum

• Terminals 75–103: 8.5 in-lbs, minimum,and 9.0 in-lbs, maximum

MBTS OutputsAll outputs are shown in the de-energized state forstandard reference. MBTS standard reference isdefined as the non-asserted state, or power to theMBTS is removed. Output contacts #1 through #4and #9 through #16 are high speed operationcontacts. The power supply MBTS (P/S) is energizedwhen the power supply is OK. The self-test MBTSis energized when the MBTS has performed all self-tests successfully.

Replacement FusesF1–F4 replacement fuses must be fast-acting 3Amp, 250 V (3AB) Beckwith Electric Part Number420-00885.

5.3 External Connections

88888 WARNING: The protective grounding terminalmust be connected to an earthed ground anytimeexternal connections have been made to theunit.

88888 WARNING: ONLY DRY CONTACTS must beconnected to inputs (terminals 45 through 50with 51 common and terminals 5 through 16with 1 through 4 common) because these contactinputs are internally wetted. Application ofexternal voltage on these inputs may result indamage to the units.

88888 WARNING: Do not open live CT circuits. LiveCT circuits should be shorted prior todisconnecting CT wiring to the M-4272. Death orsevere electrical shock may result.

CAUTION: Mis-operation or permanent damagemay result to the unit if a voltage is applied toTerminals 17 through 24 that does not match theconfigured Trip and Close Circuit Monitoring inputvoltage.

To fulfill requirements for UL and CSA listings,terminal block connections must be made with No.12 AWG solid or stranded copper wire inserted in anAMP #324915 (or equivalent) connector, and wireinsulation used must be rated at 60° C minimum.

Power SupplyThe M-4272 power supplies (not redundant) mustbe powered from the same source.

+8 3 9 : ; +8 3 9 : ;

-

-

2 22

6 ,

33 3 3 3

-

-

,6 6 ,

,

,

%

Figure 5-4 Power Supply Connection


5–6

Figu

re 5

-5H

oriz

onta

l U

nit

Exte

rnal

Con

nect

ions

1.8888 8

WA

RN

ING

: ON

LY

DR

Y C

ON

TA

CT

S m

ust

be

con

nec

ted

to

inp

uts

(te

rmin

als

45 t

hro

ug

h 5

0 w

ith

51

com

mo

n a

nd

ter

min

als

5th

rou

gh

16

wit

h 1

th

rou

gh

4 c

om

mo

n)

bec

ause

th

ese

con

tact

inp

uts

are

inte

rnal

ly w

ette

d w

ith

24

V d

c. A

pp

licat

ion

of

exte

rnal

volt

age

on

thes

e in

pu

ts m

ay r

esu

lt in

dam

age

to th

e u

nit

s.

2.8888 8

WA

RN

ING

: Th

e p

rote

ctiv

e g

rou

nd

ing

term

inal

mu

st b

e co

nn

ecte

d to

an

ear

thed

gro

un

d a

ny

tim

e ex

tern

al c

on

nec

tio

ns

hav

eb

een

mad

e to

the

un

it.

3.3

CA

UT

ION

: Bef

ore

mak

ing

conn

ectio

ns to

the

Trip

/Clo

se C

ircui

t Mon

itorin

g in

put,

see

M-4

272

Inst

ruct

ion

Boo

k S

ectio

n 5.

5, C

ircui

t Boa

rdS

witc

hes

and

Jum

pers

, for

the

info

rmat

ion

rega

rdin

g se

tting

Trip

/Clo

se C

ircui

t Mon

itorin

g in

put v

olta

ge. C

onne

ctin

g a

volta

ge o

ther

than

the

volta

ge th

at th

e un

it is

con

figur

ed to

may

resu

lt in

mis

-ope

ratio

n or

per

man

ent d

amag

e to

the

unit.

4.3

CA

UT

ION

: Con

nect

ing

the

M-4

272

Clo

se C

oil M

onito

r (C

CM

) in

para

llel w

ith o

ther

rela

y C

CM

s in

the

Clo

se C

oil C

ircui

t whe

re th

e an

ti-pu

mp

"Y"

rela

y is

not

byp

asse

d m

ay n

ot p

rovi

de re

liabl

e br

eake

r clo

sing

ope

ratio

n.

NO

TE:

Con

trol

/Sta

tus

Inpu

ts IN

-17

and

IN-1

8 m

ay b

e us

ed to

sel

ect s

etpo

int p

rofil

es.

NO

TE:

All

rela

ys a

re s

how

n in

the

de-e

nerg

ized

sta

te, a

nd w

ithou

t pow

er a

pplie

d to

the

rela

y.

NO

TE:

The

pow

er s

uppl

y re

lay

(P/S

) is

ener

gize

d w

hen

the

pow

er s

uppl

y is

func

tioni

ng p

rope

rly.

NO

TE:

The

sel

f-te

st r

elay

is e

nerg

ized

whe

n th

e re

lay

has

perf

orm

ed a

ll se

lf-te

sts

succ

essf

ully

.

3

*<

*

%

*0

0

(

%

-

%'&)

(%%

%*%*

,,

2

3

9

*

(18-(

%+

(-,

-

-

+839:

;

-

-

3,

39%

3/

3)"

%

6

,

23

2 3

32

2 2

232

22

22

2+839:

;

6

,

2

3

%(

2 22

,

,

, ,

1

,

32

%%+,

%+,

%%+,

%+,

%+

,6

6,

6,

,6

23

/

%(

/

/

=/

/

=/

/

%

%

%

09(1:+(;

0%:+;

%+

)

23

23

23

,6

+0(>+,

-+&>0

,3

(*

3)"

3)"

&1?%

%&)+(

+.%(

%%)%'

-%

%1

%(+(

23

33

3

3

3

9

99%

99%%

99

9

9% %

99 %

99% %

99 %

99

9

**8 82

(%'

(%'1

?

@@

@

Installation – 5

5–7

Figure 5-6 Vertical Unit External Connections

60Hz

66

79

BE

CK

WIT

HE

LE

CT

RIC

CO

.IN

C.

72

7-

54

4-

23

26

76

75

77

78

R T N

AVAB

ETHERNETCOM 2

V

GIRI B-

COM 2RS232

1

NI2

3

4

5

89

82

80

81

83

84

85

86

87

88

95

92

90

91

93

94

98

1A 96

5A

97

99

65-185-8 526

100

101

FOR

CO

NTAC

T RATIN

GS SEE IN

STRU

CTIO

NAL M

ANU

AL

WAR

NIN

G! C

ON

TACT W

ITH TER

MIN

ALS MAY C

AUSE ELEC

TRIC

SHO

CK

+C O M 3RS 4 8 5

BBCV

V

-CCAV

S252SP/

V

41

42

43

45

44

46

AABV

V

B

C

BCV

VCA

I N P U T SV

V

47

48

49

50

!

51

LA

RG

O,

FL

33

77

3

619

0118

thA

VE

NO

.

9

6

7

8

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

+-

18

17

19

2501254824

15

16

13

14

LOCKOUT 59

AVABV

P/S

BUS

B

C

BCV

VCA

V

V8

52

53

54

55

57

56

58

7

S2I

+

-

6

5

60

61

62

63

64

65

++

20

21

22

23

+ 24

MO

DEL: M

-4272

25

26

27

28

30

29 50Hz

31

F 4

F 3

9

10

11

12

F 2 73

P S 1

+

-

4

P S 2

F 1

68

67

69

70

71

72

P S 174

39

FIRM

WAR

E: D-0135

32

33

34

35

37

SERIAL N

O.

36

38

40

102

103

2 5 0 V ,3 A M P ,

( 3 A B )

S252b/

S252a/S2

52a/

S152SP/

S152b/

52a/S1

52a/

RTNI N

SELF

TEST

OUT- PUTS

CLOSE S2

3 TRIP S2

2 CLOSE S1

1 TRIP S1

P S 2

S1I

OUT- PUTS

CCM-2

-

-

-

TCM-2

CCM-1

TCM-1

IN-PUTS

SOURCE1

BLOCKING

65-185-8 526

SOURCE2

SOURCE2

SOURCE1

RATED

NOM

(CURRENT

-

60

140V

50/60Hz

RATED

VOLTAGE

NOMINAL

(

18I N

17I N

16I N

15I N

14I N

13I N

12I N

11I N

10I N

9I N

8I N

7I N

6I N

5I N

4I N

3I N

2I N

I N 1I N

ULLISTEDIND.CONT.EQ.83F4

USC

((

2

1

4

3

U.S. PATENT 7,468,593

1. 88888 WARNING: ONLY DRYCONTACTS must be connectedto inputs (terminals 45 through50 with 51 common andterminals 5 through 16 with1 through 4 common) becausethese contact inputs areinternally wetted with 24 V dc.Application of external voltageon these inputs may result indamage to the units.

2. 88888 WARNING: The protectivegrounding terminal must beconnected to an earthedground any time externalconnections have been madeto the unit.

3. 3CAUTION: Before makingconnections to the Trip/CloseCircuit Monitoring input, seeM-4272 Instruction Book Section5.5, Circuit Board Switches andJumpers, for the informationregarding setting Trip/CloseCircuit Monitoring input voltage.Connecting a voltage other thanthe voltage that the unit isconfigured to may result inmis-operation or permanentdamage to the unit.

4. 3CAUTION: Connecting the M-4272 Close Coil Monitor (CCM)in parallel with other relay CCMsin the Close Coil Circuit wherethe anti-pump "Y" relay is notbypassed may not provide reliablebreaker closing operation.

NOTE: Control/Status Inputs IN-17 andIN-18 may be used to selectsetpoint profiles.

NOTE: All relays are shown in the de-energized state, and withoutpower applied to the relay.

NOTE: The power supply relay (P/S) isenergized when the power supplyis functioning properly.

NOTE: The self-test relay is energizedwhen the relay has performed allself-tests successfully.


5–8

Figure 5-7 Three-Phase Wye-Wye VT Three-Line Connection Diagram


A

B

C

MOTOR MOTOR

52S1 52S2

A

B

C

A B C A B C

SOURCE 1 (S1)

VT-S1 Three VT Wye-Wye Connection VT-S2 Three VT Wye-Wye Connection

VT-B Three VT Wye-Wye ConnectionM-4272

STATION BUS SYSTEM


SOURCE 2 (S2)

83

81

79

M-4272VA

VB

VC

78

80

82

89

87

85

M-4272VA

VB

VC

84

86

88

959391

VA VB VC

90 92 94

IS1

1

M-4272


97

96

IS21M-4272


99

98

Installation – 5

5–9

Figure 5-8 Three-Phase Wye-Primary/Wye Secondary, One Phase Grounded VT Three-Line Connection Diagram


A

B

C

MOTOR MOTOR

52S1 52S2

A

B

C

A B C A B C

SOURCE 1 (S1)



VT-B Three VT Wye-WyeAlternate Connection

M-4272

STATION BUS SYSTEM


SOURCE 2 (S2)

83

81

79

M-4272VA

VB

VC

78

80

82

89

87

85

M-4272VA

VB

VC

84

86

88

959391

VA VB VC

90 92 94

IS1

1

M-4272


97

96

IS21M-4272


99

98


5–10

Figure 5-9 Three-Phase Open Delta VT Three-Line Connection Diagram


A

B

C

MOTOR MOTOR

52S1 52S2

A

B

C

A B C A B C

STATION BUS SYSTEM

1 CT-S1 and CT-S2 are single phase CTs. They both must be connected to the same phase,either Phase A, Phase B or Phase C respectively.

VT-S1 Two VT Open-Delta Connection VT-S2 Two VT Open-Delta Connection



83

81

79

M-4272VAB

VBC

VCA

78

80

82

89

87

85

M-4272VAB

VBC

VCA

84

86

88

959391

M-4272

VAB VBC VCA

90 92 94

IS1

1

M-4272


97

96

IS21M-4272


99

98

Installation – 5

5–11

Figure 5-10 Single-Phase, Phase-Ground VT Three-Line Connection Diagram


A

B

C

MOTOR MOTOR

52S1 52S2

A

B

C

A B C A B C

STATION BUS SYSTEM




2

2

VT-B One VTPhase-GroundConnection

2

VT-S1, VT-S2 and VT-B are single phase VTs. They all must be connected tothe same phase, either Phase A-To-Ground, Phase B-To-Ground or Phase C-To-Ground.

SOURCE S1 (S1) SOURCE 2 (S2)

83

81

79

M-4272VA

VB

VC

78

80

82

89

87

85

M-4272VA

VB

VC

84

86

88

959391

M-4272

VA VB VC

90 92 94

IS1

1

M-4272


97

96

IS21M-4272


99

98


5–12

Figure 5-11 Single-Phase, Phase-Phase VT Three-Line Connection Diagram


A

B

C

MOTOR MOTOR

52S1 52S2

A

B

C

A B C A B C

SOURCE 1 (S1)

STATION BUS SYSTEM




2

2

VT-B One VTPhase-PhaseConnection

2

VT-S1, VT-S2 and VT-B are single phase VTs. They all must be connected to thesame phase, either Phase A-To-Phase B, Phase B-To-Phase C or Phase A-To -Phase C.

SOURCE 2 (S2)

83

81

79

M-4272VAB

VBC

VCA

78

80

82

89

87

85

M-4272VAB

VBC

VCA

84

86

88

959391

M-4272

VAB VBC VCA

90 92 94

IS1

1

M-4272


97

96

IS21M-4272


99

98

Installation – 5

5–13

Figure 5-12 Single-Phase, Source Side, Phase-Ground, Three-Phase Bus Side, Wye-Wye Three-Line Connection Diagram


A

B

C

MOTOR MOTOR

52S1 52S2

A

B

C

A B C A B C


STATION BUS SYSTEM




2

2 VT-S1 and VT-S2 are single phase VTs. They both must be connected to thesame phase, either Phase A-To-Ground, Phase B-To-Ground or Phase C-To -Ground.

VT-B Three VT Wye-Wye Connection

83

81

79

M-4272VA

VB

VC

78

80

82

89

87

85

M-4272VA

VB

VC

84

86

88

M-4272

959391

VA VB VC

90 92 94

IS1

1

M-4272


97

96

IS21M-4272


99

98


5–14

Figure 5-13 Single-Phase, Source Side, Phase-Phase, Three-Phase Bus Side, Open Delta Three-Line Connection Diagram


A

B

C

MOTOR MOTOR

52S1 52S2

A

B

C

A B C A B C

SOURCE 1 (S1) SOURCE 2(S2)

STATION BUS SYSTEM




2

2 VT-S1 and VT-S2 are single phase VTs. They both must be connected to the samephase, either Phase A-To-Phase B, Phase B-To-Phase C or Phase A-To -Phase C.


959391

M-4272

VAB VBC VCA

90 92 94

83

81

79

M-4272VAB

VBC

VCA

78

80

82

89

87

85

M-4272VAB

VBC

VCA

84

86

88

IS1

1

M-4272


97

96

IS21M-4272


99

98

Installation – 5

5–15

4. Remove the “J” connectors from thecorresponding plugs, P4, 5, 6, 7, 9 and11 from the bottom board (B-0970).

5. Loosen the two circuit board retentionscrews (captured) in each board.

6. Remove the circuit boards from thechassis.

7. Jumpers J5, J18, J46, J60, and J61 arenow accessible on the bottom board(B-0970). See Figure 5-14, M-4272Bottom Circuit Board (B-0970) forlocations.

8. Jumpers J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, J13,J14, J15, J16, J17 and J18 are nowaccessible on the top board (B-0957).See Figure 5-15, M-4272 Top CircuitBoard for locations.

9. Dipswitch SW1 is now accessible. SeeFigure 5-14 for location.

10. Insert circuit boards into chassis guidesand seat firmly.

11. Tighten circuit board retention screws.

12. Reconnect “J” connectors tocorresponding plugs.

13. Reinstall cover plate.

NOTE: Short circuit protection (100 ma limit) isincorporated on pins 1 and 9 when usedfor +/- 15V.

5.4 Circuit Board Switches andJumpers

See Figures 5-14 and 5-15 for Circuit Board Jumperand Switch locations.

See Tables 5-1 through 5-6 for Circuit Board Jumperand Switch configuration details.

Accessing Switches and Jumpers88888 WARNING: Operating personnel must notremove the cover or expose the printed circuitboard while power is applied. IN NO CASE maythe circuit-based jumpers or switches be movedwith power applied.

88888 WARNING: The protective grounding terminalmust be connected to an earthed ground anytime external connections have been made to theunit. See Figures 5-5 and 5- 6, Note #3.

CAUTION: This unit contains MOS circuitry, whichcan be damaged by static discharge. Care should betaken to avoid static discharge on work surfacesand service personnel.

1. De-energize the M-4272.

2. Remove the screws that retain the frontcover.

3. Remove the "J" connectors from thecorresponding plugs, P1, P2 and P3 fromthe top board (B-0957).

REPMUJ NOITISOP NOITPIRCSED

5JBotA 2MOC6nipnolangisLTTB-GIRIdetaludomeD

CotB )tluafeD(CNBlangisB-GIRIdetaludoM

81JBotA detresnirotsisernoitanimretmho0023MOC

CotB )tluafeD(noitanimreton3MOC

64JBotA 1MOChtiwetarduaBserahs3MOC

CotB )tluafeD(2MOChtiwetarduaBserahs3MOC

06JBotA )tluafeD(2MOCfo1nipotlangisDCDstcennoC

CotA 2MOCfo1nipotV51+stcennoC

16JCotB 2MOCfo9nipotV51-stcennoC

BotA )tluafeD(taolf9nip2MOC

CAUTION: A loss of calibration, setpoints, and configuration will occur when the EEPROM is initialized todefault.

Table 5-1 Jumpers


5–16

Dip Switch SW1

1 2 3 4

X X X X Open(up)

Closed(down)

Switches should not be changedwhile unit is energised

3 up 4 up Run Mode

3 up 4 down Initialize EEPROM to default* See CAUTION below.

3 down 4 up Initialize Access Codes and Communication*

3 down 4 down Factory Use

2 up Flash Update Disable (Factory Default)

2 down Flash Update Enable

1 up Dual Power Supply Unit

1 down Single Power Supply Unit

* After power up the OK LED remains extinguished and the Diagnostic LED will illuminate when operation has been satisfactorily completed.

CAUTION: A loss of calibration,setpoints and configuration will occur when the EEPROM is initialized todefault.

Table 5-2 Dip Switch SW-1

TRIP CIRCUIT MONITOR 1 INPUT VOLTAGE SELECT

INPUTVOLTAGE

JUMPER J1POSITION

JUMPER J2POSITION

JUMPER J3POSITION

24 V dc A to B A to B A to B

48 V dc B to C A to B A to B

125 V dc B to C B to C A to B

250 V dc* B to C B to C B to C

*Default from Factory

Table 5-3 Trip Circuit Monitor 1 Input Voltage Select Jumper Configuration

Installation – 5

5–17

CLOSE CIRCUIT MONITOR 1 INPUT VOLTAGE SELECT

INPUTVOLTAGE

JUMPER J4POSITION

JUMPER J5POSITION

JUMPER J6POSITION






Table 5-4 Close Circuit Monitor 1 Input Voltage Select Jumper Configuration

TRIP CIRCUIT MONITOR 2 INPUT VOLTAGE SELECT

INPUTVOLTAGE

JUMPER J13POSITION

JUMPER J14POSITION

JUMPER J15POSITION






Table 5-5 Trip Circuit Monitor 2 Input Voltage Select Jumper Configuration

CLOSE CIRCUIT MONITOR 2 INPUT VOLTAGE SELECT

INPUTVOLTAGE

JUMPER J16POSITION

JUMPER J17POSITION

JUMPER J18POSITION






Table 5-6 Close Circuit Monitor 2 Input Voltage Select Jumper Configuration


5–18

Figure 5-14 M

-4272 Bottom C

ircuit Board (B-0970)

Dip Sw

itch

J46

J60

J61

J5J20

J21J22

J18

Installation – 5

5–19

P-2053 REVBE# 450-00236

P1

R54 R46U13

C57

D92

R13

0

C139

R12

6

R12

8

FB34

R55

R60

R98

R104

R107

R113

C53

C72

C112

C120

C128

C132

R50

R64

R101

R11

0

R116

FB35

C45

C62

C88

C108

C116

C124

FB16

FB13

FB30

FB31

FB28

FB29

FB11

FB25

FB26

FB27

FB14

FB9

FB10

FB8

DS1

2

C80

C78

U31

U16

Q2

U19

C79

U3

C77

U38

U43 D73

R10

0R99

C11

1

C114

C126

C110

C122

C118

C130

R111

R102

R105

R108

R114

D78

RV26

D81

D83

RV28

RV27

C12

7C

131

D82

U48

U47

D80

R11

5R

112

D75

D79

D77

RV24

C11

9

RV25

C12

3C

115

RV23

U45

U46

D76

R10

9R

106

U44

D74

R10

3D

72

U39

C76

C58

C49

C44

C66

C106

R41

R58

R96

R47

R52

R62

U35 D37

RV15

D47

D42

D71

C87

RV20

C10

7

RV22

C71

RV18

U40

R63

U42

R97

D70

D46

U37

R59

D41

D34

D31

D26

D91

RV12

RV13

C52

C61

C38

R12

7

R44

D89

U29

D23

U32

D29

R53

R48

R43

R132D93

U36

R57

C81

DS1

6 R40

DS

9D

S10

DS1

1

U15

R14

R15

R12

R13

R10

R11

R8

R9

DS1

4D

S13

DS1

5

U30

R38

R39

R37

R36

R65

E2

E1

R34

R35

R33

RV11

C90

RT5

RV17

FB32

C7

RV1

RV4

C34

RV8

C54

RV14

C69

RV16

RV19

C91

RT1

RT2

RT6

FB17

FB18

FB19

FB20

FB33

C21

C46

C63

C85

C55

C99

C136

C137

C138

C135

C134

C96

C98

C97

C95

C94

C70

C86

C64

C35

C47

C22

C8

D33

DS5

K5

D32

D36

C14

2

FB1C102

C103

U34

R125

R117

R133

D55

R80

D59

U1

R75

D57

JP14

R11

8

D86

R12

3

JP17

R13

1

D84

R12

0R

119

JP18

R12

9

JP15

R12

1

R12

2

U2

D87

D90

JP16

R124

D88

D85

JP13

JP2

R72

R67

D52

JP5

R79

R74

D50

R68

JP6

R77

R76 R

78

R70

R69

JP3

R71

D54

R73

JP4

D58

D56

U12

JP1

D53

D51R95

U33

R18

C24

R17

C20

C23

D44

D43

K8

D48

RV21C89

D45

D49

K6

K7

D38 D

39D

40D

35

R7

FB12

FB15

C84

P3

P2

R49

R66

C73

C75

DS6

DS7

DS8 FB2

R61

R56

R51

K1

C2

C18

C17

C19

K3

D20 D

22

K4

D28

D27

D30

R6

D24

R5

K2

D14

D13

D17

R4

D10

D7

R3

D6

D2

R2

C1DS1

R1

DS4

DS2

DS3

R45

R30

R23

R16

+

ELECTRICCO. INC.

BECKWITH

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

++

+

+

+

+

+

+

++

++

JP1

JP3

JP4

JP6

JP13 JP15

JP18JP16

JP2

JP14

JP5

JP17

Figu

re 5

-15

M-4

272

B-09

57 T

op C

ircu

it Bo

ard


5–20

5.5 ISScom® Communicationsand Analysis SoftwareInstallation

ISScom Installation and SetupISScom runs with the Microsoft Windows® 98operating system or later. ISScom only supportscommunication using the MODBUS protocol.

ISScom is available on CD-ROM, or may bedownloaded from our website atwww.beckwithelectric.com

The M-3872 ISScom Communications and AnalysisSoftware is not copy-protected. For more informationon your specific rights and responsibilities, see thelicensing agreement enclosed with your software orcontact Beckwith Electric.

Hardware RequirementsISScom will run on any IBM PC-compatible computerthat provides at least the following:

• 8 MB of RAM

• Microsoft Windows 98 or later

• CD-ROM drive

• one serial (RS-232) communication port

• pointing device (mouse)

Installing ISScom1. Insert software CD-ROM into your drive.

An Auto-Install program will establish aprogram folder (Becoware) andsubdirectory (ISScom). After installation,the ISScom program item icon (seeFigure 5-16) is located in Becoware. Thedefault location for the application filesis on drive C:, in the new subdirectory“ISScom” (C:\Becoware\ISScom).

Figure 5-16 ISScom Program Icon

2. If the Auto-Install program does notlaunch when the CD-ROM is insertedinto the drive then proceed as follows:

a. Select Run from the Start Menu.

b. In the Run dialog screen, locate theinstallation file (sfi_m3872Acom_V__.exe)contained on the ISScom installation disk.

c. Select Run to start the installation process.

5.6 Activating Initial LocalCommunications

The MBTS and ISScom Communications andAnalysis Software are shipped from the factory withthe same default communication parameters.Therefore, it may not be necessary to set upcommunication parameters.

In order for ISScom to communicate with the MBTSusing direct serial connection, a serial “null modem”cable is required, with a 9-pin connector (DB9P) forthe MBTS, and an applicable connector for thecomputer (usually DB9S or DB25S). Pin-outs for anull modem adapter are provided in Appendix B,Communications.

Activating initial communications using defaultcommunication parameters is accomplished asfollows:

1. Verify that a direct serial connectionbetween the PC hosting ISScom and thetarget MBTS COM1 (front) is in place.

2. Select the ISScom icon (Figure 5-16)from the Becoware folder or Desktop.The ISScom Main Screen (Figure 3-5)is displayed.

3. Select the COMM menu item. ISScomwill display the Communication DialogScreen (Figure 3-7).

4. If the computer is connected througheither an RS-232 port or RS-485 portperform the following:

a. Select Serial COM Port from theComm Device selection.

b. Select the PC Comm Port that isconnected to the MBTS.

c. Select Open Com. This actionattempts to establish communication.

5. If ISScom returns a "COM Opened andLevel #(1, 2 or 3) access granted" thencommunications have been established.Enter any valid ISScom command(s) asdesired. To close the communicationchannel when connected locally, selectthe Close COM button.

Installation – 5

5–21

6. If ISScom® returns an error message,then determine the MBTS COM1communication parameters as follows:

a. From the MBTS Front Panel HMIpress ENTER. The MBTS willdisplay:


b. Press the right arrow pushbuttonuntil the MBTS displays:


c. Press ENTER. The MBTS willdisplay:

COM1 SETUPCOM1 com2 com3 com_adr

d. Press ENTER. The MBTS willdisplay:

COM1 BAUD RATE baud_4800 baud_9600

Record the Baud Rate that is displayedin all Caps: __________

e. Press ENTER. The MBTS willdisplay:

COM1 DEAD SYNC TIME

XX ms

Record the Dead Sync Time that isdisplayed: __________

f. Press ENTER. The MBTS willdisplay:

COM1 PARITY

none odd even

Record the Parity that is displayed in allCaps: __________

g. Press ENTER. The MBTS willdisplay:

COM1 STOP BITS

X

Record the Stop Bits value that isdisplayed: __________

h. Pres EXIT as necessary to exitthe HMI.

i. Select the COMM menu item.ISScom will display theCommunication Dialog Screen(Figure 3-7).

j. Verify the ISScom communicationparameters are the same as theMBTS COM1 parameters.

k. Verify that the PC Comm Portthat is connected to the MBTS isselected.

l. Select Open Com. This action willattempt to establish communication.

m. If ISScom returns a "COM Openedand Level #(1, 2 or 3) accessgranted" then communications havebeen established. Enter any validISScom command(s) as desired.

To close the communication channelwhen connected locally, select the CloseCOM button.


5–22

5.7 Pre-CommissioningCheckout

During field commissioning, check the followingparameters to ensure that the CT and VTconnections are correct for the application as follows.

1. Determine if ISScom® Communicationand Analysis Software is available tocommunicate with the MBTS andproceed as follows:

2. If ISScom is available, then go to Step4.

3. If ISScom is not available then:

a. From the MBTS Front Panel HMIpress ENTER. The MBTS willdisplay:

INIT TRANSFER

INIT rmte_lcal

b. Press the right arrow pushbuttonuntil the MBTS displays:

STATUS

STAT comm setup

c. Press ENTER. The MBTS willdisplay:

VOLTAGE STATUS

VOLT curr freq phang

From this menu the user can accessstatus data that includes Voltage,Current, Frequency, Phase Angle, Inputs,Outputs, Alarm Counter, Time of LastPower Up and Error Codes.

d. Go to Step 6.

4. Start the ISScom, then establishcommunication with the MBTS.

5. From the ISScom menu select System/Setup/Setup System to open the SetupSystem dialog screen.

6. Verify that the S1/S2 VT Configurationand the Bus VT Configuration areconfigured for the MBTS application.

7. Select System/Monitor/SecondaryMetering and Status to open theSecondary Metering and Status screen.The Voltage, Positive Sequence andStatus information is also available fromthe MBTS Front Panel HMI.

8. The unit should display either S1 VA, S1

VB, S1 V

C and S1 V

PS (three phase line-

to-ground connections) or S1 VAB

, S1V

BC, S1 V

CA and S1 V

PS (three phase

line-to-line connections). The sameshould be true for the S2 (Source 2) andthe Bus.

9. Compare the voltages with actualmeasurements using a voltmeter. If thereis a discrepancy, check for looseconnections at the rear terminal block ofthe unit.

10. The positive sequence voltage shouldbe S1 V

P Syyyyy S1 VA yyyyy S1 V

B yyyyy S1 V

C or

S1 VAB

yyyyy S1 VBC

yyyyy S1 VCA

. The sameshould be the true for S2 and the bus

11. If the positive sequence voltage is closeto zero, then the phase sequence isincorrect and the proper phases must bereversed to obtain correct phasesequence. If the phase sequence isincorrect, frequency related functions willnot operate properly and the FrequencyStatus menu will display DISABLED.

12. Compare currents with the measuredvalues using a meter. If there is adiscrepancy, check the CT connectionsat the rear terminal block of the unit.

13. Compare the indicated frequency valueto the actual frequency of the bus.

14. Verify Inputs and outputs agree withinputs and outputs.

NOTE: The CT and VT polarities can be easilyverified by looking at the oscillographicwaveforms, using M-3872 ISSplotTM

Analysis Software.

Installation – 5

5–23

5.8 Initial Setup Procedure

The M-4272 Motor Bus Transfer System (MTBS) isshipped from the factory with all functions disabled.

The Setup Procedure provided below is a suggestedsetup procedure for initially entering settings intothe device.

Setup ProcedureNOTE: Setup Record forms are available in

Appendix A, Setup Record Forms, torecord settings for future reference.

1. Enter the Unit Setup data. This is generalinformation required including alteringaccess codes, setting date and time,defining user logos, and otheradjustments. See Section 4.1, UnitSetup.

2. Configure the System Setup data. Thisis the general system and equipmentinformation required for operation,including such items as CT and VT ratios,VT configuration, and Nominal values.See Section 4.2, System Setup.

3. Enter the System Setpoints data. Thisis the function specific settings fortransfers and initiating functions. SeeSection 4.4, System Setpoints


5–24


6–1

Testing – 6

6 Testing

6.1 Power On Self Test ................................................................... 6–2

6.2 Diagnostic Test Procedures ...................................................... 6–3

6.3 Metering Tests ..........................................................................6-13

6.4 Auto Calibration ........................................................................ 6–14


6–2

Testing OverviewFor the purposes of site acceptance and verifyingthe MBTS hardware is operating properly and isconnected correctly, Beckwith Electric recommendsthe following tests:

• Power on Self Tests

• Diagnostic Tests

• Metering Tests

Section 6.4, MBTS Function Tests, is provided foradvanced users who wish to test each MTBS featureand function individualy.

6.1 Power On Self Test

Equipment Required

• If the MBTS permanent power supplysource is not available, then a portablepower supply (>50 W) matched to theinstalled MBTS power supply (indicatedby check box on rear of unit Figure 6-1)will be required.

• Digital Multi Meter

Figure 6-1 Power Supply Connection

To perform the Power On Self Test proceed asfollows:

1. Verify the power supply contact is in thenormal state. (Closed)

2. Determine if the permanent power supplysource is connected and available.

88888 WARNING: Applying power to the MBTS maycause equipment connected to the MBTS tooperate.

3. If the permanent power supply source isconnected and available, then energizethe power supply (The Power On SelfTest will automatically begin) and go toStep 5.

4. If the permanent power supply source isnot connected or is unavailable, thenproceed as follows:

a. Ensure that the permanent power supplysource breaker is open and applicablesafety tagging is complete.

b. Disconnect and tag/identify thepermanent power supply sourceconnections (Figure 6-1) from the MBTS(100/102 HOT and 101/103 NEUTRAL).

c. Connect the portable power supply toterminals (100/102 HOT and 101/103NEUTRAL).


d. Energize the portable power supply.The Power On Self Test willautomatically begin.

NOTE: A Power On Self Test failure is indicatedby no display or SYSTEM HALT ERRORCODE XX. If a failure occurs, then stopany further testing and contact thefactory.

5. The following sequence of actions willtake place:

a. Power supply, PS1 and PS2, LED(s)will illuminate.

b. The power supply contact will energize(open) (Terminals 52 and 53)

c. The internal hardware test excecutes.

d. All LEDs will illuminate for approximately1 second.

e. As each Power On Self Test routine iscompleted satisfactorly the HMI willdisplay an “X”.

6. Upon successful completion of all PowerOn Self Tests:

a. The PS1 and PS2 LEDs will remainilluminated.

b. All other LEDs will extinguish.

c. The diagnostic contact will energize.d. The SYS OK LED will flash (or remain

illuminated as programed in thediagnostic menu).

e. The unit will display the Model Number,Firmware Version, Current CT Rating,Nominal Frequency Rating and theSerial Number.

6–3

Testing – 6

f. The BREAKER CLOSED andBREAKER OPEN LEDs will beilluminated for Source 1 based on theposition of the breaker position contacts(52a and/or 52b) connected to theStatus Inputs 1, 2, 4 and 5.

6. Verify the power supply contact isenergized (open).

7. Restore any connections that may havebeen disconnected in Step 4.

Torque Requirements

• Terminals 1–74: 7.5 in-lbs,minimum, and 8.0 in-lbs, maximum


6.2 Diagnostic Test Procedures

OverviewThe diagnostic test procedures perform basicfunctional MBTS tests to verify the operation of thefront-panel controls, inputs, outputs, andcommunication ports.

The diagnostic menu includes the following tests:

• OUTPUT (Output Test Relay)

• INPUT (Input Test Status)

• LED (Status LED Test)

• TARGET (Target LED Test)

• BUTTON (Button Test)

• DISP (Display Test)

• COM1 (COM1 Loopback Test)

• COM2 (COM2 Loopback Test)

• COM3 (COM3 Echo Test 2-Wire)

Each test is described individually in this section.

The diagnostic menu also provides access to thefollowing MBTS feature settings:

• CLOCK (Clock On/Off)

• LED (MBTS OK LED Flash/Solid)

• CAL (Auto Calibration)

• FACTORY (Factory Use Only)

Auto Calibration is described in detail in Section6.5, Auto Calibration.

Equipment Required• If the MBTS permanent power supply

source is not available, then a portablepower supply (>50 W) matched to theinstalled MBTS power supply (indicatedby check box on rear of unit Figure 6-1)will be required to power the unit.

• 24 to 250 V dc variable supply for TripCoil and Close Coil Monitor input testing.

• Digital Multi Meter (DMM)

Entering MBTS Diagnostic Mode88888 WARNING: Entering DIAGNOSTIC MODEdisables all transfer, protection and controlfunctionality and, during the output test, anyconnected equipment will operate

1. Press ENTER to access the main menu.

2. Press the right arrow pushbutton untilthe following is displayed:

SETUP UNIT SETUP exit




DIAGNOSTIC MODE time error eth DIAG

5. Press ENTER, the following warning willbe displayed:

PROCESSOR WILL RESET!ENTER KEY TO CONTINUE


6–4

88888 WARNING: Do not enter DIAGNOSTIC MODEwhen protected equipment is in service. EnteringDIAGNOSTIC MODE when protected equipmentis in service disables all Transfer, protective,and control functions of the relay.

6. Press ENTER, the MBTS will reset andDIAGNOSTIC MODE will be temporarilydisplayed followed by:

OUTPUT TEST (RELAY)OUTPUT input led module button disp com1 com2 com3 clock led cal factory

This marks the beginning of the diagnostic menu.The left arrow and right arrow pushbuttons are usedto navigate within the diagnostic menu. Exiting thediagnostic menu is accomplished by pressing EXIT,PRESS EXIT TO EXIT DIAGNOSTIC MODE isdisplayed, then pressing EXIT a second time.

Output Relay Test (Output Relays 1–16 and 17) NOTE: This test does not include testing of

Power Supply Relay.

88888 WARNING: Performing this test will causeoutput contacts to change state. Proper stepsshould be taken to avoid unintended operationof connected equipment.

1. Ensure the affected equipment is in aconfiguration/state that can supportMBTS output testing.

2. Confirm the positions of the outputs inthe normal or OFF position. This can beaccomplished by connecting the DigitalMultimeter (DMM) in continuity test modeacross the appropriate contacts andconfirming open or closed. The de-energized or OFF position for outputs 1through 17 are listed in Table 6-1.

3. If the MBTS is already in the DiagnosticMode, then go to Step 4.

If the MBTS is NOT in the DiagnosticMode, then enter the MBTS diagnosticmode by performing the steps describedin the Entering MBTS Diagnostic Modesection of this chapter, then go to Step 4.

4. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu isselected to OUTPUT (Upper Case).

OUTPUT TEST (RELAY)OUTPUT input led module button disp com1 com2 com3 clock led cal factory

If OUTPUT is not selected (Upper Case),then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttonsto select OUTPUT.

5. Press ENTER, the MBTS will displaythe following:

RELAY NUMBER1

6. Select the Output Relay (from Table 6-1)to be tested, utilizing the Up/Down arrowpushbuttons.

RELAY OUTPUTNUMBER

NORMALLY OPENCONTACT

NORMALLY CLOSEDCONTACT*

73-74

71-72

69-70

67-68

65-66

63-64

60-61

57-58

39-40

37-38

35-36

33-34

31-32

29-30

27-28

25-26

54-55

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

Self-Test (17)

--

--

--

--

--

--

61-62

58-59

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

55-56* "Normal" position of the contact corresopnds to the OFF

(de-engergized) state of the relay.

Table 6-1 Output Contacts

6–5

Testing – 6

7. Press ENTER. The following will bedisplayed for the selected relay:

RELAY NUMBER 1OFF on

8. Select ON (Upper Case) utilizing theRight arrow pushbutton, then pressENTER. The MBTS will respond asfollows:

• Output relay energizes (On position)

• Appropriate RED OUTPUT LEDilluminates.

If testing all output relays, then press EXIT toreturn to the output relay selection menu, thenrepeat Steps 6, 7 and 8 for each output relay.

9. The DMM can now be used to verify thatthe output relay contact is in the operatedor ON position. The readings should bethe opposite of the initial readingdetermined in Step 2.

10. When output relay testing is complete,then restore all output relays to their de-energized or OFF positions listed in Table6-1 and press EXIT to return to theDiagnostic Menu.

11. If all Diagnostic Testing is complete,then exit the diagnostic menu by pressingEXIT, PRESS EXIT TO EXITDIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed, thenpress EXIT a second time.

Input Test (Control/Status) Inputs 1–18The INPUT TEST menu enables the user todetermine the status of the individual control/statusinputs . Individual inputs can be selected by numberusing the up and down arrow pushbuttons. Thestatus of the input will then be displayed.

1. Ensure the protected equipment is in aconfiguration/state that can supportMBTS input testing.


If the MBTS is NOT in the DiagnosticMode, then enter the MBTS diagnosticmode by performing the steps describedin the Entering MBTS Diagnostic Modesection of this chapter, then go to Step3.

3. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu isselected to INPUT (Upper Case).

INPUT TEST (RELAY)output INPUT led module button disp com1 com2 com3 clock led cal factory

If INPUT is not selected (Upper Case),then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttonsto select INPUT.

4. Press ENTER. The following is displayed:

INPUT NUMBER1

5. Select the MBTS Input (from Table 6-2)to be tested utilizing the Up/Down arrowpushbuttons.

6. Press ENTER. The following is displayedfor the selected input:

INPUT NUMBER 1CIRCUIT OPEN

7. If no external control/status inputs areconnected to the MBTS, then place ajumper between the IN RTN terminal(Terminal #51 for Inputs 1–6, and eitherTerminal #1, 2, 3 or 4 for Inputs 7–18).See Table 6-2 for terminals for inputs.

Alternatively, if this specific input isbeing used in this application and theexternal wiring is complete, the actualexternal control/status input contact canbe manually closed. This will test theinput contact operation and the externalwiring to the input contacts.

The corresponding Input LED willilluminate and the following wiil beimmediately displayed:

INPUT NUMBER 1CIRCUIT CLOSED

8. Remove the jumper between the IN RTNterminal (Terminal #51 for Inputs 1–6,and either Terminal #1, 2, 3 or 4 forInputs 7–18).

The input LED will extinguish and thefollowing will be immediately displayed:

INPUT NUMBER 1CIRCUIT OPEN


6–6

Input Test (Trip Coil, Close Coil) Inputs 19–22The INPUT TEST menu enables the user todetermine the status of the individual Trip and/orClose Coil inputs. Individual inputs can be selectedby number using the up and down arrowpushbuttons. The status of the input will then bedisplayed.

1. Ensure any equipment connected to theMBTS is in a configuration/state thatcan support Trip Coil and/or Close Coilinput testing.

2. If there are no connections made to theterminals listed in Table 6-3, then go toStep 4.

TRIP/CLOSE COIL INPUTSINPUT

NUMBER

19 (TCM #1)

20 (CCM #1)

21 (TCM #2)

22 (CCM #2)

COMMONTERMINAL TERMINAL

23

22

20

18

24

21

19

17

Table 6-3 Trip Coil and Close Coil InputContacts

3. If the permanent Trip Coil and/or CloseCoil voltage inputs are connected to theMBTS, then proceed as follows:

a. Ensure that the permanent Trip Coiland/or Close Coil voltage input supplybreaker is open and applicable safetytagging is complete.

b. Disconnect and tag/identify thepermanent Trip Coil and/or Close Coilvoltage input connections (Figure 6-2).

4. Determine the Trip Coil/Close Coil MonitorInput voltage as identified on the rear ofthe unit (Figure 6-2).

See Section 5.4, Circuit Board Switchesand Jumpers, (Table 5-3 for TCM#1,Table 5-5 for TCM#2, Table 5-4 for CCM#1 and Table 5-6 for CCM#2) for theavailable trip/close circuit input voltageselections and jumper configurations ifthe input voltage rating is unknown orhas changed.

9. If testing all inputs, press EXIT to returnto the input selection menu, then repeatSteps 5, 6, 7 and 8 for each inputexcept inputs 19–22.

INPUTNUMBER

COMMONTERMINAL TERMINAL

1 (52a/S1)

2 (52b/S1)

3 (52sp/S1)

4 (52a/S2)

5 (52b/S2)

6 (52sp/S2)

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

51

51

51

51

51

51

1,2,3,4

1,2,3,4

1,2,3,4

1,2,3,4

1,2,3,4

1,2,3,4

1,2,3,4

1,2,3,4

1,2,3,4

1,2,3,4

1,2,3,4

1,2,3,4

50

49

48

47

46

45

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

Table 6-2 Input Contacts

6–7

Testing – 6

5. Connect the portable power supply tothe Trip Coil and/or Close Coil voltageinput terminals to be tested (Figure 6-2).



7. Select the MBTS Trip Coil or Close CoilInput (from Table 6-3) to be testedutilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons.

Figure 6-2 MBTS Trip Coil—Close Coil InputVoltage Rating

8. Apply the rated Trip Coil and/or CloseCoil voltage (as determined in Step 4) tothe terminals indicated in Table 6-3.

9. Press ENTER. The TCM/CCM statusLED will be extinguished and the followingwill be displayed for the selected input:

INPUT NUMBER 19 TCM #1CIRCUIT CLOSED

10. Remove the voltage source from theTrip Coil/Close Coil input terminals. TheTCM/CCM status LED will be illuminatedand the following will be displayed forthe selected input:

INPUT NUMBER 19 TCM #1CIRCUIT OPEN

11. If testing all TCM/CCM inputs, then pressEXIT to return to the input selectionmenu, then repeat Steps 8, 9 and 10 foreach of the remaining TCM/CCM inputs.

12. When TCM/CCM input testing iscomplete then insure all voltage sourceshave been disconected from the MBTSand press EXIT to return to the DiagnosticMenu.


12. Restore any connections that may havebeen disconnected in Step 3.

Torque Requirements



Front Panel Status LED TestThe Front Panel STATUS LED TEST menu enablesthe user to check the front-panel Status LEDindividually.



2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu isselected to LED (Upper Case).

STATUS LED TESToutput input LED module button disp com1 com2 com3 clock led cal factory

If LED is not selected (Upper Case),then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttonsto select LED.

3. Press ENTER. LED #1 (RELAY OK)illuminates and the following is displayed:

STATUS LED TESTLED NUMBER 1 = ON

4. If testing all Status LEDs, press theright arrow pushbutton to toggle throughthe remaining LEDs illustrated in Figure6-3. The PS1 and PS2 LEDs are testedin the System Power On Tests.


6–8

!"#

$

$

$$%"

$%"

Figure 6-3 Status LED Panel

5. When Status LED testing is completepress EXIT to return to the DiagnosticMenu.


Module LED TestThe MODULE LED TEST menu allows the user tocheck each M-3972 Module LED individually.


If the relay is NOT in the DiagnosticMode, then enter the MBTS diagnosticmode by performing the steps describedin the Entering MBTS Diagnostic Modesection of this chapter, then go to Step2.

2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu isselected to MODULE (Upper Case).

MODULE LED TESToutput input led MODULE button disp com1 com2 com3 clock led cal factory

If MODULE is not selected (Upper Case),then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttonsto select MODULE.

3. Press ENTER. MODULE LED #1 lightsand the following is displayed:

MODULE LED TESTLED NUMBER 1 = ON

4. If testing all MODULE LEDs, press theright arrow pushbutton to toggle throughthe remaining MODULE LEDs illustratedin Figure 6-4.

5. When Module LED testing is completepress EXIT to return to the DiagnosticMenu.


27B BUS UNDERVOLTAGE

TRANS READY

FAST TRANS OP

IN-PHASE TRANS OP

RESIDUAL VOLTAGE TRANS OP

FIXED-TIME TRANS OP

PARAL TRANS/AUTO TRIP OP

50/50BF-1/SCR 1 BRKR FAIL

50/50BF-2/SCR 2 BRKR FAIL

81/81R BUS FREQ/ROCOF

TRIP SOURCE 1 BRKR

CLOSE SOURCE 1 BRKR

DELTA PHASE ANGLE OK

DELTA VOLTAGE OK

DELTA FREQUENCY OK

FAST/PARAL TRANS READY

S1/S2 BRKR-RACKED OUT BLOCK

NEW SOURCE VOLT BLOCK

BUS VT LOSS BLOCK

TRIP/CLOSE CKT OPEN BLOCK

INCOMP TRANS BLOCK

ALARM OUTPUT BLOCK

TRIP SOURCE 2 BRKR

CLOSE SOURCE 2 BRKR

STATUS

OUTPUTSOUT 1

OUT 2

OUT 3

OUT 4

OUT 5

OUT 6 OUT 8

OUT 7

Figure 6-4 Status Module

Button Test

The BUTTON TEST menu selection allows the userto check the M-3931 HMI Module buttons and theSTATUS RESET pushbutton on the front panel. Aseach pushbutton is pressed, its name is displayed.

1. If the relay is already in the DiagnosticMode, then go to Step 2.

If the relay is NOT in the DiagnosticMode, then enter the relay diagnosticmode by performing the steps describedin the Entering Relay Diagnostic Modesection of this chapter, then go to Step 2.

6–9

Testing – 6

2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu isselected to BUTTON (Upper Case).

BUTTON TESToutput input led module BUTTON disp com1 com2 com3 clock led cal factory

If BUTTON is not selected (Upper Case),then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttonsto select BUTTON.


BUTTON TEST0

NOTE: Pressing the EXIT pushbutton will exitfrom this test, and therefore should bethe last pushbutton tested. If it is pushedbefore this test sequence is completed,the test may be restarted by pressingENTER. Notice that the word EXIT isdisplayed temporarily before the testsequence is exited.

4. Press each pushbutton for test (Figure6-5). As each pushbutton is pressed,the display will briefly show the name foreach key (“RIGHT ARROW”, “UPARROW”, etc).

Figure 6-5 M-3931 Human-MachineInterface Module

5. When pushbutton testing is completepress EXIT to return to the DiagnosticMenu.


Display TestThe DISPLAY TEST menu selection enables theuser to check the display. This test cycles throughvarying test patterns until EXIT is pressed.



2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu isselected to DISPLAY TEST (UpperCase).

DISPLAY TESToutput input led module button DISP com1 com2 com3 clock led cal factory

If DISP is not selected (Upper Case),then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttonsto select DISP.

3. Press ENTER, the unit will display asequence of test characters until EXITis pushed.

4. After the test has cycled throughcompletely, press EXIT to return to theDiagnostic Menu.



6–10

COM1/COM2 Loopback TestThe COM1 LOOPBACK TEST menu allows theuser to test the front-panel RS-232 port. COM2LOOPBACK TEST menu tests the rear panel RS-232port.

A loopback plug is required for this test. The requiredloopback plug consists of a DB9P connector (male)with pin 2 (RX) connected to pin 3 (TX) and pin 7(RTS) connected to pin 8 (CTS). No otherconnections are necessary.

Figure 6-6 COM1/COM2 Loopback Plug



2 Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu isselected to COM1 LOOPBACK TEST(Upper Case).

COM1 LOOPBACK TESToutput input led module button disp COM1 com2 com3 clock led cal factory

If COM1 is not selected (Upper Case),then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttonsto select COM1.


COM1 LOOPBACK TESTCONNECT LOOPBACK PLUG

4. Connect the loop-back plug to COM1,the front-panel RS-232 connector.

5. Press ENTER, the relay will initiate theloopback test.

If the COM Port passes the loopbacktest the following will be displayed:

COM1 LOOPBACK TEST-DONE-

If the COM Port fails the loopback testthe following will be displayed:

COM1 LOOPBACK TESTRX–TX FAIL

6. Press EXIT to return to the DIAGNOSTICMenu.


8. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu isselected to COM2 LOOPBACK TEST(Upper Case).

COM2 LOOPBACK TESToutput input led module button disp com1 COM2 com3 clock led cal factory


8. Press ENTER, then repeat Steps 3through 6 for COM2.

6–11

Testing – 6

COM3 Test (2-Wire)The COM3 Echo Test 2-Wire allows the user to testthe RS-485 rear terminal connections for properoperation.

NOTE: This test requires a PC with an RS-485converter and terminal emulator softwareinstalled.



2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu isselected to COM3 ECHO TEST 2 WIRE(Upper Case).

COM3 ECHO TEST 2 WIREoutput input led module button disp com1 com2 COM3 clock led cal factory



COM3 ECHO TEST 2WIREIDLING...9600, N, 8, 1

4. From the rear of the unit, connect a PCto the MBTS at terminals 43(-) and 44(+)using an RS-485 converter set for 2-wireoperation. See Figure 6-7 for diagram.

5. Set the following PC communicationsparameters:

Baud Rate 9600

Parity None

Data Bits 8

Stop Bits 1

Duplex Half

6. Open the terminal emulator program onthe PC, then open the COM port for theRS-485 converter.

Figure 6-7 RS-485 2-Wire Testing

7. Press a key on the PC keyboard, thenverify the following:

a. The character pressed is displayedtemporarily on the relay display.

b. The character pressed is displayed onthe PC monitor.

8. When communication has been verified,press EXIT, the following is displayed:

COM3 ECHO TEST 2WIRE-DONE-

9. Press EXIT to return to the DIAGNOSTICMenu.

10. Close the COM port on the PC, and exitthe terminal program.



6–12

Clock ON/OFFThis feature provides the user with the ability toeither start or stop the clock.



2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu isselected to CLOCK TEST (Upper Case).

CLOCK TESToutput input led module button disp com1 com2 com3 CLOCK led cal factory

If CLOCK is not selected (Upper Case),then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttonsto select CLOCK.

NOTE: ‘80’ will be displayed in the secondsplace when the clock is stopped.

3. Press ENTER, the following is displayed:

a. If the clock is already running thefollowing will be displayed and willcontinue to update.

CLOCK TEST01-Jan-2003 01:01:01

b. If the clock was NOT running thefollowing will be displayed:


4. To start or stop the clock press ENTER,the following is displayed:

a. If the clock is already running thefollowing will be displayed:

CLOCK TESTCLOCK STOP


b. If the clock was NOT running thefollowing will be displayed:

CLOCK TESTCLOCK START


NOTE: To preserve battery life the clock shouldbe OFF if the unit is to be left de-energized for a long period of time.

5. The clock can be toggled ON or OFF bypressing any arrow pushbutton orENTER.

To exit the Clock ON/OFF mode pressEXIT, the following will be displayed:

CLOCK TEST-DONE-

6. To exit the CLOCK ON/OFF DiagnosticMenu press EXIT.


SYS OK LED Flash/IlluminatedThis feature provides the user with the ability to setthe SYS OK LED to either Flash or be Illuminatedwhen the MBTS is working properly.



2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu isselected to FLASH SYS OK LED (UpperCase).

FLASH SYS OK LEDoutput input led module button disp com1 com2 com3 clock LED cal factory

If LED (to the left of cal) is not selected(Upper Case), then use the Right/Leftarrow pushbuttons to select LED.

6–13

Testing – 6


FLASH SYS OK LEDOFF on

4. Select (upper case) either ON (to flash)or OFF (to Illuminate) by pressing theright/left arrow pushbutton once.


FLASH SYS OK LED-DONE-

6. To exit the FLASH SYS OK LEDDiagnostic Menu press EXIT.


6.3 Metering Tests

Equipment Required

• If the MBTS permanent power supplysource is not available, then a portablepower supply (>50 W) matched to theinstalled MBTS power supply (indicatedby check box on rear of unit Figure 6-1)will be required.

• One synchronized voltage source withvariable amplitude (0-120 % PT secondaryvoltage).

• If current inputs to the MBTS are to beused, two single-phase independentcurrent sources (0 to 5 A) to simulate CTinputs are required.

• A PC with an RS-232 port, ISScomSoftware installed.

• A null modem cable.

Metering Test Setup1. Connect a null modem cable between

the PC RS-232 port and the MBTSCOM1 port.

2. Connect the temporary voltage sourceas follows:

a. If permanent voltage input connectionsare present, then disconnect and tag/identify the permanent voltage inputconnections (Figure 6-8).

b. Connect the temporary voltage sourceto the Source 1, Source 2 and Busvoltage inputs in parallel as indicatedin Figure 6-8.

3. Connect the temporary current sourceas follows:

88888 WARNING: Do not remove current transformerloads without shorting the current inputs to theMBTS. Death or severe electrical shock canoccur.

a. If permanent current input connectionsare present, temporarily place a shortingdevice across each CT secondary, thendisconnect and tag/identify thepermanent current input connections(Figure 6-9).

b. Connect the temporary curent sourcein series to Source 1 and Source 2current inputs as indicated in Figure6-9.

4. Determine if the permanent MBTS powersupply source is connected and available.


5. If the permanent power supply source isconnected and available, then energizethe power supply (The Power On SelfTest will automatically begin).

6. If the permanent power supply source isnot connected or is unavailable, thenproceed as follows:

a. Ensure that the permanent power supplysource breaker is open and applicablesafety tagging is complete.

b. Disconnect and tag/identify thepermanent power supply sourceconnections (Figure 6-1) from the MBTS(100/102 HOT and 101/103 NEUTRAL).

c. Connect the portable power supply toterminals (100/102 HOT and 101/103NEUTRAL).


6–14


d. Energize the portable power supply.The Power On Self Test willautomatically begin.

Voltage/Current Verification1. Apply nominal voltage and current

2. Using ISScom, open the monitoringscreen and verify the following:

• Verify that the displayed voltages are 0.5 V of the applied voltage

• Verify that the displayed currents are 0.1 A of the applied current

3. Remove the applied voltage an currents.

4. Remove all test equipment from voltageand current inputs.

5. Reconnect the permanent voltage andcurrent input wiring.

Torque Requirements• Terminals 1–74: 7.5 in-lbs, minimum, and

8.0 in-lbs, maximum

• Terminals 75–103: 8.5 in-lbs, minimum,and 9.0 in-lbs, maximum

6.4 Auto Calibration

NOTE: The M-4272 Motor Bus Transfer Systemhas been fully calibrated at the factory.There is no need to recalibrate the unitprior to initial installation.


If the relay is NOT in the DiagnosticMode, then enter the MBTS diagnosticmode by performing the steps describedin the Entering MBTS Diagnostic Modesection of this chapter, then go to Step 2.

2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu isselected to CAL (upper case).

AUTO CALIBRATIONoutput input led module button disp com1 com2 com3 clock led CAL factory

If CAL is not selected (Upper Case),then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttonsto select CAL.

3. Press ENTER, the following will bedisplayed depending on the frequencyrating of the unit:

60 HZ CALIBRATION60_HZ

50 HZ CALIBRATION50_HZ

4. Ensure that the 60 (50) HZ CalibrationMenu is selected to 60_HZ, Upper Case(50_Hz).

If 60_HZ (50_Hz) is not selected (UpperCase), then use the Right/Left arrowpushbuttons to select 60_HZ (50_Hz).


CONNECT REFERENCE INPUTSPRESS ENTER TO CALIBRATE

6. Connect VA = V

B = V

C = 120.0 (±0.01) V

at 0° phase. (See Figure 6-8.)

7. Connect IS1

= IS2

= 5.00* Amps at 0° (seeFigure 6-9).

* For a 1 A CT rating, use 1.00 A

The calibration can be verified by exiting from theDiagnostic menu and reading status:

VA = VB = VC = 120 V

IS1 = IS2 = 5 A*

* For a 1 A CT rating, use 1.00 A

NOTE: The phase angle difference betweenvoltage and current input source shouldbe 0°, ±0.05°, and an accurate low-distortion source should be used. (THDless than 1%).

8. Press ENTER, the following will bedisplayed while the relay is beingcalibrated:

CALIBRATINGWAIT

When the calibration is complete, thefollowing will be displayed:

CALIBRATINGDONE

9. Remove the calibration source inputs.

6–15

Testing – 6

! "#$%& !'

!

!

! "#$%& !'

!

!

(! "#$%& !'

!

!

Figure 6-8 Metering Voltage Input Configuration

%#$%&# $

$%#$%&#

Figure 6-9 Metering Current Input Configuration


6–16


A–1

Appendix – A

AConfiguration Record Forms

This Appendix contains photocopy–ready forms forrecording the configuration and setting of the M-4272Motor Bus Transfer System (MBTS). The formscan be supplied to field service personnel forconfiguring the MBTS, and kept on file for futurereference.

A copy of the MBTS Configuration Table (TableA-1) is provided to define and record the blockinginputs and output configuration. For each function;check the D (disabled) column or check the outputcontacts to be operated by the function, and checkthe inputs designated to block the function operation.

Figure A-1, System Communication Setup RecordForm reproduces the System Communication Setupmenus. This form records definition of the parametersnecessary for communication with the MBTS.

Figure A-2, Setup System Record Form reproducesthe Setup System menus. For each function orsetpoint, refer to the configuration you have definedusing the MBTS Configuration Table, and circlewhether it should be enabled or disabled, the outputcontacts it will activate, and the inputs that willblock its operation.

Figure A-3, System Setpoints Transfer SettingsRecord Form allows recording of the specific valuesentered for each transfer. The form follows theTransfer Settings section of the System Setpointsdialog screen.

Figure A-4, System Setpoints Function SettingsRecord Form allows recording of the specific valuesentered for each function. The form follows theFunction Settings section of the System Setpointsdialog screen. If a function is DISABLED, the input/output screens for that function will not be displayed.

A–2


Communication Setup

COM 1

Dead Sync Time _____ 2 msec – 3000 msecs

Baud Rate o 1200 o 2400 o 4800 o 9600

Parity o None o Odd o Even

Stop Bits o 1 o 2

System's Communication Address ________

COM 2


Baud Rate o 1200 o 2400 o 4800 o 9600


Stop Bits o 1 o 2


COM 3



Stop Bits o 1 o 2


Ethernet Address ________

Remote/Local Status o Remote [Remote] o Local

System Communication Setup

Figure A-1 System Communication Setup

A–3

Appendix – A

Nominal Voltage _____ 50V-140V

Nominal Current _____ 0.50A-6.00A

Phase Rotation

oABC oACB

S1/S2 VT Configuration

o Phase to Ground (Three Phase) o Phase to Phase (Three Phase) o Phase to Ground (Single Phase A) o Phase to Phase (Single Phase A) o Phase to Ground (Single Phase B) o Phase to Phase (Single Phase B) o Phase to Ground (Single Phase C) o Phase to Phase (Single Phase C)

Bus VT Configuration

o Phase to Ground (Three Phase) o Phase to Phase (Three Phase) o Phase to Ground (Single Phase A) o Phase to Phase (Single Phase A) o Phase to Ground (Single Phase B) o Phase to Phase (Single Phase B) o Phase to Ground (Single Phase C) o Phase to Phase (Single Phase C)

S1/S2 CT Configuration

o Yes o No S1 and S2 Connected to Rear Terminals

LATCHED OUTPUTS

o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

PULSED OUTPUTS

o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

INPUT ACTIVE STATE

3 o Open o Close 6 o Open o Close 7 o Open o Close 8 o Open o Close 9 o Open o Close 10 o Open o Close 11 o Open o Close 12 o Open o Close13 o Open o Close 14 o Open o Close 15 o Open o Close 16 o Open o Close17 o Open o Close 18 o Open o Close

Duplicate Outputs Selection

o Output 9 Duplicates Output 1(Trip S1)o Output 10 Duplicates Output 2(Close S1)o Output 11 Duplicates Output 3(Trip S2)o Output 12 Duplicates Output 4(Close S2)

Output Seal‑in Time

2 – 8160 Cycles

OUT 5: _____ OUT 6: _____ OUT 7: _____ OUT 8: _____ OUT 9: _____ OUT 10: _____ OUT 11: _____ OUT 12: _____ OUT 13: _____ OUT 14: _____ OUT 15: _____ OUT 16: _____

Setup System 0

Figure A-2 Setup System

A–4


Transfer Settings

CS – Common Settings


Transfer Mode

o Simultaneous o Sequential Upper Voltage Limit New Source: _____ 5V – 180V Lower Voltage Limit New Source: _____ 5V – 180V

Breaker Closing Time

S1 Breaker Closing Time: _____ 0 Cycles – 12 Cycles S1 Breaker Closing Time Deviation: _____ 0 Cycles – 6 Cycles S2 Breaker Closing Time: _____ 0 Cycles – 12 Cycles S2 Breaker Closing Time Deviation: _____ 0 Cycles – 6 Cycles o Adaptation Disable o Adaptation Enable

S1 Breaker 52a & 52b Position Disagreement

Pickup Delay: _____ 0 Cycles – 30 Cycles Dropout Time Delay: _____ 0 Cycles – 30 Cycles

S2 Breaker 52a & 52b Position Disagreement

Pickup Delay: _____ 0 Cycles – 30 Cycles Dropout Time Delay: _____ 0 Cycles – 30 Cycles

Incomplete Transfer Lockout Time: _____ 50 Cycles – 3000 Cycles Local Manual Initiate Time Delay: _____ 0 Cycles – 8160 Cycles Remote Manual Initiate Time Delay: _____ 0 Cycles – 8160 Cycles Blocking After Transfer Time: _____ 0 Cycles – 8160 Cycles Trip Command Pulse Length: _____ 15 Cycles – 30 Cycles Close Command Pulse Length: _____ 15 Cycles – 30 Cycles

Trip/Close Circuit (TCM/CCM) Open Condition Block Transfer

o Disable o Enable

Inputs

Breaker Status Inputs

o S1 52a (Input 1) o S1 52b (Input 2) o S1 52a & 52b (Inputs 1 & 2) o S2 52a (Input 4) o S2 52b (Input 5) o S2 52a & 52b (Inputs 4 & 5)

External Control Inputs Configuration

Transfer Block #1

o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10 o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

Transfer Block #2

o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10 o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

System Setpoints Transfer Settings

Figure A-3 System Setpoints Transfer Settings (page 1 of 7)

A–5

Appendix – A

Transfer Settings

CS – Common Settings

External Control Inputs Configuration (cont'd)

Transfer Block #3

o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10 o #11 o #12

o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

External Status Reset

o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10 o #11 o #12

o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

Outputs

Auto Fast Transfer Ready Outputs

o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Ready Outputs

o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Transfer Ready Outputs

o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Transfer Completed Outputs

o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Fast Transfer Load Shedding Outputs

o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding Outputs

o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Load Shedding Outputs

o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Incomplete Transfer Outputs

o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Load Shedding Function Selection

o F27B #3 o F81 #1 o F81R #1

o Residual Voltage Transfer o Fixed-Time Transfer

System Setpoints Transfer Settings (cont'd)


A–6


Transfer Settings

ATS – Automatic Transfer Settings

Setup

Auto Transfer

o Enable o Disable

Both S1 & S2 Breakers Open

o Block Transfer o Auto Close


Auto Transfer Block

o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10 o #11 o #12

o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2)

o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10 o #11 o #12

o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

86P-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1)

o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10 o #11 o #12

o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

27-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2)

o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10 o #11 o #12

o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

27-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1)

o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10 o #11 o #12

o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18



A–7

Appendix – A

Transfer Settings

ATS – Automatic Transfer Settings (cont'd)

Fast Transfer

Delta Phase Angle Limit _____ 0.0 Degrees – 90.0 Degrees

Delta Voltage Limit _____ 0V – 60V

o Disable o Enable

Delta Freq. Limit _____ 0.02Hz – 2.00Hz

o Disable o Enable

Time Window _____ 1 Cycle – 10 Cycles

Closing Command Time Delay _____ 0 Cycles – 10 Cycles

Blocking Inputs Selection

o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10 o #11 o #12

o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18 o FL

In-Phase Transfer


o Enable o Disable


Time Window _____ 10 Cycles – 600 Cycles


o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10 o #11 o #12

o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18 o FL


Residual Voltage Limit _____ 5V – 60V

Load Shedding Time Delay _____ 0 Cycles – 100 Cycles


o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10 o #11 o #12

o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18 o FL

Fixed-Time Transfer

Fixed Time Delay _____ 30 Cycles – 1000 Cycles



o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10 o #11 o #12

o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18 o FL



A–8


Transfer Settings

MTS – Manual Transfer Settings

Setup

Manual Transfer

o Disable o Enable


Manual Transfer Block

o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10 o #11 o #12

o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

Manual Transfer Initiate

o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10 o #11 o #12

o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

Fast Transfer



o Disable o Enable


o Disable o Enable


Closing Command Time Delay _____ 0 Cycles – 10 Cycles


o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10 o #11 o #12

o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18 o FL



A–9

Appendix – A

Transfer Settings

MTS – Manual Transfer Settings (cont'd)

In-Phase Transfer


o Enable o Disable


Time Window _____ 10 Cycles – 600 Cycles


o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10 o #11 o #12

o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18 o FL


Residual Voltage Limit _____ 5V – 60V



o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10 o #11 o #12

o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18 o FL

Hot Parallel Transfer



o Disable o Enable


o Disable o Enable


Tripping Command Time Delay _____ 0 Cycles – 30 Cycles


o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10 o #11 o #12

o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18 o FL



A–10


Transfer Settings

AT – Auto Trip

AT

Breaker Trip Option

o Trip Originally Closed Breaker o Trip Breaker Just Closed

Tripping Command Time Delay _____ 0 Cycles – 50 Cycles


o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10 o #11 o #12

o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18 o FL



A–11

Appendix – A

Function Settings

27B – Bus Phase Undervoltage

Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2)

27B #1

Pickup _____ 5V – 120V

o Disable o Enable Voltage Inhibit _____ 5V – 120V

Time Delay _____ 1 Cycle – 8160 Cycles

I/O Selection

Outputs

o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Blocking Inputs

o #1(S1 52a) o #2(S1 52b) o #3(S1 52SP) o #4(S2 52a)

o #5(S2 52b) o #6(S2 52SP) o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

o #FL

Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate (S2 to S1)

27B #2

Pickup _____ 5V – 120V



I/O Selection

Outputs

o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Blocking Inputs

o #1(S1 52a) o #2(S1 52b) o #3(S1 52SP) o #4(S2 52a)

o #5(S2 52b) o #6(S2 52SP) o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

o #FL

System Setpoints Function Settings

Figure A-4 System Setpoints Function Settings (page 1 of 18)

A–12


Function Settings

27B – Bus Phase Undervoltage (cont'd)

27B #3

Pickup _____ 5V – 120V



I/O Selection

Outputs

o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Blocking Inputs

o #1(S1 52a) o #2(S1 52b) o #3(S1 52SP) o #4(S2 52a)

o #5(S2 52b) o #6(S2 52SP) o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

o #FL

27B #4

Pickup _____ 5V – 120V



I/O Selection

Outputs

o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Blocking Inputs

o #1(S1 52a) o #2(S1 52b) o #3(S1 52SP) o #4(S2 52a)

o #5(S2 52b) o #6(S2 52SP) o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

o #FL

System Setpoints Function Settings (cont'd)


A–13

Appendix – A

Function Settings

50BF #1 – Source 1 Breaker Failure

Source 1 Breaker Failure

50BF #1

Pickup Current _____ 0.02A – 2.00A


I/O Selection

Outputs

o #3 o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Blocking Inputs

o #1(S1 52a) o #2(S1 52b) o #3(S1 52SP) o #4(S2 52a)

o #5(S2 52b) o #6(S2 52SP) o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

o #FL

I/O Initiate

Outputs Initiate

o #1 o #2 o #3 o #4 o #5 o #6 o #7

o #9 o #10 o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Inputs Initiate

o #7(86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2))o #8(Manual Transfer Initiate)

o #9(Transfer Block 1) o #10 o #11 o #12

o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18



A–14


Function Settings

S1 BF – Source 1 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status)

Source 1 Breaker Failure (Using Breaker Status)

S1BF

Time Delay _____ 0 Cycles – 30 Cycles

I/O Selection

Outputs

o #3 o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9

o #10 o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Blocking Inputs

o #1(S1 52a) o #2(S1 52b) o #3(S1 52SP) o #4(S2 52a)

o #5(S2 52b) o #6(S2 52SP) o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

o #FL



A–15

Appendix – A

Function Settings

81 – Bus Voltage Frequency

Bus Voltage Frequency

81 #1

Pickup _____ 50.00Hz – 67.00Hz (40.00 Hz – 57.00 Hz, 50 Hz)


I/O Selection

Outputs

o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Blocking Inputs

o #1(S1 52a) o #2(S1 52b) o #3(S1 52SP) o #4(S2 52a)

o #5(S2 52b) o #6(S2 52SP) o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

o #FL

81 #2

Pickup _____ 50.00Hz – 67.00Hz (40.00 Hz – 57.00 Hz, 50 Hz)


I/O Selection

Outputs

o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Blocking Inputs

o #1(S1 52a) o #2(S1 52b) o #3(S1 52SP) o #4(S2 52a)

o #5(S2 52b) o #6(S2 52SP) o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

o #FL



A–16


Function Settings

TCM – Trip Circuit Monitor

Trip Circuit Monitor

TCM #1 (Source 1 Breaker)


Dropout Time Delay _____ 1 Cycle – 8160 Cycles

I/O Selection

Outputs

o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Blocking Inputs

o #3(S1 52SP) o #4(S2 52a)

o #5(S2 52b) o #6(S2 52SP) o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

o #FL

TCM #2 (Source 2 Breaker)



I/O Selection

Outputs

o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Blocking Inputs

o #1(S1 52a) o #2(S1 52b) o #3(S1 52SP)

o #6(S2 52SP) o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

o #FL



A–17

Appendix – A

Function Settings

60FL – Bus VT Fuse-Loss

Bus VT Fuse-Loss

60FL

Delta Voltage Pickup _____ 5V – 25V


Blocking Drop Out Time Delay _____ 1 Cycle – 300 Cycles

Bus VT Fuse Loss Condition

o Fixed Time Transfer o Block Transfer

I/O Selection

Outputs

o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Blocking Inputs

o #1(S1 52a) o #2(S1 52b) o #3(S1 52SP) o #4(S2 52a)

o #5(S2 52b) o #6(S2 52SP) o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

o #FL



A–18


Function Settings

50BF #2 – Source 2 Breaker Failure

Source 2 Breaker Failure

50BF #2



I/O Selection

Outputs

o #1 o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Blocking Inputs

o #1(S1 52a) o #2(S1 52b) o #3(S1 52SP) o #4(S2 52a)

o #5(S2 52b) o #6(S2 52SP) o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

o #FL

I/O Initiate

Outputs Initiate

o #1 o #2 o #3 o #4 o #5 o #6 o #7 o #8

o #9 o #10 o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Inputs Initiate

o #7(86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2))o #8(Manual Transfer Initiate)

o #9(Transfer Block 1) o #10 o #11 o #12

o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18



A–19

Appendix – A

Function Settings

S2 BF – Source 2 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status)

Source 2 Breaker Failure (Using Breaker Status)

S2 BF


I/O Selection

Outputs

o #1 o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Blocking Inputs

o #1(S1 52a) o #2(S1 52b) o #3(S1 52SP) o #4(S2 52a)

o #5(S2 52b) o #6(S2 52SP) o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

o #FL



A–20


Function Settings

81R – ROCOF (Bus Voltage)

81R #1

Pickup _____ 0.10 Hz/Sec – 20.00Hz/Sec


Neg. Sequence Voltage Inhibit _____ 0% – 99%

Increasing ROCOF o Enable o Disable

I/O Selection

Outputs

o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Blocking Inputs

o #1(S1 52a) o #2(S1 52b) o #3(S1 52SP) o #4(S2 52a)

o #5(S2 52b) o #6(S2 52SP) o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

o #FL

81R #2

Pickup _____ 0.10 Hz/Sec – 20.00Hz/Sec


Neg. Sequence Voltage Inhibit _____ 0% – 99%

Increasing ROCOF o Enable o Disable

I/O Selection

Outputs

o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Blocking Inputs

o #1(S1 52a) o #2(S1 52b) o #3(S1 52SP) o #4(S2 52a)

o #5(S2 52b) o #6(S2 52SP) o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

o #FL



A–21

Appendix – A

Function Settings

CCM – Close Circuit Monitor

Close Circuit Monitor

CCM #1 (Source 1 Breaker)



I/O Selection

Outputs

o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Blocking Inputs

o #2(S1 52b) o #3(S1 52SP) o #4(S2 52a)

o #5(S2 52b) o #6(S2 52SP) o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

o #FL

CCM #2 (Source 2 Breaker)



I/O Selection

Outputs

o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Blocking Inputs

o #1(S1 52a) o #2(S1 52b) o #3(S1 52SP)

o #6(S2 52SP) o #7 o #8 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

o #FL



A–22


Function Settings

ISSL – ISSLogic

ISSLogic

ISSL #1

Initiating Outputs (1-16)

o #1 o #2 o #3 o #4 o #5 o #6 o #7 o #8

o #9 o #10 o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Initiating Function Timeout

o 27B #1 o 27B #2 o 27B #3 o 27B #4 o 50BF #1

o 50BF #2 o 81 #1 o 81 #2 o 81R #1 o 81R #2

o 50S1 #1 o 50S1 #2 o 50S2 #1 o 50S2 #2

o 60FL o ISSL #2 o ISSL #3 o ISSL #4 o ISSL #5

o ISSL #6 o TCM #1 o TCM #2 o CCM #1 o CCM #2

Initiating Function Pickup

o 27B #1 o 27B #2 o 27B #3 o 27B #4 o 50BF #1

o 50BF #2 o 81 #1 o 81 #2 o 81R #1 o 81R #2

o 50S1 #1 o 50S1 #2 o 50S2 #1 o 50S2 #2

o 60FL o ISSL #2 o ISSL #3 o ISSL #4 o ISSL #5

o ISSL #6 o TCM #1 o TCM #2 o CCM #1 o CCM #2



A–23

Appendix – A

Function Settings

ISSL – ISSLogic (cont'd)

Initiating System Status

o Auto Fast Transfer Delta Phase Angle OK o Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Delta Phase Angle OK

o Auto Fast Transfer Delta Voltage OK o Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Delta Voltage OK

o Auto Fast Transfer Delta Frequency OK o Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Delta Frequency OK

o Auto In-Phase Transfer Delta Voltage OK o Manual In-Phase Transfer Delta Voltage OK

o Auto In-Phase Transfer Delta Frequency OK o Manual In-Phase Transfer Delta Frequency OK

o Auto Fast Transfer Ready o Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Ready

o Transfer Ready o Auto Close Initiated

o Auto Transfer Enabled o Manual Transfer Enabled

o Auto Transfer Initiated o Manual Transfer Initiated

o Fixed Time Transfer Selected (60FL Condition) o Hot Parallel Transfer In Process

o 27B#1 Bus Phase UV Transfer Initiated (S1 to S2) o Hot Parallel Transfer Operated

o 27B#2 Bus Phase UV Transfer Initiated (S2 to S1) o Auto Trip Enabled

o Open Transition Transfer In Process o Auto Trip Operated

o Transfer Completed o S1/S2 Breaker Racked-Out Transfer Blocked

o Fast Transfer Operated o New Source Upper Voltage Limit Transfer Blocked

o In-Phase Transfer Operated o New Source Lower Voltage Limit Transfer Blocked

o Residual Voltage Transfer Operated o Bus VT Fuse-Loss Transfer Blocked

o Fixed Time Transfer Operated o Trip/Close Circuit Open Transfer Blocked

o Fast Transfer Load Shedding o Both Breakers Open Transfer Blocked

o In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding o Both Breakers Close Transfer Blocked

o Residual Voltage Transfer Load Shedding o Incomplete Transfer Blocked

o Fixed Time Transfer Load Shedding o Blocking After Transfer Alarm

o Load Shedding (27B#3, 81#1, 81R#1) o S1/S2 Breaker Closing Time Out Of Range

o S1 Breaker Failure o S2 Breaker Failure

o S1 Breaker 52a & 52b Position Disagreement o S2 Breaker 52a & 52b Position Disagreement

o S1 Breaker Opened o S2 Breaker Opened

o S1 Breaker Closed o S2 Breaker Closed

o Trip S1 Breaker Command o Trip S2 Breaker Command

o Close S1 Breaker Command o Close S2 Breaker Command

o Source 1 (New Source) o Source 2 (New Source)

o Remote Mode



A–24


Function Settings


o Initiate via Communication Port

Initiating Inputs (1-18)

o #1(S1 52a) o #2(S1 52b) o #3(S1 52SP) o #4(S2 52a)

o #5(S2 52b) o #6(S2 52SP) o #7 [86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2)]

o #8 (Manual Transfer Initiate) o #9 (Transfer Block 1) o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

o #FL

Blocking Inputs (1-18)

o #1(S1 52a) o #2(S1 52b) o #3(S1 52SP) o #4(S2 52a)



o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

o #FL



A–25

Appendix – A

Function Settings


Block System Status

o Auto Fast Transfer Delta Phase Angle OK o Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Delta Phase Angle OK

o Auto Fast Transfer Delta Voltage OK o Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Delta Voltage OK

o Auto Fast Transfer Delta Frequency OK o Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Delta Frequency OK

o Auto In-Phase Transfer Delta Voltage OK o Manual In-Phase Transfer Delta Voltage OK

o Auto In-Phase Transfer Delta Frequency OK o Manual In-Phase Transfer Delta Frequency OK

o Auto Fast Transfer Ready o Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Ready

o Transfer Ready o Auto Close Initiated

o Auto Transfer Enabled o Manual Transfer Enabled

o Auto Transfer Initiated o Manual Transfer Initiated

o Fixed Time Transfer Selected (60FL Condition) o Hot Parallel Transfer In Process

o 27B#1 Bus Phase UV Transfer Initiated (S1 to S2) o Hot Parallel Transfer Operated

o 27B#2 Bus Phase UV Transfer Initiated (S2 to S1) o Auto Trip Enabled

o Open Transition Transfer In Process o Auto Trip Operated

o Transfer Completed o S1/S2 Breaker Racked-Out Transfer Blocked

o Fast Transfer Operated o New Source Upper Voltage Limit Transfer Blocked

o In-Phase Transfer Operated o New Source Lower Voltage Limit Transfer Blocked

o Residual Voltage Transfer Operated o Bus VT Fuse-Loss Transfer Blocked

o Fixed Time Transfer Operated o Trip/Close Circuit Open Transfer Blocked

o Fast Transfer Load Shedding o Both Breakers Open Transfer Blocked

o In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding o Both Breakers Close Transfer Blocked

o Residual Voltage Transfer Load Shedding o Incomplete Transfer Blocked

o Fixed Time Transfer Load Shedding o Blocking After Transfer Alarm

o Load Shedding (27B#3, 81#1, 81R#1) o S1/S2 Breaker Closing Time Out Of Range

o S1 Breaker Failure o S2 Breaker Failure

o S1 Breaker 52a & 52b Position Disagreement o S2 Breaker 52a & 52b Position Disagreement

o S1 Breaker Opened o S2 Breaker Opened

o S1 Breaker Closed o S2 Breaker Closed

o Trip S1 Breaker Command o Trip S2 Breaker Command

o Close S1 Breaker Command o Close S2 Breaker Command

o Source 1 (New Source) o Source 2 (New Source)

o Remote Mode



A–26


Function Settings


o Block via Communication Port

Delay _____ 0 Cycles – 65500 Cycles

Profile Switch

o Not Activated o #1 o #2 o #3 o #4

DO/RST Delay _____ 0 Cycles – 65500 Cycles

o Dropout Timer o Reset Timer

Outputs

o #5 o #6 o #7 o LCK/BLK (Out 8)

o #9 o #10 o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

o No Transfer Initiate

o Initiate S1 to S2 Transfer

o Initiate S2 to S1 Transfer

o Transfer Block

ISSL #2 (See Previous ISSL #1)







A–27

Appendix – A

Function Settings

50S1 #1 – Source 1 Instantaneous Phase Overload Detection

Source 1 Source 1 Instantaneous Phase Overload Detection

50S1 #1



I/O Selection

Outputs

o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Blocking Inputs

o #1(S1 52a) o #2(S1 52b) o #3(S1 52SP) o #4(S2 52a)



o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

o #FL

50S1 #2



I/O Selection

Outputs

o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Blocking Inputs

o #1(S1 52a) o #2(S1 52b) o #3(S1 52SP) o #4(S2 52a)



o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

o #FL



A–28


Function Settings

50S2 #1 – Source 2 Instantaneous Phase Overload Detection

Source 2 Instantaneous Phase Overload Detection

50S2 #1



I/O Selection

Outputs

o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Blocking Inputs

o #1(S1 52a) o #2(S1 52b) o #3(S1 52SP) o #4(S2 52a)



o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

o #FL

50S2 #2



I/O Selection

Outputs

o #5 o #6 o #7 o #9 o #10

o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16

Blocking Inputs

o #1(S1 52a) o #2(S1 52b) o #3(S1 52SP) o #4(S2 52a)



o #11 o #12 o #13 o #14 o #15 o #16 o #17 o #18

o #FL



A–29

Appendix – A

Check each box applicable : (See page A-1 for information regarding the use of this table.)D Column = Function Disabled.OUTPUTS Columns =Designated function output(s)FL Column = Function blocked by fuse loss.INPUTS Columns =Designated function blocking input(s)

Table A-1 MBTS Configuration Table

FunctionD OUTPUTS BLOCKING INPUTS

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

CS

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

AT

ATS

1

2

3

4

MTS

1

2

3

4

27B

1

2

3

4

50BF #1

50BF #2

50S1 #1

50S1 #2

50S2 #1

50S2 #2

S1 BF

S2 BF

60 FL

811

2

81R1

2

TCM1

2

CCM1

2

ISSL

1

2

3

4

5

6

A–30



Communications: Appendix – B

B–1

B Appendix B–Communications

The M-4272 Motor Bus Transfer System (MBTS)incorporates three serial ports and an optional RJ45Ethernet port for intelligent, digital communicationwith external devices. Equipment such as RTU's,data concentrators, modems, or computers can beinterfaced for direct, on-line, real time data acquisitionand control. Generally, all data available to theoperator through the front panel of the relay with theM-3931 Human-Machine Interface (HMI) module isaccessible remotely through the MODBUS dataexchange protocol. The protocol document and thedatabase-specific protocol document are availablefrom the factory or from our website atwww.beckwithelectric.com.

The M-3872 ISScom® Communications Softwarehas been supplied for communication to any IBMcompatible computer running under Microsoft®

WindowsTM 98 or higher.

The communication protocol implements serial, byteoriented, asynchronous communication and can beused to fulfill the following communications functions:

• Real time monitoring of line status.

• Interrogation and modification of setpoints.

• Downloading of recorded oscillograph andtransfer event log data.

• Reconfiguration of MBTS functions.

NOTE: The following restrictions apply forMODBUS protocol use:

1. Parity is supported on COM1, COM2 andCOM3; valid selections are 8,N,2; 8,O,1;8,E,1; 8,N,1; 8,O,2 or 8,E,2.

2. ASCII mode is not supported (RTU only).

3. Standard baud rates from 1200 to 9600are supported.

4. Only the following MODBUS commandsare supported:

a. read holding register (function 03)

b. read input register (function 04)

c. force single coil (function 05)

d. preset single register (function 06)

For detailed information on ISScom communications,refer to Section 4.1, Unit Setup.

Serial PortsThe MBTS includes both front and rear panel RS-232ports and a rear RS-485 port. The front and rearpanel RS-232 ports are 9-pin (DB9S) connectorconfigured as DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) perthe EIA-232D standard. Signals are defined in TableB-1, Communication Port Signals .

The 2-wire RS-485 port is assigned to the rear panelterminal block pins 43 (–) and 44 (+).

Each communication port may be configured tooperate at any of the standard baud rates (1200,2400, 4800, and 9600). The RS-485 port shares thesame baud rate with COM 2 (for COM1 see Section5.4, Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers).

A null modem cable is also shown in Figure B-1, NullModem Cable: M-0423, if direct connection to a PC(personal computer) is desired.

Optional Ethernet PortThe M-4272, when equipped with the optional Ethernetport can be accessed from a local network. Whenthe ethernet port is enabled, the COM2 serial port(RS-232) is unavailable for communication. However,the Demodulated IRIG-B may still be used throughthe COM2 Port when Ethernet is enabled. WhenCOM2 Port is enabled the Ethernet Port is notavailable. Although the ethernet connection speed isfaster than the RS-232 port (can be up to 10 Mbps),the ethernet module connects internally through theCOM2 serial connection and is therefore limited toconnection speeds up to 9600 bps.

Either port COM2 (Ethernet) or COM3 may be usedto remotely set and interrogate the relay using alocal area network, modem or other direct serialconnection.

B–2


Signal COM1 COM2

RX Receive Data Pin 2 Pin 2

TX Transmit Data Pin 3 Pin 3

RTS Request to Send Pin 7 Pin 7

CTS Clear to Send Pin 8

DTR Data Terminal Ready Pin 4 Pin 4

DCD Data Carrier Detect Pin 1*

GND Signal Ground Pin 5 Pin 5

+15 V Pin 1*

-15 V Pin 9*

TTL IRIG-B (+) Pin 6*

* Optional: See Section 5.4, Circuit Board Switches andJumpers, 15V ( 15%) @100 mA maximum.

Table B-1 Communication Port Signals

NOTE: Also see Tables 5-1, 5-2 and Figure 5-8.

Figure B-1 Null Modem Cable: M-0423

Communications: Appendix – B

B–3

RS-232

TR

T R

TR TR

REPOFF

DCEDTE

DCEDTE

REPOFF

DCEDTE

REPOFF

DCEDTE

REPOFF

RS-232 RS-232

Echo Cancel On

25 pin or9-25 pin Straight-Through Cable

FOC

FOC

FOC

FOC

DYMEC Fiber OpticLink / Repeater

Slave #1Address 1

Slave #2Address 2

Slave #3Address 3

9-25 pin "Straight-Through" Cables

PC Master

Figure B-2 RS-232 Fiber Optic Network

B–4


RS-232 to RS-485 2-wireconverter or RS-485 PC Card

PC Master - + - +

RS-485 2-Wire Network

B(-)

A(+)

Twisted

200 Ω*

Slave #1Address 6

Slave #2Address 8

Slave #3Address 1

CAUTION: Due to the possibility of ground potential difference between units, all units should be mountedin the same rack. If this is not possible, fiber optics with the appropriate converters should be used forisolation.

NOTE: Each address on the network must be unique. Only the last physical slave on the network shouldhave the termination resistor installed. This may be completed externally or using a jumper internalto the unit. See Section 5.4, Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers.

Figure B-3 RS-485 Network

Figure B-4 COM2 Pinout for Demodulated TTL Level Signal

Self-Test Error Codes Appendix – C

C–1

CAppendix C–Self-Test Error Codes

1

2 Battery backed RAM test fail

3 EEPROM write power-up fail

4 EEPROM read back power-up fail

5 Dual port RAM test fail

6 EEPROM write calibration checksum fail

7 EEPROM write setpoint checksum fail loss of power

8 EEPROM write setpoint checksum fail loss of battery backed RAM

9 DMA checksum/physical block fail

10 Oscillograph Memory Test fail

11 DSP external program RAM fail

12 DSP A/D convert fail

13 DSP ground channel fail

14 DSP reference channel fail

15 DSP PGA gain fail

16 DSP DSP<-> HOST interrupt 1 fail

17 DSP DSP -> HOST interrupt 2 set fail

18 DSP DSP -> HOST interrupt 2 reset fail

19 DSP program load fail

20 DSP not running run mode code

21 DSP not running primary boot code

22 DSP DPRAM pattern test fail

23 EEPROM write verify error

26 WARNING calibration checksum mismatch warning

27* WARNING setpoint checksum mismatch warning

28 WARNING low battery (BBRAM) warning

29 Supply/mux PGA running test fail

Table C-1 Self-Test Error Codes (1 of 2)

*If a system Setpoint has been changed and power is removed from the MBTS within 5 minutes, an Error Code 27 will bedisplayed when power is applied to the MBTS. This condition is normal and the Error Code 27 should be reset.


C–2

30 External DSP RAM test fail

31 Unrecognized INT1 code

32 Values update watchdog fail

34 Restart Error

35 Interrupt Error

36 Trap Error

37 Calibration running check fail

38 Ethernet Board not running (Warning)

40 Interrupt noise INT2

44 Oscillograph buffer overflow

45 Oscillograph buffer underflow

46 Failure of DSP to calculate calibration phasors

50 Stack Overflow

51 Setpoint Write Overflow

Table C-1 Self-Test Error Codes (2 of 2)

Self-Test Error Codes Appendix – C

C–3

Table C-2 ISScomTM Error Messages

Error Code Description

Comm Channel Locked An incorrect communication password supplied to thesystem will result in this message.

HMI Active This message indicates that the system is being operatedlocally and serial communication is suspended.

Echo Timeout This error results if there are problems with the serialoptical fiber communication link or if the echo cancelfunction is used incorrectly.

Illegal Data Value This error results if incorrect or out of range data isentered.

Illegal Function This error results if incorrect function is performed onmodbus protocol.

Illegal Data Address This error results if an incompatible version of ISScomsoftware is used. This is a communication protocolerror. Contact a Beckwith Electric Co. factoryrepresentative.

Invalid CRC This error results if there are problems with thecommunication link or if the echo cancel function isused incorrectly.

Failed to open Comm Port This error results when there is a mismatch in PCCom Port settings.

Failed to write to Comm Port This error results when communication with the systemis lost while attempting to write data to the system.

Read Timeout This error results when communication with the systemis lost while attempting to read data from the system.


C–4


D–1

Appendix – D

DAppendix D – Transfer Event Log Samples

This Appendix contains Illustrations of the print-ready screens provided by the ISScom® Transfer Event LogPrint Summary and Print Detail features.

D–2


Figure D-1 Transfer Event Log Summary Printout (page 1 of 2)

D–3

Appendix – D

Figure D-1 Transfer Event Log Summary Printout (page 2 of 2)

D–4


Figure D-2 Transfer Event Log Detail Printout (page 1 of 3)

D–5

Appendix – D


D–6



E–1

Appendix – E

EAppendix E – Sequence of Events

Sample Printout

This Appendix contains Illustrations of the print-ready screens provided by the ISScom® Sequence of EventsRecorder Print Summary and Print Detail features.

E–2


Figure E-1 Sequence of Events Recorder Summary Printout (page 1 of 2)

Sequence of Event Recorder

System:

Date:

M4272

05/23/2006, 15:02:02

No. Date & Time Event Information

1 04/12/2006, 13:01:23.991 Input Pickup: 2 4 6

Output Pickup: 8

Input Drop: 5

2 04/12/2006, 13:10:25.245 Input Pickup: 2 4 6

Output Pickup: 8

Input Drop: 5

3 04/12/2006, 13:19:35.349 Input Pickup: 2 4 6

Output Pickup: 8

Input Drop: 5

4 04/12/2006, 13:25:22.103 Input Pickup: 2 4 6

Output Pickup: 8

Input Drop: 5

5 04/12/2006, 13:25:41.658 Input Pickup: 2 4 6

Output Pickup: 8

Input Drop: 5

6 04/12/2006, 13:46:17.491 Input Pickup: 2 4 6

Output Pickup: 8

Input Drop: 5

7 04/12/2006, 13:57:33.949 Input Pickup: 2 4 6

Output Pickup: 8

Input Drop: 5

8 04/20/2006, 08:55:10.403 27B #1: Pickup

Input Pickup: 1 3 5 6

9 04/20/2006, 08:55:10.470 27B #1: Pickup/Timeout


Output Pickup: 1

10 04/20/2006, 08:55:10.474 27B #1: Pickup/Timeout


Output Pickup: 1

11 04/20/2006, 08:55:10.520 Fuse Loss: Pickup

27B #1: Drop

Input Pickup: 3 5 6 BFL

Output Pickup: 1

Input Drop: 1

12 04/20/2006, 08:55:10.524 Fuse Loss: Drop


Page 1

E–3

Appendix – E

Figure E-1 Sequence of Events Recorder Summary Printout (page 2 of 2)

No. Date & Time Event Information

Output Pickup: 1

Input Drop:

13 04/20/2006, 08:55:10.528 27B #1: Pickup


Output Pickup: 1

14 04/20/2006, 08:55:10.541 27B #1: Pickup


Output Pickup: 1 4

15 04/20/2006, 08:55:10.591 27B #1: Pickup


Output Pickup: 1 4

Input Drop: 5

16 04/20/2006, 08:55:10.595 27B #1: Pickup/Timeout


Output Pickup: 1 4

17 04/20/2006, 08:55:10.603 Fuse Loss: Pickup

27B #1: Drop

Input Pickup: 2 3 4 6 BFL

Output Pickup: 1 4

Page 2

E–4


Figure E-2 Sequence of Events Recorder Detail Printout (page 1 of 4)

E–5

Appendix – E


E–6



E–7

Appendix – E


E–8



F–1

Appendix – F

FAppendix F – Transfer Logic Time Sequence

This Appendix contains Illustrations of the Transfer Logic Time Sequence for the Sequential Transfer Modeand the Simultaneous Transfer Mode.

F–2


Figure F-1 Time Sequence of Transfer Logic in Sequential Transfer Mode

F–3

Appendix – F

Figure F-2 Time Sequence of Transfer Logic in Simultaneous Transfer Mode

F–4



Appendix G – Layup and Storage

G–1

Appendix G includes the recommended storageparameters, periodic surveillance activities and layupconfiguration for the M-4272 Motor Bus TransferSystem.

Storage Requirements (Environment)The recommended storage environment parametersfor the M-4272 are:

• The ambient temperature where theM-4272 is stored is within a range of 5° Cto 40° C

• The maximum relative humidity is lessthan or equal to 80% for temperatures upto 31° C, decreasing to 31° C linearly to50% for relative humidity at 40° C.

• The storage area environment is free ofdust, corrosive gases, flammablematerials, dew, percolating water, rain andsolar radiation.

Storage Requirements (Periodic SurveillanceDuring Storage)The M-4272 power supply contains electrolyticcapacitors. It is recommended that power be appliedto the relay (PS1 and optional PS2 redundant powersupply when installed) every three to five years fora period of not less than one hour to help preventthe electrolytic capacitors from drying out.

Layup ConfigurationThe M-4272 includes a removable lithium batterybacked TIMEKEEPER® module (Beckwith Electriccomponent U25, Figure 5-11). The TIMEKEEPERmodule is the M-4272 real-time clock and alsoprovides power to the unit’s nonvolatile memorywhen power is not applied to the unit.

G Appendix – Layup and Storage

Layup of the M-4272 requires verifying that thesystem clock is stopped. The steps necessary toverify system clock status are as follows:

CAUTION: Do not use the diagnostic mode inrelays that are installed in an active protectionscheme.

For units with the optional HMI panel:

1. Verify that the Power Supply (PS) fusesare installed.

2. Determine the unit power supply ratingby observing the check box below thePS terminals on the rear of the unit.

3. Apply power to the unit consistant withthe rating determined in Step 2 (seeSection 5.3 , External Connections). Theunit will enter the selftest mode.

4. When the selftests are complete, thenpress ENTER to begin main menu.

5. Press the right arrow pushbutton untilSETUP UNIT is displayed.

6. Press ENTER to access the SETUPUNIT menu.

7. Press the right arrow pushbutton untilDIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed.

8. Press ENTER. A reset warning will bedisplayed:

PROCESSOR WILL RESET!ENTER KEY TO CONTINUE

WARNING: All relay functions and protectionwill be inoperative while the relay is in diagnosticmode.

9. Press ENTER. Unit will now reset andDIAGNOSTIC MODE will be temporarilydisplayed, followed by OUTPUT TEST(RELAY). This is the beginning of thediagnostic menu.


G–2


CLOCK TEST CLOCK led cal factory

11. Press ENTER. The following isdisplayed:

CLOCK TEST03-JAN-1998 09:00:00.000

12. If the clock is running, press ENTER tostop the clock. The following isdisplayed:

CLOCK TEST-CLOCK STOP-

NOTE: When the relay clock is stopped, theseconds will be displayed as 80.

13. Press ENTER and verify the relay clockis stopped. A display similar to thefollowing is shown with the secondsstopped:

CLOCK TEST03-JAN-09:01:80.000

14. When the clock has been verified to bestopped, then press EXIT until thefollowing message appears:

PRESS EXIT TOEXIT DIAGNOSTIC MODE

15. Press EXIT again to exit DIAGNOSTICMODE. The relay will reset and normalrunning mode will resume.

NOTE: Pressing any button other than EXIT willreturn the user to DIAGNOSTIC MODE.

16. Remove power from the unit. The unitcan now be placed in storage.

For units without the optional HMI panel:

1. Verify that the Power Supply (PS) fusesare installed.

2. Determine the unit power supply ratingby observing the check box below thePS terminals on the rear of the unit.

3. Apply power to the unit consistant withthe rating determined in Step 2 (seeSection 5.3 , External Connections). Theunit will enter the selftest mode.

4. Install M-3872 ISScom® Communicationsand Oscillograph Analysis Software (seeSection 5.5, ISSccom Communicationsand Analysis Software Installation) on aPC that includes the following:

• Microsoft WindowsTM 98 OperatingSystem or above

• Equipped with a serial port

5. Connect a null modem cable from COM1of the relay to the PC serial port.

6. Open communications with the relayutilizing Section 5.6, Activating InitialLocal Communications.

7. Select System/Setup/Set Date/Timefrom the menu bar. ISScom will displaythe “Set Date/Time dialog screen Figure3-15.

8. Verify that “Start Real-Time Clock” isdisplayed, then proceed as follows:

a. If “Start Real-Time Clock” isdisplayed, then select “Save” andgo to Step 9.

b. If “Stop Real-Time Clock” isdisplayed, then select “Stop Real-Time Clock” and then select “Save”.

9. Close communications with the unit byselecting “Comm” from the menu barand then select “Exit”.

10. Disconnect the null modem cable andthen remove power from the unit. Theunit can now be placed in storage.

Storage of the M-4272 greater than five years mayrequire replacement of the lithium battery prior toplacing the unit in service. Contact Beckwith ElectricCustomer Service for replacement procedure.

Maintenance RequirementsThe M-4272 Motor Bus Transfer System does notrequire any maintenance over the length of itsservice life. However, the unit includes diagnosticfeatures that provide the means to functionally testeach element of the Motor Bus Transfer System.The M-4272 also includes the capability to testinputs, outputs and metering quantities of theinterfacing system application. Chapter 6, Testingcontains the individual test and procedures that areavailable to be integrated into the user’s periodicsurveilance/Testing program.

Appendix – H

H–1

A

Access, 1-2:1-4, 2-4:2-5, 2-8, 2-10:2-13, 2-17, 3-1:3-40, 4-1:4-10, 4-13, 4-15:4-17, 4-47, 4-56, 5-20:5-23, 6-3, G-1, SP-16

Active Profile, 2-13:2-14, 3-1:3-40, 4-26, 4-94:4-95

Alarm Counters, 2-1, 2-11:2-12, 3-33

All Setpoints Table Dialog Screen, 3-1:3-40, 4-35

Alphanumeric Display, 1-2, 2-1, SP-16

Analog trace, 3-39

Analysis Software Installation, 3-1, 5-1, 5-20, G-2

Anti-Pump Relay Not Bypassed, 4-84

Application, 1-1:1-2, 1-4, 1-6, 4-1, 4-10, 4-66:4-67, 5-5:5-7, 5-20, 5-22, 6-5, G-2, SP-1, SP-3, SP-23:SP-24

Arrow Pushbuttons, 2-1, 4-3:4-4, 4-6:4-10, 4-13:4-14, 6-4:6-12, 6-14

ATS, 3-8, 4-47, A-6:A-7

Auto Calibration, 1-3, 2-4, 6-1, 6-3, 6-14

Auto

Trip, 4-44, 4-66, A-10, A-23, A-25, SP-2, SP-4, SP-7

Trip Save/Cancel, 4-66

Trip/Blocking Inputs Selection, 4-66

Trip/Breaker Trip Option, 4-66

Trip/Enable/Disable, 4-66

Trip/Tripping Command Time Delay, 4-66

Automatic Transfer

Settings, 4-47:4-50, 4-52:4-55, A-6:A-7

Settings Fast Transfer Tab, 4-50

Settings Fixed Time Transfer, 4-55

Settings In-Phase Transfer, 4-52

Settings Residual Voltage Transfer, 4-53

Automatic Trip Settings Dialog Screen, 4-67

B

Block System Status, 4-89, 4-93:4-94, A-25

Blocking Inputs, 3-1, 4-51, 4-53:4-55, 4-58:4-66, 4-74, 4-89, 4-93, A-1, A-7:A-21, A-24, A-27:A-28

Breaker Closing Time Deviation, 4-38, A-4, SP-8, SP-15

Breaker Status, 2-2, 2-6:2-7, 2-17, 3-17, 3-22, 3-27, 4-25, 4-35, 4-37:4-38, 4-40, 4-44, 4-68, 4-72, 4-74:4-75, 4-82, 4-86, A-4, A-14, A-19, SP-2:SP-4, SP-8, SP-11:SP-15, SP-30

Breaker Status LEDs, 2-2

Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate, 4-68:4-69, A-11

Bus Voltage, 1-4, 2-6:2-7, 3-12, 3-17, 3-27, 4-45, 4-48, 4-50, 4-52, 4-54:4-55, 4-58, 4-60, 4-62, 4-68, 4-76, 4-78:4-81, 6-13, A-15, A-20, SP-3:SP-6, SP-11

Bus Voltage Frequency Function Inputs/Outputs, 4-79

Bus VT Configuration Selection Screen, 4-23, 4-26

Button Test, 2-4, 6-3, 6-8:6-9

C

Callouts, 3-34, 3-35, 3-39

CCM, 2-2, 3-17, 3-27, 4-68, 4-82:4-83, 4-85, 5-6:5-7, 6-6, A-21:A-22, SP-12, SP-23:SP-24

Circuit

Board Switches, 4-8, 4-11, 4-82, 4-86, 5-1, 5-6:5-7, 5-15, 6-6, B-1, B-4, SP-23:SP-24

Monitor, 2-2, 3-27, 4-68, 4-82:4-83, 4-85:4-88, 5-16:5-17, A-16, A-21, SP-12

Monitor Status LEDs, 2-2

Monitoring Input, 4-83:4-84, 4-86, 5-5:5-7, SP-23:SP-24

Clear

Alarm Counters, 2-12

Error Codes, 1-2, 2-4, 2-13

Clock ON/OFF, 6-3, 6-12

H Appendix H – Index


H–2

Close

Circuit Monitor, 2-2, 3-27, 4-68, 4-82:4-83, 4-85, 5-17, A-21, SP-12

Circuit Monitoring Input Configuration, 4-83

Coil, 4-82, 5-6:5-7, 6-3, 6-6:6-7, SP-23:SP-24

Coil Input Contacts, 6-6

Command, 1-4, 1-9, 2-7, 3-17, 4-25, 4-38:4-39, 4-43, 4-45, 4-51, 4-54:4-55, 4-58, 4-62, 4-72, 4-74, A-4, SP-5:SP-6, SP-8:SP-9, SP-15

Coastdown of

High Inertia Load On, 1-7

Low Inertia Load On, 1-7

Coil, 4-82, 4-86:4-87, 5-6:5-7, 6-3, 6-6:6-7, B-1, SP-12, SP-23:SP-24

Coil, Close Coil, 6-6:6-7

Colors Dialog Screen, 3-1:3-40

COM

Port Definitions, 4-10:4-11

Port Security, 2-5

Port Setting Verification Screen, 4-13

Port Settings Warning Screen, 4-12

Ports, 2-5, 4-11, 4-14

Comm

Access Code, 2-4, 3-31, 4-1:4-3

Menu, 3-1:3-40, 4-17:4-18, 5-20:5-21


Dialog Screen, 4-36:4-37, 4-40, 4-43

Inputs Dialog Screen, 4-40

Inputs Tab, 4-40

Outputs Dialog Screen, 4-42

Manual Fast Transfer/Hot, 4-43

Common Settings, 4-25, 4-35:4-36, 4-39, 4-43, 4-55:4-56, A-4:A-5

Outputs Tab, 4-43

Auto Fast Transfer Ready Outputs, 4-43

Blocking After Transfer Time, 4-39

Breaker Closing Time, 4-38

Breaker Status Inputs, 4-40

External Control Inputs Configuration, 4-41

External Status Reset, 4-41

Fast Transfer Load Shedding Outputs, 4-44

In-Phase Transfer, 4-44

Incomplete Transfer Lockout Time, 4-39

Load Shedding Outputs, 4-45

Local Manual Initiate Time Delay, 4-39

Transfer Completed Outputs, 4-44

Transfer Mode, 4-37

Transfer Ready Outputs, 4-43

Trip Command, 4-39

Upper-Lower Voltage Limit New Source, 4-38

Comunication Access Code

Reset Dialog Screen, 3-1:3-40, 4-2

Sent Confirmation Screen, 4-2

Communication

Dialog Screen, 3-1:3-40, 4-17, 4-19, 5-20:5-21

Port Signals, 1-1, B-1

Setup, 3-1:3-40, 4-10:4-11, A-1:A-2

Conformity, 1-2, 5-1

Connection, 1-1, 1-3:1-4, 1-7:1-8, 3-4, 4-1, 4-10, 4-12, 4-17:4-18, 4-23, 4-28:4-34, 4-76, 4-82, 5-1, 5-5, 5-8:5-14, 5-20, 6-2, B-1, SP-4, SP-14, SP-19, SP-29

Contact output traces, 3-39

Control, 1-2, 1-9, 2-1, 2-4, 2-9:2-10, 3-1:3-40, 4-1, 4-5:4-7, 4-41, 4-44, 4-48, 4-56, 6-3:6-4, A-4:A-6, A-8, B-1, SP-1:SP-2, SP-4, SP-16, SP-19

Control/Status, 1-2, 2-6, 2-17, 3-25, 4-19, 4-35, 5-6:5-7, 6-5, SP-3, SP-9, SP-12:SP-14, SP-16, SP-23:SP-24

Controls, 1-1, 1-4, 1-6, 2-1, 6-3, SP-15

Copy Profile Dialog Screen, 3-1:3-40

CS, 4-36, A-4:A-5

D

DATE, 1-2, 2-4, 2-17, 3-11, 3-17, 3-22, 3-39, 4-1, 4-8:4-10, 5-23, SP-13:SP-14, SP-19, SP-31, SP-34

Date/Time Command, 3-1:3-40

Dead-Sync Time, 4-11

Demodulated

IRIG-B, 1-3, 4-10, 4-14, B-1, SP-16

TTL Level Signal, 4-8, B-4

Details Screen, 3-1:3-40

Appendix – H

H–3

Device Address, 4-10, 4-13

Device ON/OFF, 2-1, 2-4, 2-10:2-11, 3-1:3-40, SP-2, SP-16, SP-30

DHCP Protocol, 1-3, 4-14:4-16

Diagnostic Test Procedures, 6-1, 6-3

Diagnostic/Time Sync LED, 2-2

Discrete I/O, 3-39

DO/RST, 4-94:4-95, A-26

Dropout Delay Timer, 4-95

Dropout/Reset, 4-94:4-95, SP-12

E

EM, 1-8

Equipment Required, 1-1, 6-2:6-3, 6-13

Error Codes, 1-1:1-2, 2-1, 2-4, 2-11:2-13, 2-17, 3-1:3-40, 5-22, C-1:C-2

Ethernet

Communication Settings, 4-14

Port Setup, 4-14:4-15

Protocols, 4-14

Settings, 3-1:3-40, 4-14

Setup Screen, 3-33, 4-14

Events, 1-2:1-3, 2-1:2-2, 2-17, 3-1:3-40, 4-8, 4-22, E-1:E-8, SP-1, SP-13:SP-16

EXIT Pushbutton, 2-1, 2-17, 4-4, 6-9

External Connections, 1-1, 4-82, 4-86, 5-1, 5-5:5-7, 5-15, G-1:G-2, SP-19, SP-23:SP-24

External Status Input Selection Dialog Screen, 4-41

F

Fast Transfer, 1-8:1-10, 2-6:2-7, 2-9, 3-14, 4-37, 4-42:4-45, 4-47, 4-50:4-51, 4-53:4-56, 4-58:4-60, 4-62, A-5, A-7:A-8, A-23, A-25, SP-2:SP-6

Blocking Inputs Selection, 4-51, 4-59

Load Shedding Output Selection, 4-45

Fast, In-Phase, Residual, 1-8, 3-17, SP-1

File

Menu, 3-1:3-40

Exit Command, 3-1:3-40

New Command, 3-1:3-40

Open Command, 3-1:3-40

Print, 3-1:3-40

Save, 3-1:3-40

Fixed Time, 1-8:1-10, 2-6, 3-17, 4-35, 4-37:4-38, 4-43, 4-45, 4-47, 4-50:4-52, 4-54:4-55, 4-58, 4-60, 4-76, A-7, A-17, A-23, A-25, SP-1:SP-5, SP-12

Front Panel Controls, 1-1, 1-4, 2-1

Front Panel Status LED Test, 6-7

Function

Dialog Screen, 3-7, 4-35, 4-78:4-81, 4-83, 4-85, 4-87, 4-90:4-91

Settings, 1-1, 4-35:4-37, 4-39:4-43, 4-45, 4-68:4-69, 4-72, 4-74, 4-76, A-1, A-4, A-11:A-28, SP-8:SP-9

Settings Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer, 4-69

G

General

Information, 5-1, 5-23

Unit Setup, 4-1

Grounding Requirements, 5-5

H

Hardware Requirements, 5-20

HMI

Comm Access Code Setup, 4-2

Ethernet Port Setup, 4-15

Manual Configuration of Ethernet Board, 4-16

Set Date, 4-8

System OK LED Setup, 4-7

User Access Codes Setup, 4-4

User Control Number Setup, 4-6

Horizontal Unit Mechanical/Physical Dimensions, 5-2

Hot Parallel, 1-8, 2-6:2-7, 3-14, 3-17, 3-29, 4-43, 4-56, 4-58, 4-60, 4-62, 4-64:4-66, A-9, A-23, A-25, SP-2:SP-3, SP-7, SP-13

Blocking Inputs Selection, 4-65

Transfer, 1-8, 2-6:2-7, 3-14, 3-17, 4-43, 4-56, 4-64:4-66, A-9, A-23, A-25, SP-2:SP-3, SP-7


H–4

I

I/O Selection, 4-70:4-71, 4-73, 4-75:4-76, 4-78, 4-80, 4-83, 4-87

In-Phase, 1-8:1-10, 2-6:2-7, 3-17, 4-37:4-38, 4-43:4-47, 4-50:4-56, 4-58, 4-60:4-62, 4-64, A-5, A-7, A-9, A-23, A-25, SP-1:SP-6

Transfer, 1-9:1-10, 2-6:2-7, 4-38, 4-44:4-47, 4-52:4-56, 4-60:4-62, A-5, A-7, A-9, A-23, A-25, SP-2:SP-6

Transfer Blocking Inputs, 4-61

Transfer Load Shedding Output, 4-46

Incomplete Transfer Outputs Selection, 4-46

Industrial Processing Plant Bus, 1-6

Initial

Local Communications, 3-1, 5-1, 5-20, G-2

Setup Procedure, 5-1, 5-23

Initiating

Function Pickup, 4-89, 4-91, 4-93, A-22

Inputs, 4-89, 4-93, A-24

Outputs, 4-89, 4-91, A-22

System Status, 4-89, 4-92:4-93, A-23

Input

Activated Profile, 4-26

Active States, 4-25, 4-27

Contacts, 3-29, 4-26, 4-40, 6-5:6-6

Status LEDs, 2-2

Test, 2-4, 6-3, 6-5:6-6

Inputs/Outputs Selection, 4-68:4-69, 4-77, 4-79, 4-81, 4-85, 4-88

IInstallation, 1-1, 3-1, 5-1, 5-5, 5-20, 6-14, G-2

Insulation Coordination, 5-5

ISScom, 1-1, 1-3, 2-1, 2-8:2-11, 2-13:2-15, 2-17, 3-1:3-40, 4-1:4-3, 4-5, 4-8, 4-10:4-14, 4-17, 4-19:4-20, 4-22:4-23, 4-25:4-26, 4-91, 5-1, 5-20:5-22, 6-13:6-14, B-1, C-3, D-1, E-1, G-2, SP-2, SP-13:SP-14, SP-16

COM Port Definitions, 4-11

Data Reading Successful, 3-1:3-40

Ethernet Port Setup, 4-14

File Written, 3-1:3-40

Functional Description, 2-1, 3-1:3-40

Installation, 3-1, 5-20

Main Menu Structure, 3-1:3-40

Modem Expanded Communication, 3-1:3-40

Program Icon, 3-1:3-40, 5-20

Serial Communication, 3-1:3-40

Set Date/Time, 4-8

TCP/IP Ethernet Communication, 3-1:3-40

User Access Codes Setup, 4-3

ISSLogic, 2-13, 3-3, 3-29, 4-68, 4-89:4-96, A-22:A-26, SP-12, SP-14, SP-16

Function Setup, 4-90:4-91

Settings, 4-89

ISSplot

File Menu, 3-1:3-40

Main Screen, 3-34

Menu Structure, 3-34

Settings, 3-1:3-40

View Menu, 3-1:3-40

Help Menu, 3-1:3-40

J

Jumpers, 4-8, 4-11, 4-82, 4-86, 5-1, 5-6:5-7, 5-15, 6-6, B-1, B-4, SP-23:SP-24

L

Large Induction Motor, 1-7

Large Synchronous Motor, 1-7

Load Shedding Outputs, 4-44:4-45, A-5

Local Modem, 4-17:4-18

Log/Clear, 2-1, 3-1:3-40

Logic Functions, 4-89

M

Main-Tie-Main Application Example, 4-67

Manual Fast Transfer

Blocking Inputs Selection, 4-58:4-59

Save/Cancel, 4-58

Closing Command Time Delay, 4-58

Delta Frequency Limit, 4-58

Delta Phase Angle Limit, 4-58

Delta Voltage Limit, 4-58

Hot Parallel Ready Output Selection, 4-42

Time Window, 4-58

Appendix – H

H–5

Manual Hot Parallel Transfer



Delta Phase Angle Limit, 4-64


Save/Cancel, 4-64

Time Window, 4-64

Tripping Command Time Delay, 4-64

Manual In-Phase Transfer




Save/Cancel, 4-60

Time Window, 4-60

Manual Operation, 1-1, 2-1, 2-6, 3-33

Manual Residual Voltage Transfer

Save/Cancel, 4-62


Load Shedding Time Delay, 4-62

Residual Voltage Limit, 4-62

Manual Transfer

Block, 4-56

Command Sent Confirmation, 2-8

Initiate, 4-58

Initiate Input Settings, 4-57

Save/Cancel, 4-58

Settings, 2-6, 2-15, 3-13, 4-35, 4-44, 4-56:4-59, 4-61, 4-63, 4-65, A-8:A-9

Maual Transsfer Settings

Fast Transfer, 4-59

Hot Parallel, 4-65

In-Phase Transfer, 4-61

Residual Voltage Transfer, 4-63

Setup, 4-56

External Control Inputs Configuration, 4-56

Manual Transfer Mode, 4-56

MBTS

Confirmation, 3-1:3-40

Outputs, 5-5

Setpoints 3-1:3-40

Setup System, 4-23

Mechanical/Physical Dimensions, 5-1:5-2, 5-4

Metering, 1-2, 2-1, 2-8:2-10, 2-14:2-16, 3-1:3-40, 4-38, 5-22, 6-1:6-2, 6-13, 6-15, G-2, SP-13, SP-16, SP-30

Current Input Configuration, 6-15

Test Setup, 6-13

Tests, 6-1:6-2, 6-13

Voltage Input Configuration, 6-15

Miscellaneous Dialog Screen, 3-1:3-40, 4-5

Modems, 4-10, 4-17, B-1

Module LED Test, 2-4, 6-8

Monitor Status/Metering, 2-17

Monitoring, 1-3, 2-1, 2-14, 2-17, 3-1, 3-3, 4-25, 4-82:4-84, 4-86, 5-5:5-7, 6-14, B-1, SP-2, SP-12, SP-14:SP-15, SP-23:SP-24

MTS, 4-56, A-8:A-9

Multiple Systems Addressing Using Communica-tions-Line Splitter, 4-12

N

New User Access Code Sent Confirmation, 4-3

O

ON/OFF, 2-1, 2-4, 2-10:2-11, 3-1:3-40, 6-3, 6-12, SP-2, SP-16, SP-30

One-line, 1-4:1-6, 5-1

Open Delta Three-Line Connection Diagram, 4-34, 5-14

Order of Possible Open Transition MBTS, 1-10

Oscillograph, 1-2:1-3, 2-2, 2-14, 2-17, 3-1:3-40, 4-1, 4-8, 4-19:4-21, B-1, C-1:C-2, G-2, SP-1, SP-16

Manual Trigger Command Confirmation Screen, 3-1:3-40

Record Screen, 3-1:3-40

Records Cleared, 3-1:3-40

Setup, 3-27, 4-1, 4-19:4-21

Output

Contacts, 2-17, 3-7, 4-35, 5-5, 6-4, A-1, SP-2, SP-10, SP-14, SP-16, SP-18

Counters, 2-11:2-12, 3-1:3-40

Relay Test, 6-4

Outputs Selection, 4-25, 4-27, 4-46, 4-72:4-73, 4-91

Overview, 2-6, 6-2:6-3


H–6

P

Panel Mount Cutout Dimensions, 5-3

Parallel Ready Outputs, 4-43

PC Modem, 4-17

Phasor Diagram, 2-15, 3-1:3-40

Ports, 1-3, 2-5, 4-10:4-11, 4-14, 4-17, 6-3, B-1, SP-2, SP-16, SP-29

Power On Self Test, 6-1:6-2, 6-13:6-14

Power Supply, 2-2, 5-5:5-7, 6-2:6-4, 6-7, 6-13:6-14, G-1:G-2, SP-14:SP-15, SP-23:SP-24, SP-28, SP-31

Power Supply Connection, 5-5, 6-2

Pre-Commissioning Checkout, 5-1, 5-22

Primary Metering, 2-14:2-15, 3-1:3-40

Print Setup Command, 3-1:3-40

Profile Switching Method, 2-14

Pulse Length, 4-25, 4-39, A-4, SP-9, SP-14

R

Relay Diagnostic Mode, 6-8

Relay Test, 6-4

Remote/Local Button, 3-1:3-40

Remote/Local Control, 2-1, 2-4, 2-9:2-10, 3-3, 3-14, SP-2, SP-16

Replacement Fuses, 5-5

Reset Delay Timer, 4-95

Reset Delay Timer Logic Diagram, 4-95

Reset/View System Error Codes, 2-11

Residual Voltage, 1-10, 2-6:2-7, 3-17, 4-37:4-38, 4-45, 4-47, 4-53:4-56, 4-58, 4-60, 4-62:4-63, A-5, A-7, A-9, A-23, A-25, SP-1:SP-6

Residual Voltage Transfer, 1-10, 2-6:2-7, 4-37:4-38, 4-45, 4-47, 4-53:4-56, 4-62:4-63, A-5, A-7, A-9, A-23, A-25, SP-2:SP-6

Residual Voltage Transfer Blocking Inputs, 4-63

ROCOF, 4-68, 4-80:4-81, A-20, SP-11

S

Save As Command, 3-1:3-40

Scale, 3-1:3-40

Screen Blanking, 2-1

Secondary Metering, 2-8:2-10, 2-14, 2-16, 3-1:3-40, 4-38, 5-22

Select Active Profile, 2-14, 3-1:3-40

Self-Test Error Codes, C-1

Sequence of Events

Dropout I/Os, 3-1:3-40

File Summary, 3-1:3-40

Pickup I/Os, 3-1:3-40

Record Cleared Confirmation Screen, 3-1:3-40

Recorder, 2-17, 3-1:3-40, 4-22, E-1:E-8, SP-16

Detail Printout, E-1:E-8

Download Screen, 3-1:3-40

Summary Printout, E-1:E-8

Send Changes, 4-22

Setup, 3-1:3-40, 4-22

System Status, 3-1:3-40

Viewer, 3-1:3-40

Sequential Transfer Mode, 2-6, 4-38, 4-72, 4-74, F-1:F-2, SP-3, SP-21

Serial Ports, 4-10, 4-17, B-1, SP-29

Service Conditions, 5-1

Setpoints, 1-1, 1-9, 2-11, 2-17, 3-1:3-40, 4-1, 4-3, 4-35:4-36, 4-38, 4-94, 5-1, 5-15:5-16, 5-23, A-1, A-4:A-28, B-1, SP-2, SP-15:SP-16

Settings

Breaker, 4-38, 4-40

External, 4-41, 4-56

Transfer, 4-37, 4-41, 4-43:4-44, 4-51

Trip Command, 4-39

Setup, 1-1, 2-4:2-5, 2-12:2-13, 2-15:2-17, 3-1:3-40, 4-1:4-7, 4-9:4-26, 4-47:4-49, 4-56, 4-91, 4-94, 5-1, 5-20:5-23, 6-3, 6-13, A-1:A-3, A-6, A-8, B-1, G-1

Oscillograph Recorder, 3-1:3-40, 4-19, 4-21

Procedure, 5-1, 5-23

System, 3-1:3-40, 4-1, 4-23:4-26, 5-22, A-1, A-3

Shortcut Command Buttons, 3-1:3-40

Simultaneous Transfer Mode, 2-6, 4-37, 4-51, 4-58, 4-72, 4-74, F-1, F-3, SP-2:SP-3, SP-15, SP-22

Single Line Diagram, 3-1:3-40, 4-25, SP-30

Single-Phase

Source Side, Phase-Ground, Three-Phase Bus Side,, 5-13

Source Side, Phase-Phase, Three-Phase

Appendix – H

H–7

Bus Side, 5-14

Phase-Ground VT Three-Line Connection Diagram, 5-11

Phase, Phase-Phase VT Three-Line Connec-tion Diagram, 5-12

Phase, Source Side, Phase-Ground, Three-Phase Bus Side,, 5-13

Status, 1-1:1-3, 2-1:2-2, 2-4:2-10, 2-14:2-17, 3-1:3-40, 4-3, 4-19:4-20, 4-25:4-26, 4-35, 4-37:4-41, 4-44, 4-51, 4-53, 4-68, 4-72, 4-74:4-75, 4-82, 4-86, 4-89, 4-92:4-95, 5-22, 6-3, 6-5:6-8, 6-14, A-4:A-5, A-14, A-19, A-23, A-25, B-1, G-1, SP-2:SP-4, SP-8, SP-11:SP-16, SP-30

Module, 1-1, 1-3, 2-1:2-2, 2-5, 2-9, 6-8, SP-2, SP-15:SP-16

Monitoring, 2-1, 2-14

RESET Pushbutton, 2-2, 2-5, 2-8:2-9, 6-8, SP-15:SP-16

Screen, 2-8:2-10, 2-14, 2-16, 3-1:3-40, 4-38, 5-22

Storage, 1-2, G-1:G-2, SP-19

Submenu Callouts, 3-1:3-40

Switching The Active Setpoint Profile, 2-13

Sync Scope, 2-15, 3-1:3-40

Sys OK LED Flash/Illuminated, 6-12

System

Clock, 3-11, 4-8, G-1

Communication Setup, 3-1:3-40, 4-11, A-1:A-2

Diagrams, 4-1, 4-23, 4-28

Error Codes, 2-11:2-12, 3-1:3-40

Menu, 3-1:3-40, 4-23, 4-35

OK LED, 2-2, 3-1:3-40, 4-5, 4-7

Outputs Test, 3-1:3-40

Setpoints, 1-9, 3-1, 3-6:3-8, 4-1, 4-35:4-36, 4-94, 5-23, A-1, A-4:A-28

Setpoints Function Settings, A-1, A-11:A-28

Setpoints Transfer Settings, A-1, A-4:A-10

Setup, 1-1, 3-4, 3-6, 4-1, 4-23, 4-25, 5-23

Status, 2-8:2-10, 2-14, 3-1:3-40, 4-38, 4-41, 4-89, 4-92:4-94, A-23, A-25, SP-12, SP-16

T

TCM, 2-2, 3-17, 3-27, 4-68, 4-86:4-88, 6-6:6-7, A-16, A-22, SP-12

Terminal Window, 3-4, 4-18:4-19

Three-Phase

Open Delta VT Three-Line Connection Dia-gram, 5-10

Wye-Primary/Wye Secondary, One Phase, 4-29, 5-9

Wye-Wye VT Three-Line Connection Dia-gram, 4-28, 5-8

Time of Trip, 3-17, 3-39

Time Sequence of Transfer Logic, 4-50, 4-52, 4-54, 4-58, 4-60, 4-62, F-2:F-3

Timer Feature, 4-94:4-95

Timestamp, 3-39

Tools Menu, 3-1:3-40

Torque Requirements, 5-5, 6-3, 6-7, 6-14

Transfer

Completed Output Selection, 4-45

Event Log, 1-2, 2-1, 2-14, 2-17, 3-1:3-40, 4-1, B-1, D-1:D-6, SP-13

Event Log Summary Printout, D-1:D-6

Methods, 1-8, 2-6, 4-38, SP-3

Modes, 1-2, 2-6, SP-3

Ready Output Selection, 4-42:4-43

Settings, 2-6, 2-15, 3-13, 4-1, 4-35:4-36, 4-44, 4-47:4-59, 4-61, 4-63:4-66, A-1, A-4:A-10, SP-5:SP-9

Delta, 4-50, 4-52, 4-58, 4-60, 4-64

Manual Transfer, 4-56, 4-58

Typical Two Breaker Configuration, 1-5

U

Unit

Isolation, 5-5

Setup, 3-22, 3-27, 3-31, 3-33, 4-1, 5-23, B-1

Connected Generator Motor Bus, 1-5

User Access Codes Reset, 3-1:3-40, 4-3

User Control Number, 1-2, 2-4, 3-1:3-40, 4-1, 4-5:4-7


H–8

User Logo Line, 2-4, 3-1:3-40, 4-5:4-6

V

V/Hz Resultant Between ES, 1-8

Vertical, 5-2:5-4, SP-2, SP-24, SP-27

Vertical Unit Mechanical/Physical Dimensions, 5-4

VT Three-Line Connection Diagram, 4-28:4-32, 5-8:5-12

W

Wye-Wye Three-Line Connection Diagram, 4-33, 5-13

Declaration of Conformity Appendix – I

I–1

I Appendix I – Declaration of Conformity


I–2


Legal Information

PatentThe units described in this manual are covered byU.S. Patents, with other patents pending.

Buyer shall hold harmless and indemnify the Seller,its directors, officers, agents, and employees fromany and all costs and expense, damage or loss,resulting from any alleged infringementof UnitedStates Letters Patent or rights accruing thereform ortrademarks, whether federal, state, or common law,arising from the Seller’s compliance with Buyer’sdesigns, specifications, or instructions.

WarrantySeller hereby warrants that the goods which are thesubject matter of this contract will be manufacturedin a good workmanlike manner and all materialsused herein will be new and reasonably suitable forthe equipment. Seller warrants that if, during aperiod of five years from date of shipment of theequipment, the equipment rendered shall be foundby the Buyer to be faulty or shall fail to peform inaccordance with Seller’s specifications of theproduct, Seller shall at his expense correct thesame, provided, however, that Buyers shall ship theequipment prepaid to Seller’s facility. The Seller’sresponsibility hereunder shall be limited to replace-ment value of the equipment furnished under thiscontract.

Seller makes no warranties expressed or impliedother than those set out above. Seller specificallyexcludes the implied warranties of merchantibilityand fitness for a particular purpose. There are nowarranties which extend beyond the descriptioncontained herein. In no event shall Seller be liable forconsequential, exemplary, or punitive damages ofwhatever nature.

Any equipment returned for repair must be sentwith transportation charges prepaid. The equipmentmust remain the property of the Buyer. The afore-mentioned warranties are void if the value of theunit is invoiced to the Seller at the time of return.

IndemnificationThe Seller shall not be liable for any propertydamages whatsoever or for any loss or damagearising out of, connected with, or resulting fromthis contract, or from the performance or breachthereof, or from all services covered by or furnishedunder this contract.

In no event shall the Seller be liable for special,incidental, exemplary, or consequential damages,including but not limited to, loss of profits orrevenue, loss of use of the equipment or anyassociated equipment, cost of capital, cost ofpurchased power, cost of substitute equipment,facilities or services, downtime costs, or claims ordamages of customers or employees of the Buyerfor such damages, regardless of whether said claimor damages is based on contract, warranty, tortincluding negligence, or otherwise.

Under no circumstances shall the Seller be liablefor any personal injury whatsoever.

It is agreed that when the equipment furnishedhereunder are to be used or performed in connec-tion with any nuclear installation, facility, oractivity, Seller shall have no liability for anynuclear damage, personal injury, property damage,or nuclear contamination to any property located ator near the site of the nuclear facility. Buyer agreesto indemnify and hold harmless the Seller againstany and all liability associated therewith whatso-ever whether based on contract, tort, or otherwise.Nuclear installation or facility means any nuclearreactor and includes the site on which any of theforegoing is located, all operations conducted onsuch site, and all premises used for such opera-tions.

Notice:Any illustrations and descriptions by BeckwithElectric Co., Inc. are for the sole purpose ofidentification.

The drawings and/or specifications enclosed hereinare the proprietary property of Beckwith ElectricCo., Inc., and are issued in strict confidence;therefore, shall not be used as a basis of reproduc-tion of the apparatus described therein withoutwritten permission of Beckwith Electric Co., Inc.

No illustration or description contained hereinshall be construed as an express warranty ofaffirmation, promise, description, or sample, andany and all such express warranties are specificallyexcluded nor shall such illustration or descriptionimply a warranty that the product is merchantableor fit for a particular purpose. There shall be nowarranties which extend beyond those contained inthe Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. terms of sale.

All rights reserved by Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. No reproduction may be made without prior written approvalof the Company.

BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO., INC.6190 - 118th Avenue North • Largo, Florida 33773-3724 U.S.A.

PHONE (727) 544-2326 • FAX (727) [email protected]

www.beckwithelectric.comISO 9001:2008

© 2005 Beckwith Electric Co. All Rights Reserved.Printed in USA

800-4272-IB-07MC6 03/13

m-4272 instruction book - chipkin

Documents